Standard Patch Cable A EIA/TIA 568A Colour Scheme. Standard Patch Cable B EIA/TIA 568B Colour Scheme (AT&T) How to Assemble Patch Cables

Transcription

1 How Mercury to make 6-5 Cat5 M/E Patch Installation Cables guide How to Assemble Patch Cables 1. Strip the cable jacket back about 3/4 of an inch from the end of the cable 2. Sort the pairs so they fit into the connector in the order shown on the diagrams below 3. Insert the pairs into the connector 4. Crimp the pins with a crimp tool 5. Repeat for other end and test cable *Use stranded wire for category 5 patch cable **DO NOT UNTWIST ANY PAIR MORE THAN 1/2 INCH, Either Standard A or B can be used Standard Patch Cable A EIA/TIA 568A Colour Scheme Standard Patch Cable B EIA/TIA 568B Colour Scheme (AT&T) # COLOR 1 White-Green 2 Green 3 White-Orange 4 Blue 5 White-Blue 6 Orange 7 White-Brown 8 Brown # COLOR 1 White-Green 2 Green 3 White-Orange 4 Blue 5 White-Blue 6 Orange 7 White-Brown 8 Brown Resource Data Management Tel: Please note: The specifications of the product 80 Johnstone Avenue Fax: detailed on this data sheet may change without Hillington sales@resourcedm.com notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or Glasgow indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, G52 4NZ performance or misuse of or document.

2 How Mercury to make 6-5 Cat5 M/E Patch Installation Cables guide Crossed Patch Cable (Standard A & B) (connects 2 PC's without a hub) COLOR 1 White-Green 2 Green 3 White-Orange 4 Blue 5 White-Blue 6 Orange 7 White-Brown 8 Brown Resource Data Management Tel: Please note: The specifications of the product 80 Johnstone Avenue Fax: detailed on this data sheet may change without Hillington sales@resourcedm.com notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or Glasgow indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, G52 4NZ performance or misuse of or document.

3 Data Manager Installation Guide Data Manager Installation Guide Part Numbers: PR05XX Revision 6.3 Page 1 of 12

4 Data Manager Installation Guide Table of Contents: INSTALLATION... 3 Description... 3 Installation... 3 Wall Mounting... 3 Electrical Connections: USB, Ethernet, RS485 and Telephone connections Port Ethernet Switch: Port USB Hub:... 5 RS485 Connections*:... 5 Specification... 6 Power requirements:... 6 Relays... 6 REVISION HISTORY... 6 APPENDIX Daughter Card connection detail Relay Digital Output Expansion Board: (PR0461) Analogue Probe Input Expansion Board: (PR0460) x 4-20mA Input Board (PR0462) x 4-20mA Output Board (PR0463) x 0 5V/10V Output Board (PR0464) x 0 5V/10V Input Board (PR0465) x 0 10V Input & 2 x 0 10V Output Board (PR0466) x 240V Inputs 240V Status Detect Input Board. (PR0467) APPENDIX Installation of internal Battery Back-up for Data Manager APPENDIX Related Part Numbers Revision 6.3 Page 2 of 12

5 Data Manager Installation Guide Installation Description The Data Manager is a versatile Graphic User Interface for use with RDM Mercury and 3rd Party control and monitoring equipment. The standard unit has 12 inputs that can be configured for temperature probes, plant or defrost, and 4 volt free relays. Additional daughter boards can expand the unit, giving extra inputs (probes, plant fault and defrost) and outputs (relays). See appendix 1 for daughter board details. The Data Manager will support an IP network line, via the built-in 4 port Ethernet switch and an RS485 line, allowing for many devices to be monitored and logged. A 2x RS485 USB adapter is available for expansion to 96 RS485 devices (Two adapters would allow 160 controllers online etc). A second USB Ethernet adapter is available for connection to a second LAN or WAN. There is an optional internal modem for alarm dial-outs and 4 USB ports for additional devices. The Data Manager also has provision for an internal battery back-up. This wall mount unit is compact (310mm x 310mm x 80mm) and is powered by a Vac 50/60Hz. Installation Wall Mounting Outside dimensions and wall mount fixing centres: - 310mm 263mm 131.5mm 131.5mm 131.5mm 330mm 263mm 131.5mm Front View Rear View Use screw type: - No. 10 x 3" with suitable rawlplug. Note: The top and bottom faces of the Data Manager have a draft angle (slope).to compensate for this draft angle, shaped adapters are included so that a straight-edge can be achieved for coupling conduit. Revision 6.3 Page 3 of 12

6 Data Manager Installation Guide Electrical Connections: - Remove the left and right side panels by unscrewing the 4 screws on the side plates and lifting the side wings off. Once the side wings have been removed, power and input/output connections are available. (Note that these will vary according to your configuration; see appendix 1 for daughter card detail) Knock-outs are provided on the top, bottom and back for cable entry. This unit meets the European EMC standards for immunity and radiation, if the location of the device is such that there is a high level of electrical noise (spike, surges or dips); it is recommended that either a surge suppressor or UPS is fitted to the unit. USB port Inputs 1-12 Knock-outs x 6 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Live Neutral Earth NO C NC Daughter board positions USB, Ethernet, RS485 & Telephone connections Probe connections: lower tier: - Probe Grounds Upper tier: - Probe inputs Plant and Defrost: Lower tier: - Grounds (0V) Upper tier: - Ground (0V) return inputs Supply: Vac 50/60 Hz Once the wiring is complete, the two front covers should be replaced and secured by the 4 screws on the front. Revision 6.3 Page 4 of 12

7 Data Manager Installation Guide USB, Ethernet, RS485 and Telephone connections The connections for the following devices are on the right hand side of the Data Manager remove the wing for access: 4 x USB ports 4 x Ethernet 10/100baseT ports 1 x Telephone port (for internal modem; if fitted) 1 x RS485 Port RS485 Port USB Port Status LED 4 x USB Ports S A G B Telephone Connector 4 x Ethernet Ports 4 Port Ethernet Switch: There is a green and yellow LED associated to each of the 4 ports. The green LED when static, indicates that the connection to the device is good, the green LED then flickers when data is being transmitted. When the yellow LED is off it indicates a 10 BaseT connection. When the yellow LED is on it indicates a 100 BaseT connection. The Yellow LED is also a collision LED and will flicker when active. 4 Port USB Hub: There is a single bi-colour LED associated to each of the 4 USB ports. When the LED is off the port is inactive. When the LED is Green the port is active. When the LED is Yellow there is an error on the port e.g. over current. Note Board Issue 3.0 or higher is required to obtain 500mA supply on each USB port. Required for use with devices such as USB 3G modem. RS485 Connections*: S = screen A = Data + G = Ground B = Data - *Note the IO board on older Data Managers may vary and the wiring of the RS485 port may be inverted compared to the above diagram. Always check the screen print on the IO PCB which is fitted to the Data Manager you are installing to determine the correct wiring for the internal RS485 network. Revision 6.3 Page 5 of 12

8 Data Manager Installation Guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz Maximum supply current: 1 Amps Typical supply current: <1 Amp Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 310mm (W) x 325mm (H) x 95mm (D) Weight: 2360 Grams * Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; 2002 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation: This unit must be Earthed The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 1A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 1A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN * Weight is dependent on the DM configuration as some items are optional. Relays Fixed on-board relays: 7.5A resistive load 250Vac COS =0.4 5A inductive load 250Vac Daughter board relays, See Appendix 1 Revision History Revision Date Changes 6.0 New keypad, new IO board, front page image updated, wall mounting image updated, electrical connections image updated, IO board image updated, onboard relay data updated to include inductive load specification, part numbers table updated to list latest items. 6.1 Additional information relating to 4 port Ethernet switch included, 6 Input 240V Status board included, Battery backup text modified, part number table updated. 6.2 Pictures updated 6.3 IO board USB 500mA details introduced. Revision 6.3 Page 6 of 12

9 Data Manager Installation Guide Appendix 1 Daughter Card connection detail 3 Relay Digital Output Expansion Board: (PR0461) Relay boards have 3 x volt free relays, In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, some configurations of voltages are not allowed - see table 1 below. Table 1 Low Voltage on: - High Voltage on: - Allowed Configurations: RL1, RL2, RL3 RL1, RL2, RL3 RL1 RL2, RL3 RL2, RL3 RL1 Disallowed Configurations: RL1, RL2 RL3 RL2 RL1, RL3 RL3 RL1, RL2 Low Voltage defined as < 35 V High voltage defined as >110 V All 3 relays are rated at 5A/250V~/AC1 Contact connection detail is shown below: - Revision 6.3 Page 7 of 12

10 Data Manager Installation Guide 12 Analogue Probe Input Expansion Board: (PR0460) This board has 12 analogue inputs; each input can be configured (setup option) as a Temperature probe, Plant or Defrost input. A variety of temperature probe options are available: - PT1000 NTC 470 NTC 700 NTC 2K NTC 2K25 NTC 3K NTC 5K NTC 100K Connection detail is shown below Probe connectors: lower tier: - Probe Grounds (0V) Upper tier: - Probe inputs Plant and Defrost: Lower tier: - Grounds (0V) Upper tier: - Ground (0V) return input Revision 6.3 Page 8 of 12

11 Data Manager Installation Guide 4 x 4-20mA Input Board (PR0462) This board has 4 independent 4-20mA inputs. There is a +12 V DC output to feed the external device. 4 x 4-20mA Output Board (PR0463) GND 4-20mA Loop output 4 x 0 5V/10V Output Board (PR0464) GND Voltage Output (DC) Revision 6.3 Page 9 of 12

12 Data Manager Installation Guide 4 x 0 5V/10V Input Board (PR0465) GND Voltage Input (DC) 2 x 0 10V Input & 2 x 0 10V Output Board (PR0466) GND Voltage Output (DC) GND Voltage Output (DC) GND Voltage Input (DC) GND Voltage Input (DC) 6 x 240V Inputs 240V Status Detect Input Board. (PR0467) Input 6 - Live 6 Input 5 - Live 5 Input 4 - Live 4 Input 5 & 6 - Neutral Input 3 & 4 - Neutral Input 1 & 2 - Neutral Input 3 - Live 3 Input 2 - Live 2 Input 1 - Live 1 All inputs are rated to 240Vac. Note all Neutral connections are common as they are link on the PCB. Note: Products PR0462, PR0463, PR0464, PR0465 and PR0466 are suitable for use only with the Data Builder. Revision 6.3 Page 10 of 12

13 Data Manager Installation Guide Appendix 2 Installation of internal Battery Back-up for Data Manager PR0492 Before working on this equipment, ensure that the device is fully isolated from any supply voltage, including connections to all relays and other I/O connectors. Installation of this part must be carried out by competent personnel RDM will not be held responsible for any damage incurred to the equipment through mishandling or faulty installation of this part Instructions: 1. Remove the left side wing by unscrewing the 2 screws at the top and bottom. 2. Before removing the battery and charger board from its' packaging, make sure that you are static free. Connect the battery + terminal (red) to the red + lead of the charger board, Connect the battery - terminal (black) to the Black - lead of the charger board. 3. Slide the battery into it's compartment and slide the charger PCB into the guides making sure the interconnecting lead is to the outside. Ensure no internal cables are snagged or damaged during this procedure. Once the battery and charger board are in place, connect the 10 way interconnecting cable to it's mating half (dangles down from the main PCB) 4. The installation is complete. Re-assemble the left side wing and secure it with the 2 bolts. RDM recommend that the battery is inspected and the battery backup feature tested at least once a year. The battery should be replaced if required. Note: A new or fully discharged battery can take up to 16 hours to fully charge when installed. The Data Manager System log will display battery not charged disabled on start-up if the battery connected is not fully charged. Once fully charged the System Log will display battery charged enabled and the battery backup feature will be active. Revision 6.3 Page 11 of 12

14 Data Manager Installation Guide Appendix 3 Related Part Numbers Hardware Related Part Numbers Software Related Part Numbers DM Base model with on board PSU PR0500 Energy Saving - Optimisation Features Only PR0474 Energy Saving - Network Trim Heaters Control PR0475 DM Base model with on board PSU & SSD PR0510 Features only On-board modem PR0491 Energy Saving - Night Blinds Features only PR0476 On-board battery back up PR0492 Energy Saving - Condenser TD Features only PR Analogue probe input expansion card PR0460 Energy Saving - Performance Features only PR Relay digital output expansion card PR0461 Energy Saving - Defrost Warning Features only PR x 4-20mA Input expansion card PR0462 Energy Saving All Features PR x 4-20mA Output expansion card PR Genus compatible network PR x 0-5 or 0-10 Volt Output expansion card PR0464 IP Network Enabler - Each 32 devices PR x 0-5 or 0-10 Volt Input expansion cards PR0465 Wireless Mesh Software Enabler - Each 32 devices PR x 0-10 V Input & 2 x 0-10 V Output PR0466 Data Manager Software Upgrade to Latest Version DMSWUPG 6 Input (240V Status) PR0467 Wireless Mesh Software Enabler PR0735 USB to RS485 Network Adapter -2 x 32 devices PR0482 ActiveFM PR0487 USB card reader kit with DM wing cover PR0493 The Data Builder PR0485 DM 4 Port hub I/O board upgrade kit PR0459 The Data Builder Lite PR0485-LITE Data Manager GSM Modem PR0496 Modbus Interface Enabler PR0470* Secondary IP Interface PR0486 BACnet Interface Enabler - Each 32 devices PR0471 USB/485 Modbus Dongle for Data Manager PR0623 Siemens NetRS/NetPX Interface Enabler PR0483* Cbiss Gas Interface PR0498* Shuttle USB Logger Interface Enabler PR0499 Revision 6.3 Page 12 of 12

15 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Data Manager/Director Commissioning & Service Guide Using a PC Part Numbers: PR05XX Revision Page 1 of 82

16 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Table of Contents: COMMISSIONING AND SERVICE... 5 Data Manager version V Data Director version V CGI version V Commissioning Using a PC... 5 System Setup... 6 Set-up Local Inputs and Outputs... 6 Probe Types Supported... 8 Outputs Setup... 9 Site Setup Site ID Site Description Offline Alarm Delay Test dial-out frequency Sound/Accept alarms on the PC Card swipe on Orbit 1 option PIN/Swipe alarm accept on Panels Log Probe on Layouts Service Lockout Closure codes in Maintenance Enable console support Sort devices in alphabetical order Calls by contractor not discipline Signal alarm locally if dial out fails Authentication on Web Service Static Namespace on Web Service Log Thin Age (days) Log Thin Freq (mins) GP Run-on Gp Run-on limit (mins) CGI Compression Option Console Language Time-Zone Modem Port Secondary Web Port (0 - disabled, must be greater than 1024) Setup Users Network Operations Network Errors Remove Controller Add Controller (Manual) USB/RS485 Modbus Adapter Network Scan Energy Pack Setup Optimisation Setup Pack Recovery Setup Defrost Valve Setup Case Setup Night Blind Setup Condenser TD Discharge Liquid Return Liquid Return - Ambient Case Performance Revision Page 2 of 82

17 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Configure Sources Trim Control - Humidity Trim Control - Dewpoint Display Setup System Log Logging-on Controllers Controller related changes Set Parameters Parameter Range Checking Split Split Monitor Split Controller Hide Controller Aliases Changing Controllers Name Alias Controllers (description) Alarm Aliases Item Aliases Visibility Controller Information Controller Device List Setup for Optimisation Control Editor (Data Builder) TDB TDB Lite TDB Trial TDB Application Note Timers GP Timer Setup Global GP Timer Channels GP Timers Report GP Run-on Defrost Timers Defrost Hold Defrost Header Station Control Defrost Report USB Shuttle Temperature Logger Shuttle Limits Saved Data Log Alarms Configuration: Default Actions Alarm Actions Factory Preset Actions Relays: Relay Configuration Accept with delay Clear with delay Timed Modems: Front Panel: Modem Alarm Test: Mail Alarm Test: Reset: Actions Alarm Index System Revision Page 3 of 82

18 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide DHCP Server Detected Power Fail Condenser TD Alarm Times Modem Settings Warnings - Defrosts terminating on time General DHCP Information Export Log Data System Dump Software Version Accept All Alarms Clear Consoles Send Layout Get Layout Remove Layout Network Card Setup Set Time Upgrade Software Plant TDB Upload Delete Type Files Clear Alarm Log System Restart Add Feature Mail Server Setup System Config Save Site Setup Restore Site Setup Wireless Mesh Network Setup Reports Accepting Alarms & Appending Comments APPENDIX 1: CONNECTING A PC TO THE DATA MANAGER Ethernet Connection Possible Problems APPENDIX 2: SAVE/RESTORE DATA MANAGER CONFIGURATION GUIDE APPENDIX 3: RELATED PART NUMBERS APPENDIX 4: TRIM HEATER CONTROL APPENDIX 5: TERMS OF USE CHANGE HISTORY Revision Page 4 of 82

19 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Commissioning Using a PC Commissioning and Service Data Manager version V Data Director version V CGI version V The following section contains information relating to the Data Manager as seen when accessed via a PC at "install" level. Note that some of the screens and operations are not available when logged in at "service" or "store" level. From the home screen, click the Service Icon: Which results in this screen: - The first service page contains Icon links to all of the service/install functions: - Alarms System Controllers Timers Shuttle General General Note. Icons may not be exactly the same as depicted in this document or in the same location. Revision Page 5 of 82

20 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide System Setup From the service page, press the system icon Set-up Local Inputs and Outputs From the Service, System page, click on the "Local IO" icon: Which results in this screen: - Inputs Setup From the Local IO page, click on the "Input Setup" icon: The Base model of Data Manager has 12 analogue inputs, these can be used for a variety of probe types, as well as plant or defrost inputs. In addition to these 12 inputs, there are 3 expansion board positions. A variety of input and output boards are available for these positions, the Data Manager will automatically recognise what board has been used and display the available inputs and/or outputs on the appropriate screen. Please see Appendix 3 Related Part Numbers for the additional local IO available. Revision Page 6 of 82

21 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Input Setup Page: - To setup an input, move the mouse over the input and left click, the setup page for that input will be displayed: - In the above example, a 4-20mA input has been selected from an expansion board, This input has been setup as a transducer -1 to 12 bar, with upper and lower alarm limits and delay. Other input types have similar setup screens. Revision Page 7 of 82

22 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Probe Types Supported PT1000 2K 470R 700R 3K 2K25 100K 5K 6K 10K 10K(2) USA The above probe types are supported. This allows for monitoring with over and under temperature alarms including an alarm delay. A probe input can also be assigned to another local input configured as a defrost input. When this defrost input is active alarms are inhibited for the temperature probe input. Once the defrost input is deactivated temperatures alarms are enabled once the recovery parameter expires. An offset can also be added to account for long cable runs. Input temperature range -99 degrees Celsius to +350 degrees Celsius for PT1000 probes. Inputs can also be configured as a Normally Open or Normally Closed plant fault input with alarm delay. An Input can also be configured as a defrost input. The Data Manager fixed inputs have alarm index numbers of: - Configured as a probe input: Probe Fault 6 Probe OT 4 Probe UT 5 Configured as a plant input: Plant Fault 3 Revision Page 8 of 82

23 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Outputs Setup From the Local IO page, click on the "Output Setup" icon: Which results in this screen: - Select an output to change and left click the mouse. Select the mode required, enter a description for the output and click Set Output Information Mode options are: - GP Timer Relay - For use with a GP Timer channel. Alarm Relay - Alarms can be directed to this output via the Alarm Actions Unused - Relay is available for use by the Data Builder program. Other Output types have similar screens. Revision Page 9 of 82

24 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Site Setup From the Service, System page, click on the "Site Setup" icon: Site ID Enter the Name of the site. (Avoid using control characters such as &, *,,.) Site Description Enter the description, usually This is the site address. Note: If remote alarm handling is used, the first line of this site description must be exactly the same as the Site ID field. Offline Alarm Delay Enter the Offline Alarm delay. (Default = 15 mins). Note the Alarm index number for a controller offline is 7. Revision Page 10 of 82

25 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Test dial-out frequency Enter the time in hours. (Default = 24 hrs). Any Modem configured as Modem will send a test dial out alarm every x number of hours. Please note that any Modem set to , SMS, GSM or Other does not use the test dial-out feature. Sound/Accept alarms on the PC Check this option if you wish to use the PC to accept alarms. There are four possible choices. None Local (Alarm bell is present on eth 0 only) All but dial up (Alarm bell is present on eth 0 and eth 1 only) All Allow alarm comments Check this option to assign comments to a particular alarm when accepting the alarm. Once entered comments cannot be edited or removed from an alarm. Subsequent comments can be appended to an accepted alarm. Card swipe on Orbit 1 option Check this option if cards are required to accept alarms on Orbit Outstation 1. PIN/Swipe alarm accept on Panels Check this option if Pin s are required to accept alarms on the Data Manager uncheck this option to use the Mute key to accept alarms. Log Probe on Layouts Check this option if the Log Probe temperature value is required on the layout instead of the control temperature value. Service Lockout Check this option to prevent service level logons changing parameters. Closure codes in Maintenance Check this option for M&S sites, otherwise uncheck. Enable console support Uncheck this option if the primary Ethernet port (Eth0) is used for external LAN and not controllers. Sort devices in alphabetical order Check this option to sort the devices in alphabetical order otherwise the devices will be sorted by bay-case number. Revision Page 11 of 82

26 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Calls by contractor not discipline Calls displayed via the Maintenance icon are shown by contractor and not discipline. Check this option for M&S sites, otherwise uncheck. Signal alarm locally if dial out fails Data Manager will generate an alarm locally informing the user of a failed alarm dial out. Any subsequent alarms which follow will be directed to the Fail action. Please see Alarm Actions for further details. Authentication on Web Service Check this box if authentication is required when accessing the Web services feature. Note for further details on the features available please contact RDM. Static Namespace on Web Service Check this box if for a static namespace when using web services. Please contact RDM Technical Support for further details if required. Log Thin Age (days) The Data manager will thin out stored data after this time period. The minimum value available to set is 100 days. Any data older than the Log Thin Age parameter will be conditioned using the Log Thin Freq parameter. For example if the Data Manager has a SSD fitted and the Log Thin Age parameter is set to 100 days and the Log thin Feq is set to 60 minutes then graph data older than 100 days will be stored at 60 minute intervals instead of 15 seconds. Warning once data is removed it is impossible to retrieve. General Note: When the Data Manager has a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) or Solid State Drive (SSD), PR0510, fitted graph data is stored at 15 second intervals. Without either of these options, PR0500, graph data is stored at 15 second intervals for the last 24 hour period. Out with this 24 hour period data is stored at 15 minute intervals. Log Thin Freq (mins) Select between 5, 15 or 60 Minute intervals. GP Run-on Set this to activate the GP Timer run-on feature. If selected a new (GP Run-on) Icon will be displayed on the Home-page. This feature allows for the extension of a GP timer channel on period or will bring on a GP timer channel which is currently off by the number of minutes entered by the end user. Gp Run-on limit (mins) Set this to limit the GP Timer run-on period which the end user can enter. (Range is 0 mins to 3600 mins) Revision Page 12 of 82

27 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide CGI Compression Option Used to speed-up web page information to a browser. If your browser supports compressed web page data, this option can be selected to on, if unsure, leave the setting on Auto. Console Language Select the language to be displayed on the console (Language files must be present) Time-Zone Select the appropriate location for where the Data Manager site is located. Modem Port Select between internal or USB for outgoing data. When configured as internal the Data Manager will utilise its onboard analogue modem or GSM modem, if either is fitted, for sending alarm information. The USB option enables a 3G USB modem to be connected to one of the Data Managers USB ports. This device will allow the Data Manager to send alarm information as an SMS text message to a mobile telephone. Please contact RDM to confirm compatible devices. Note the 3G USB modem does not allow remote access to the Data Manager. When using either a GSM modem or USB 3G Modem to send SMS text messages select SMS (GSM Modem) under Modem Setup. When set as USB an internal analogue modem or GSM modem can still be utilised to connect to the Data Manager however outgoing traffic will be routed through the USB 3G modem. Use modem information to determine the modem type fitted, network operator, signal strength etc. Secondary Web Port (0 - disabled, must be greater than 1024) HTTP connections by default are made on Port 80 of the Data Manager and Port 80 is permanently enabled regardless of the port number entered in this feature. Define a second port number if required. Revision Page 13 of 82

28 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Setup Users From the Service, System page, press the User icon: This results in the User setup screen being displayed: - To add users, click on the "Add User" Icon Which results in this screen: - Enter a User Name and password. Select an access level: - Store, Service or Install. Enter a card number (if using swipe cards on Orbit 1 s) this field is not seen if card swipe on Orbit 1 is unchecked. Enter a PIN. Note. If cards are required for users, set the user up here and then use the Data Manager console to add the card. See Add Users. Revision Page 14 of 82

29 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Network Operations From the Service, System page, click on the Network icon: This results in the following options will be displayed: - Network Errors From the above Network page, click on the Network Errors icon: This results in this screen being displayed: - Revision Page 15 of 82

30 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide There are three categories of Network Errors reported: - 1. Offline 2. Online 3. Data Each of the categories has "No Reply" errors and "Errors" reported. The errors reported are an accumulation of the errors since the last power-on or reset of the Data Manager. The network errors page gives an indication to the health of a given network. If for example there are 6 controllers connected to an RS485 network and all six have a high number of data no reply error s then this may indicate an issue with the network. Firstly check the Belden cable connections are secure, no cables have been damaged and so forth. Now clear the network error s and check to see if the network error s are still be generated. Please note that Offline and Online errors relate to RS485 and RDM wireless mesh controllers only. Data errors are shown for IP, RS485 and RDM wireless mesh controllers. The Controller Type file and network address are also shown for each device. Remove Controller From the Service, System, Network page, click on the Remove Controller icon: This results in the Remove Controller(s) screen: - Check the tick-box of the controller(s) you wish to remove and click the "Remove Controller(s)" button. Note: If an RS485 controller is removed from the devices list by mistake then it needs to have its network setting purged (CLRA) and re-registered to get it back online. If an IP controller is removed from the devices list by mistake then it will come back online without any operator intervention. Revision Page 16 of 82

31 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Add Controller (Manual) From the Service, System, Network page, click on the Add Controller icon: This results in the Add Controller screen: - Use this to add controllers that cannot handle DHCP addressing. (Not necessary for RDM controllers, unless used in IP-L mode) From the drop down menu select a Device type. Example: - Type in the IP address of the controller such as Note. Generally avoid IP addresses above as these are issued by the DHCP server. The range to can be used, but go to the controller Information page to check the address you intend to use has not previously been allocated. Type in the controller name (6 characters only) such as GASMON Type in the alias such as Gas Leak Detector Click the "Add Controller" button to execute the command. Note please check the Data Manager System Config to ensure the appropriate network interface is enabled for the controllers you wish to manually add. For example to logon Modbus devices the Modbus interface must be enabled. Revision Page 17 of 82

32 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide USB/RS485 Modbus Adapter This device connects to one of the Data Managers USB ports. Each Modbus adapter has 2 RS485 network lines and each network line allows up to 32 Modbus devices per line. The Data Manager currently supports a single USB/RS485 modbus adapter only. Configuration From the Add Controller page enter the following. Device Type Name Alias Type USB Line Modbus Address Select Modbus/Usb Device Enter a six character name. Enter an appropriate description. Select the desired Modbus controller type from the list. Select the network line on which the controller is physically connected. Enter the Modbus address of the device. RS485 Configuration Note the RS485 configuration of the Adapter is fixed and uses the following: - Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity No Stop Bits 1 Currently the following Modbus devices are supported: - Flash D Power Monitor (4 Wire) Flash D Power Monitor (3 Wire) VIP396 Energy Meter Sirio Energy Meter 4MOD Pulse Counter VIP396 Energy Meter (IEEE) Autometer IC970 Shark Energy Meter Powerscout TQ Gas Monitor 16 & 24 Channel variants If you have a Modbus device which is not listed please contact RDM Technical Support. Revision Page 18 of 82

33 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Network Scan From the Service, System, Network page, click on the Network Scan icon: This results in this screen: - Check the tick-box on the network line you want to scan and then click the start button. The scan will start, then after a period of time (varies according to number of controllers on the network) will conclude with compatible controllers found put online. Use this feature with extreme caution as it could return with some already online controllers not being found. Please do not use this option unless you understand the effect it will have or have been asked to use it by RDM Technical Support. You may cause severe network problems otherwise. Network scan feature supports both IP and Genus networks. Network scan can be used to scan an IP network and bring on a number of controllers which have been assigned static IP addresses. Note: Some Genus compatible devices do not support this feature and may drop offline. Revision Page 19 of 82

34 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Energy Pack Setup From the Energy page, click the "Pack Setup" icon: Select the pack you wish to configure: Optimisation Setup Field Pack Controller Pack Input Pack command Condenser controller Condenser Input Refrigerant Period Opt Up Value Opt Down Value Opt Zero Value Single case zero count Multiple case zero count Cases Running (%) Description Use the drop-down menu to select the pack (controller name) you wish to optimise with. Use the drop-down menu to select the suction transducer for the section you wish to optimise. Use the drop-down menu to select the section you wish to optimise. For a Dual Pack Section 1 is Optimise 1 and Section 2 is Optimise 2. Currently unused, may be used in the future Currently unused, may be used in the future Currently unused, may be used in the future Use to define the period over which optimisation is based % efficiency below which will optimise up (% of controller valve opening) % efficiency above which will optimise down (% of controller valve opening) % efficiency for no optimisation (% of controller valve opening) Number of Periods a single case reaches the Opt Zero Value before optimisation is turned off Number of cases that reach the Opt Zero Value during a single period before optimisation is turned off Percentage of cases which must be online before optimisation is enabled. For example if this is set to 100% then every controller assigned to the Pack setup would have to be online before the feature operated. Energy Saving - Optimisation is an energy saving function; when setup correctly energy savings of up to 30% can be achieved. Revision Page 20 of 82

35 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Pack Recovery Setup Pack recovery can be used in the event of a pack failure. When the selected input is activated all the case controller refrigeration valves, operating from that pack as selected in Case Setup, are forced closed. When the input has cleared the Data Manager will begin a recovery process and allow a pre-determined number of controllers to begin opening their valves over a set period of time. Mercury case controllers must have the appropriate software to use this feature. See Mercury case controller user document for further details. Pack Fail Ctlr - Pack Fail Input - Use Standby - Recovery Count - Select the source of the pack failure from a controller in the device list. Select the source of the pack failure input from the controller selected above. If the Pack Fail Ctlr selected is a pack controller then ticking the Use Standby option will force controller valves closed whenever the pack controller is in standby instead of using a dedicated input. The number of controllers allowed to open their valves, once the recovery process starts, in a given period. Each period is fixed at one minute. If this parameter is set to 3 then 3 case controllers would begin refrigeration once the pack fail input has cleared, after a one delay a further 3 controllers will start the refrigeration process until all cases resume normal refrigeration control. Defrost Valve Setup Valve controller - Valve output - Select the appropriate defrost header station controller from the drop down list. Determines the relay that will be operated, from the above controller, when any case mapped to the pack setup configured is in defrost. Select the relay output from a drop down list. Note only relays which allow remote operation should be selected. Revision Page 21 of 82

36 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Case Setup From the Energy page, click the "Case Setup" icon: Case setup for energy saving requires the above fields to be selected: - Pack: Valve Type: Length: Check Blinds: DF Warn: Select the pack number, cross-check with the Pack Setup page (Pack Optimisation). For use with Pack optimisation energy feature. If Mercury 6-5M set to LLSV If Mercury 6-5E using EEV control set to EEV If Mercury 6-5E using EET or EET/EEV control set to EPR Case length Select yes to enable Night Blind check. Warning alarm created if blinds are not pulled down after trading. Select yes for warning alarm if consecutive defrosts terminate on time. Note - This function is disabled if the number in the field: - "Set Warning Information" is set to 0 Note Hold down Ctrl key and click on "Check Blinds" or "Df Warn" heading to toggle all items from either Yes to No or from No to Yes. Revision Page 22 of 82

37 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Night Blind Setup From the Energy page, click the "Night Blinds" icon: Case Count: This is the alarm threshold value. GP Channel: This is the GP timer channel the night blind checker uses for detecting abnormal situations; such as a no trading day. Normally this channel would be set to Store opening times or case lights Check Blinds: Use to select which cases will be checked for the status of their night blinds. Click the Set Blinds Detect after entering the values. Each case also has a colour performance indicator. Green equates to a case that has definitely had the night blinds used. Red shows that no night blinds have been used. Orange indicates that the night blinds may have been used. Revision Page 23 of 82

38 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Condenser TD From the Energy page, click the "Condenser TD" icon: This feature allows for the early warning of problems associated with a condenser. 3 temperature probes are used; Ambient, Liquid Return and Discharge. The probes can be any 3 probes in the system and their source is mapped using this page. 3 levels of alarms can be set, Pre-warning, Warning and Alarm. This feature highlights a condenser which is not operating efficiently thus wasting energy. Up to 25 condenser channels can be monitored. Each channel enabled appears as a virtual controller in the Device List which allows for graphing of data, changing of parameters and so forth. There are two methods available to monitor condenser performance: - Discharge Liquid Return or Liquid Return Ambient. Discharge Liquid Return The Condenser Temperature Differential (TD) value is calculated by subtracting the Discharge temperature from the Liquid Return. Channel Enabled: Ambient Cutin: Pre-Warning Temp: Warning Temp: Alarm Temp: Used to activate the condenser warning for this channel. Set to Yes to enable. Temperature above which the condenser TD warnings are active. Temperature difference level at which the Pre-warning is activated once the calculated TD value drops below this value and the alarm delay has expired. Temperature difference level at which the Warning is activated once the calculated TD value drops below this value and the alarm delay has expired. Temperature difference level at which the Alarm is activated once the calculated TD value drops below this value and the alarm delay has expired. Each of the above has an associated delay time that can be set from minutes. Probe Error Time: If there is a probe fault, the alarm can be delayed by minutes. Revision Page 24 of 82

39 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Liquid Return - Ambient The Condenser TD value is calculated by subtracting the Liquid Return temperature from the Ambient Air On temperature. Channel Enabled: Ambient Cutin: Design TD: Pre-Warning Temp: Warning Temp: Alarm Temp: Used to activate the condenser warning for this channel. Set to Yes to enable. Temperature above which the condenser TD warnings are active. Enter the Design TD of the condenser. Figure added to the Design TD parameter and is used to generate the Pre-warning Temp alarm. The alarm occurs once the calculated Condenser TD rise above this value and the alarm delay has expired. Figure added to the Design TD parameter and is used to generate the Warning Temp alarm. The alarm occurs once the calculated Condenser TD rise above this value and the alarm delay has expired. Figure added to the Design TD parameter and is used to generate the Alarm Temp alarm. The alarm occurs once the calculated Condenser TD rise above this value and the alarm delay has expired. Each of the above has an associated delay time that can be set from minutes. Kelvin (K) is used to denote a temperature difference. Probe Error Time: If there is a probe fault, the alarm can be delayed by minutes. Note the Discharge temperature source is a monitor probe only and isn t utilised by the feature. Revision Page 25 of 82

40 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Case Performance From the Energy page, click the "Performance" icon: The performance feature; if enabled will monitor the performance of the case and give it a score. The score is based on the set-point, differential, over-temperature alarms and under-temperature alarms. A score of 1 equates to a good performance, a score of 10 equates to a poor performance. The performance indicator is also displayed in the Controller List as shown below (TPI = Temperature Performance Indicator). If this feature is enabled on a controller then an extra parameter becomes available, TPI Alarm level which has a range of 0 10, to set and alarms can be generated to alert users of cases which are under performing. The default Case Performance alarm index number for each controller is 6. Note by holding down the Ctrl key and click on the "Enable" heading then the case performance feature can be turned on or off for all cases. If the energy feature Pack Optimisation has been enabled there will be an additional column Pack, as shown on the right. This also has a similar performance indicator for each case and gives an indication as too which case is holding optimisation off. Red indicates a case holding optimisation off. Green is ok. When a controller is assigned to a pack then an extra parameter becomes available for that controller Valve Performance Alarm. This can be used to flag up any controller that has a high valve opening level (Range is 0 10). The default Valve Performance alarm index number for each controller is 6. Revision Page 26 of 82

41 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Configure Sources This feature allows the user to select the source of the items used to calculate the Case Performance figures. This introduces flexibility and allows the Data Manager to calculate TPI values for devices other than Mercury refrigeration controllers. One such item could be a Data Manager local temperature probe input. Click on Configure Source and the screen below is shown. Select the Type file number for the controller type you wish to configure. In this example Type has been selected a DM Temperature probe. The screen below is shown. Input Setpoint Diff Over Value Under value State - Select the source of the Temperature Input used for calculation. - Select the Setpoint the device is trying to maintain (If available). - Select the operating Diff of the controller (If available). - Select upper limit e.g. Over Temperature setpoint - Select lower limit e.g. Under Temperature setpoint - Select the control state (if available). Allows the algorithm to take into account special events e.g. Defrost. Therefore input temperature will not have an effect on the calculated performance figure during this period. In the above example the temperature probe input has no setpoint or diff to select. The calculation will therefore assume the mid way value between the Over Value and Under Value as the setpoint. To calculate a performance figure the minimum required items are Input, Over Value and Under Value. Note if Mercury or ML Case controllers are used with Case Performance you will not have to edit this feature. Revision Page 27 of 82

42 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Trim Control - Humidity From the Energy page, click the "Trim Control" icon: Set fields: - Control type: No Probe Time: GP Channel: GP Off Limit: rh Source: Humidity (%rh): Trim %: Select between Dewpoint or Humidity control Probe fault delay time (in minutes) Allows a GP channel to set the trims to a pre-determined level (normally store opening times) Trim level when the above GP channel is off. Map this to the controller that has the humidity sensor. Minimum and maximum levels (see graph below) Minimum and maximum trim power (see graph below) The Data Manager will send network commands to the selected controllers to pulse their trim relay to the level determined by the values shown on the graph. The trim optimisation period is 5 minutes. (Note if the trim maximum value is set to 70% an immediate 30% saving can be made) Note: If the humidity sensor fails the alarm Trim no probe is generated by the System. Revision Page 28 of 82

43 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Trim Control - Dewpoint The Dewpoint is calculated on a regular basis from the ambient temperature and Humidity of the surrounding shop floor area. The trims are pulsed to maintain the Mullion temperature above the calculated Dewpoint temperature. Thus preventing condensation from forming on case doors. The Data Manager will send network commands to the selected controllers to pulse their trim relay. Note: - The mullion is the vertical part of the case door frame. Control type: No Probe Time: GP Channel: GP Off Limit: Mullion Offset: Mullion Start Level: Mullion Increment: Select between Dewpoint or Humidity control Probe fault delay time (in minutes) Allows a GP channel to set the trims to a pre-determined level Trim level when the above GP channel is off Depending on the placement of the probe the mullion offset may have to be adjusted Percentage at which the trims are pulsed when Dewpoint control is started* Percentage by which trim power is increased/decreased depending on the Mullion temperature * Note this is also the percentage at which the trims will pulse should a probe fault occur. rh Source: Amb Temp source: Map this to the controller that has the humidity sensor. Map this to a controller or Data Manager input to measure the ambient temperature. Both of the above values are used to calculate the Dewpoint. Edit Mullion Sources Here the user can define the source of the Mullion temperature readings. For example one of the 12 Analogue inputs that come as standard on the Data Manager could be mapped as a Mullion temperature source for a case Mullion. Revision Page 29 of 82

44 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Display Setup From the Energy page, click the "Display Setup" icon: The feature allows the user to map up to 8 items for reporting purposes. The item values are then processed to show the desired data before the processed value is displayed on the Data Manager Home Page. Description Type Items To Use High Alarm High Warning Low Warning Low Alarm Warning Delay Alarm Delay Enter a name which best indentifies the process. Select between Total, Minimum, Maximum and Average to create the process value. Up to 8 sources can be mapped. Select the controller and item required for use. When the process value is above this limit and the Alarm delay has expired a High Alarm is created. Onscreen text colour changes to Red at this point. When the process value is above this limit and the Warning delay has expired a High Warning alarm is created. Onscreen text colour changes to Orange at this point. When the process value is below this limit and the Warning delay has expired a Low Warning alarm is created. Onscreen text colour changes to Orange at this point. When the process value is below this limit and the Alarm delay has expired a Low Alarm is created. Onscreen text colour changes to Red at this point. Delay applied to High/Low Warning alarms. Set to 0 to disable alarm feature. Delay applied to High/Low Alarms. Set to 0 to disable alarm feature. Note when no alarms are present the process value text colour is shown as Green. Type Selection Total Minimum Maximum Average The total of all items configured is used as the process value. The minimum value from the items configured is used as the process value. The maximum value from the items configured is used as the process value. The average of all items configured is used as the process value. When the feature is enabled a system controller entitled DISPLAY appears in the controller Device List. If a fault occurs on anyone of the items e.g. a probe failure, then it is discounted until the fault is rectified. Revision Page 30 of 82

45 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide System Log Click on the system Log icon to view the System Log. Clicking the Older icon allows the user to view older system log entries. Logging-on Controllers 1. Setup the controller network address according to the information given in the controller user guide. 2. Ensure the network and its associated controllers are correctly connected to the Data Manager. 3. Ensure the appropriate network interface is enabled on the Data Manager for the network in use. 4. Turn the controllers on. Observe the number of online controllers increasing by viewing the "Home" screen on the Data Manager or the "Home" page on the PC browser. Once controllers are online, they can be configured and aliased from the PC browser. Number of controllers on and offline are shown here. These numbers update as controllers come online. Revision Page 31 of 82

46 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Controller related changes From the Service page, click the "Controllers" icon: This results in this screen: - Controller related operations available are: - Set Parameters Aliases Controller Info Case Setup Split Control Editor The Data Builder (TDB) Revision Page 32 of 82

47 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Set Parameters To change controller parameters, click on the Set Parameters icon: This results in the controller parameters page being displayed: - Check the tick-box against the controller you wish to change parameters and then click the Set Parameters button. Note: Multiple controllers of the same type can be checked and changed together. This screen will now be displayed: - Type in the required values in the appropriate fields and click "Set Parameters". The parameters will be saved in the controller s memory. Parameters can be "locked" preventing further changes being made at the controller display (except by an authorised user). Check the "Locked" tick box against each parameter you require to lock and then press "Set Parameters". Note: The Data Manager reads and writes to the HDD/SSD every 30 minutes; on the hour and half past the hour, consequently it could be up to 30 minutes before locked parameters that are changed get restored. Revision Page 33 of 82

48 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Parameter Range Checking The Data Manager will highlight values entered into a parameter field which are out with the valid range of the controllers parameter. When the user presses the Set Parameters button the Data Manager will highlight any item which is out of range. Shown in the above screenshot the value -66 has been entered for the parameter Chan 1 Offset on controller RC66-6. This value is not a valid number, as the parameter range is -10 to +10 degrees Celsius. The Data Manager highlights this error in red and shows the minimum and maximum values for the parameter. The Data Manager will not change any other parameters until a valid value has been entered for the problem parameter. Revision Page 34 of 82

49 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Split Clicking the Split icon results in the following options: - Split Monitor RDM multi-channel monitors; such as the Mercury 6 Monitor, can be split into individual channels. Once the monitor has been split, each channel takes on the form of an individual controller. After the split, the channels names are identified by the addition of the channel number after the original monitor name. These names must be aliased in the normal way to create the 6 character controller name. Example: If a Mercury 6 Monitor has been named Mon-06, (note: the controller name must not exceed 6 characters) after the split Mon-06 will not be seen on the devices list, instead all active channels of Mon-06 will be shown as: - If a channel is off, it will not appear on the devices page. Mon Channel 1 Mon Channel 2 Mon Channel 3 Mon Channel 4 Mon Channel 5 Mon Channel 6 These devices now function as virtual controllers, and can be setup and operated like a normal controller. If for some reason the channels are required to be re-combined back to a single device, this can be done by selecting the stop button on the split monitors screen. Performing this operation will reset all of the split aliases back to the single monitor defaults. If a monitor has previously been configured (item aliases, alarm aliases, alarm index numbers etc) the split monitor function will retain these values and settings. Clicking on the Split Monitor icon will result in a page similar to this being displayed: - Click the Start button on any Monitors that are available to split. For a controller to appear in this list you must have changed the controller name to a six character name and the controller must be one that the software is set up to split. For example Mercury Monitor or 48 Channel Data monitor. Revision Page 35 of 82

50 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide After a split, to activate an off channel, or change the channel function, click on the edit button and select the desired function. Example of Edit Monitor on a 48 channel Data Monitor Note: - On a 48 channel Data Monitor after the split: defrost channels are not shown as controllers, but the associations to the probe channels are retained. Use the normal set Parameters function to complete the channel set-up. Revision Page 36 of 82

51 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Split Controller The Split controller feature can be used to split the inputs, outputs and parameters of one controller to create multiple controllers. For example a Pack/Condenser controller can be split so that it appears as two controllers on the Data Manager device list. One controller could have the inputs, outputs and the parameters for Section 1, the pack control, with the second controller having the inputs, outputs and parameters for Sections 2 the condenser control. Clicking on the Split Controller icon will result in a page similar to this being displayed: - Clicking on the Cancel button associated to a controller from the Choose split controller to cancel list will allow the user to stop a split currently operating on a controller. Clicking on the View button associated to a controller will allow the user to see the split details for that controller. Revision Page 37 of 82

52 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Click on the controller you wish to split which will result in the screen opposite. In this example a controller PLTTDB was selected. Enter four characters which will make up the first part of the controller(s) name (e.g. MONT). Enter a maximum of two characters into the suffix field for each item you wish to group together, to create a new controller, when the split feature is used. For example any item which has a 01 in the suffix column will be grouped together to create a controller. Any item which has a 02 in the suffix column will be grouped together to create a controller. Click Set Split to begin the controller split. Once split the new controllers will appear in the device list. This is in the screen opposite with MONT01 and MONT02 from our example. The device list also indicates how many controllers have been split or are hidden by the Hide Controller feature. PLTTDB would now count as a hidden device. By clicking on MONT01 its values are displayed. MONT01 has its own inputs, outputs, parameters and alarms. The split controller name and description can now be aliased. Revision Page 38 of 82

53 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Clear Suffix Populate with first character Populate with first two characters Populate with last character Populate with last two characters Characters in all suffix fields are deleted. First character from an item name is placed in the corresponding suffix field. First two characters from an item name are placed in the corresponding suffix field. Last character from an item name is placed in the corresponding suffix field. Last two characters from an item name are placed in the corresponding suffix field. To find out the parent device of a split controller please refer to the Controller Information page and view the Address column for a given split controller. Hide Controller Clicking on the Hide Controller icon results in the screen below. Select the controllers you wish to hide by ticking the appropriate box and clicking the Hide Controller button. Any controller which is hidden will not appear in the controller device list and it will not be configurable via the Alarm Indexes page, Controller Parameter page and so forth. The device will still appear under the Controller Info page. The Data Manager Device list also indicates the number of Hidden controllers. This feature is intended for use in conjunction with the Split Controller feature. The DHCP page shows hidden controllers by greying out the controller name. Revision Page 39 of 82

54 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Aliases To change Aliases, click on the Aliases icon: Which results in this screen: - From this screen, the following aliases can be accessed for change: - Names (allows for the controller name and/or description to be changed) Alarms (allows for alarm messages to be changed) Items (allows for individual controller item names to be changed) Visibility (allows the user to hide inputs, outputs or parameters completely for a given controller or make them viewable to authorised users only e.g. Store, Service or Install level.) Revision Page 40 of 82

55 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Changing Controllers Name To change the name of a controller, click the Name Alias icon: This results in this screen being displayed: - Controllers that allow a name change will be displayed as a hyperlink (see Hotcab) on the above screen. Click on this hyperlink to change the controller name. This screen will be displayed: - Type in the name you want displayed in the field provided and then click "Set Name". Note. 6 characters only, are allowed for this field. Avoid the use of control characters such as &, %, * etc. Alias Controllers (description) While on the Name Alias screen, check the tick-box(s) of the controller(s) you wish to alias and type in the alias name you want in the "Alias to set" field. Then click the "Set Aliases" button. The Aliases will be changed. Up to 32 characters can be used, and multiple controllers can be changed together. Revision Page 41 of 82

56 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Alarm Aliases Click on the "Alarms" icon to change alarm aliases: Which results in this screen: - Tick the check-box of the controller whose alarm aliases you wish to set, then click "Set Aliases" Which results in this screen: - Type in the new alarm alias in the field(s) up to 32 characters. To change the alarm type from the controllers default, select the new type from the drop-down box in the "Type Alias" column. Click "Set Alarm Aliases" to implement the change(s) - the Data Manager will indicate the operation and revert back to the previous screen. Revision Page 42 of 82

57 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Item Aliases Click on the "Items" icon to change alarm aliases: Which results in this screen: - Tick the check-box of the controller whose item aliases you wish to set, then click "Set Aliases" Which results in this screen: - Type in the new item name (up to 16 characters) in the relevant field and then click "Set Item Aliases" to complete the operation. The Data Manager will indicate the operation and revert back to the previous screen. Revision Page 43 of 82

58 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Visibility Click on the "Visibility" icon to set items: Which results in this screen: - Select a controller from the list. Multiples of controllers with the same type can be selected and set together. Shown above is the list of inputs, outputs and parameters for a case controller. Configure the items required and click Set Items to save the changes. All Store Service Install Hide Selected items are viewable all of the time. Selected items are viewable only when the user is logged in at Store level or above. Selected items are viewable only when the user is logged in at Service level or above. Selected items are viewable only when the user is logged in at Install level. Selected items are hidden from the user completely and are not viewable. Revision Page 44 of 82

59 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Controller Information Click on the Information icon for advanced information: The columns give the following information relating to controllers: Controller: Type: Version: CRC: Bit-switches: Address: ID: Name Unique number for each different type of controller Software revision Error check code (not always used) Genus controller bit-switch settings Assigned network address: Note for a Split device the parent controller name is displayed. Controller ID (e.g. Mercury IP module switch settings) Controller Device List The Controller Device list has a colour coded key which highlights the different controller/device types. Currently the possible device items are: - IP Genus DM TDB System Monitor BACNet Danbus Wireless Split LON IP Device RS485 Genus Device Data Manager Local IO Data Manager TDB program System Device e.g. Condenser TD Channel Mercury Monitor Split via Split Monitor Feature BACnet Device Danbus Device RDM Wireless Device Device Created from Split Controller Feature Danfoss LON Device Revision Page 45 of 82

60 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Setup for Optimisation Click on the Setup icon to set the controllers ready for case optimisation: Use this page in conjunction with the "Pack Setup" page to configure the system for optimisation. Enter the Pack number: 1 to 10 (this corresponds to the pack number on the Pack Setup page) Enter the Valve type: Auto (the system will pickup the valve type from the controller) EEV (Electronic Expansion Valve) LLSV (Liquid Line Solenoid Valve) BPR (Back Pressure Regulator) Enter the Case Length: Drop down menu with case lengths Check Blinds: Yes/No to check for night blind use DF Warn: Select for defrost time termination warnings Note Hold down Ctrl key and click on "Check Blinds" or "Df Warn" heading to toggle all items from either Yes to No or from No to Yes. Click "Set Case Information" when complete. Revision Page 46 of 82

61 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Control Editor (Data Builder) The Data Manager has the facility to run the RDM Data Builder. This is a program that allows the user to design and run programs using both the Data Manager internal I/O and I/O through network devices. Refer to the Data Builder User Guide for full instructions on how to use the Data Builder features. Data Builder can be enabled in the Data Manager in two configuration options: - TDB (PR0485) or TDB-LITE (PR0485-LITE). TDB Click the start, edit, delete or save keys to execute the command. Click the hyperlink Create New to create a new Data Builder design. Click the hyperlink Upload PLC File to bring in a previously created TDB file. Before a program can be started a 6 character Slave name must be entered for the TDB program. This name will be assigned to the TDB program when it appears in the controller device list. With the full TDB option a maximum of 16 programs can be running at any one time and each program can utilise up to 4096 blocks. If the maximum allowable number of blocks is exceeded then the Start button for the program will be greyed out until the number of blocks used is reduced below When creating a TDB program anything placed onto the TDB canvas would constitute a block, for example static text, a setting block, a mathematical block, the interconnecting lines between one block and another etc. Revision Page 47 of 82

62 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide TDB Lite TDB Lite has the same features as the full TDB option but has the following restrictions applied. Only 1 TDB program can be running at any time and each program is allowed a maximum of 40 blocks. Blocks include such items as Static text, Interconnecting lines between one item and another, Functional Blocks, Mathematical Blocks etc. Click the start, edit, delete or save keys to execute the command. Click the hyperlink Create New to create a new Data Builder design. Click the hyperlink Upload PLC File to bring in a previously created TDB file. Before a program can be started a 6 character Slave name must be entered for the TDB program. This name will be assigned to the TDB program when it appears in the controller device list. If the maximum allowable number of blocks is exceeded then the Start button for the program will be greyed out until the number of blocks used is reduced below 40. Note in the above image the three TDB programs listed in Other Programs have their start button greyed out as there is already one TDB program running. When creating a TDB program anything placed onto the TDB canvas would constitute a block, for example static text, a setting block, a mathematical block, the interconnecting lines between one block and another etc. Revision Page 48 of 82

63 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide TDB Trial If neither TDB or TDB-Lite is enabled when the user clicks on the Control Editor button then the option to start a free 90 day trial is shown. Once activated the user will have full access to the TDB application suite. This allows for 16 TDB programs to be running at any one time with each program having a maximum of 4096 blocks. The Data Manager webpage shows a running countdown and highlights the number of days remaining for the trial. Note Once the 90 day trial expires all TDB programs running will stop operating. The user will be unable to use any of the features of TDB, for example save a TDB program from the Data Manager. When the trial expires clicking on the Control Editor icon will result in a message Not Enabled. TDB Application Note Data Manager TDB and Plant Controller TDB application software may not always have the same features or functionality at any given time. Please refer to the relevant user document to confirm what blocks and features are present for a particular software version. Revision Page 49 of 82

64 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Timers The Data Manager has 40 channels for general purpose timer operations, and 100 channels for defrost scheduling. GP Timer Setup From the Service page, click on the Timers icon: Then, click on the GP Timers icon: This results in the following page being displayed: - Click on the channel you wish to configure. Revision Page 50 of 82

65 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Select Master or Slave. Enter a meaningful channel name. Select the Input Type if required. Select an Output Type and enter a Mask Run the Add Schedule wizard Colour coded key Period bars with slide control or on/off fields. Period 1 & 2 allows for two on periods and two off periods for a given day. Channel Type Channel type can be selected as either Master or Slave. If selected as a Master, the timer operates on the selected output(s) and schedule. If selected as Slave, the timer will track the associated Master with the selected offset periods. Channel Name - The field allows for the timer channel to have a meaningful name. Input Type Input types are selected from the drop-down menu; choices are: - Unused Force-on Force-off And Toggle select when no input type is required. select when a network controller is used as an override on. select when a network controller is used as an override off. select when a network controller is used and the schedule. select when a network controller is used to toggle the output(s). Select the source controller and the input from that controller using the drop down list once any of the above has been selected. Output Type Output types are selected from the drop-down menu; choices are: - Case Timer activates the lights relay. General Timer activates the selected network controller relay. Output Channel is the relay output the GP Timer channel will operate on. Please note 0 equates to Relay 1 on a controller, 1 equates to relay 2 etc. The relay selected for operation must be a remote relay. Please check appropriate controller user document for confirmation. Local Relay Activates the selected relay on the Data Manager. Note: local relays are required to be setup as GP Timer relays in the Data Manager. Transmit Allows the Data Manager GP timer channel to control the output of a GP Timer 2 block found in a Mercury TDB Plant Controller. The GP Timer 2 output will follow the current status of the Data Manager GP timer channel configured. Enter the mask of the desired Plant TDB controller and configure the controller appropriately. Revision Page 51 of 82

66 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Output Mask The output mask field is used to steer the timer output to a network controller. Example 1: The timer would operate the lights relay on RC10-1 if the output type was Case and the Mask set to RC10-1 Example 2: The timer would operate the lights relay on all network controllers of the format ****-*, if the output type was Case and the Mask set to????-?. The? acts as a wildcard. The wildcard should be used with caution so that only the appropriate controllers receive a network command from a GP timer. Note - Case command should only be used to operate case controllers that have lights relay. It is unadvisable to hit other controllers with this command e.g. a Pack controller. Add Schedule Wizard Run the Add Schedule Wizard to quickly setup up the channel times. There is a selection of: - Daily Weekly Yearly Once every day has the same times. separate days of the week can be selected and setup. used for annual events, such as Christmas Day. used for a once only event. When the channel has been setup, set-up modes are indicated on the calendar colour coded to show the respective events. Two GP timer channels should not be configured to operate the same output on a single controller. Invert Output Check this box to invert the associated relay output operation. Run-On Select an option from the drop-down menu; choices are: - Allowed Not Allowed Run-on feature allowed to operate on this GP Timer channel. Run-on feature not allowed to operate on this GP Timer channel and GP Timer channel will therefore not appear in the Run-On screen. Global GP Timer Channels In addition to the 32 GP timer channels there are 8 global GP timer channels. These global GP channels are pre-configured as master channels and are appended with Global GP Channel 1 and cannot be changed. GP Timers Report Click on the GP Report icon to see the channel configuration. Revision Page 52 of 82

67 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide GP Run-on Click on the GP Run-On icon: This results in the following page being displayed: - Operation: If a GP timer channel is off, the set button will turn the channel on for the given duration. If a GP timer channel is on, the set button will extend the on cycle of the channel on for the given duration. The clear button will cancel any run-on initiated for a given GP Timer channel. For a GP Timer channel to appear in this list it must have its Run-On option set to allow. The maximum allowable run-on limit is defined on the site setup page. Enter a run-on value into the desired channel and click the Set button to enable the run on. This page is also accessible from the Data Manager Home page. Revision Page 53 of 82

68 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Defrost Timers There are 100 channels for defrost scheduling. Click on the Defrost Timers icon to navigate to the screen shown below. Clicking on Defrost Timer Controller Setup results in the following screen being shown: - Using the drop down menu, for the channel column, select Auto or a defrost channel number between 1 and 100 for each controller. By default auto is selected. When a controller channel type is set to auto the defrost timer channel will operate on controllers whose names have their middle 2 characters the same as the configured defrost timer channel number. For example defrost timer channel 22 will operate on all controllers that have 22 as their middle characters, such as RC22-1, RC22-2 & RC22-3. When a controller channel is set to a defrost timer channel number between 1 and 100 then the defrost timer channel mapped will operate on the controllers configured. As shown in the above example image defrost timer channel 3 will operate on controllers RC65-1, RC65-2 & RC65-3 as they are all set to channel 3. Revision Page 54 of 82

69 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Now select a channel to configure. The following defrost setup page will be displayed: - Defrost Hold Prevents any single controller from entering the recovery process until all the controllers operating from that defrost timer channel have completed their defrost. Once a controller has reached it s defrost termination temperature it enters a defrost hold state. When the last controller reaches its termination temperature the Data Manager sends a network command to the controllers to exit defrost hold and continue with the defrost process. If the defrost hold release command is not received by the controllers, e.g. a controller doesn t reach it s defrost termination temperature, then the cases will exit defrost hold when either the controller defrost max time expires or when the parameter Length expires on the defrost timer channel. Please see the parameter Length below for further details. This feature requires the defrost hold parameter in the case controller to be enabled. See Mercury controller user guide on the RDM website for further details. Defrost Header Station Control Length Valve Controller Maximum period the valve is opened for (Minutes). If all controllers operating from this defrost timer channel complete their defrost before this value is reached then the selected relay will be turned off. Note this is also the maximum defrost length used in Defrost Hold. If the Data Manager doesn t receive confirmation from all controllers operating on the defrost timer channel that they have successfully completed their defrost then the Data Manager will send a defrost termination network command to those controllers when this value is reached. From the drop down menu select the appropriate defrost header controller. Valve Item - Enter the number of the relay to operate on. E.g. 1 would operate relay 1, 2 would operate relay 2 etc. Note do not select a refrigeration case controller when configuring the Valve Controller and Valve Item. Defrost Every From the drop down menu select how often a defrost should occur. For example if set to 3, n number of defrosts will occur every 3 days. Where n is dependent on the number per day selected. Revision Page 55 of 82

70 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Number Per Day Use the drop-down selector on Number per day to select a value. This will result in additional fields being displayed: - Once the number of defrosts per day have been selected, that number of new fields will be displayed. If you want equal intervals, insert the start time of the first defrost into Defrost 1 and click Recalculate. This will then insert times into the remaining defrost fields. If you want unequal intervals, each defrost time must be individually entered. Enter a meaningful name in the Channel Name field such as: - Defrost Timer for bay 10 To complete the defrost schedule setup, press Set Channel Defrost Report Allows the user to view all the defrost timer channels which have been configured and there scheduled defrost start times. The yellow block for each channel indicates the start time of a defrost for a particular channel. A red outline indicates that two or more defrosts will occur at the same time on different defrost timer channels. If a defrost has been set to occur every n days, where n is a number between 1-7, then a colour coded key is displayed at the bottom of the page. This indicates what defrost channels have been configured to perform defrosts every n days. Note: - if a channel is set to perform a defrost every day then the channel name will not be highlighted with a colour. Revision Page 56 of 82

71 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide USB Shuttle Temperature Logger From the Service page click the Shuttle icon: The RDM USB Shuttle temperature logger can be used in a range of applications and allows for remote temperature recording. Please see the USB Shuttle temperature logger user document for further details and the steps required to programme the device for operation. Clicking on the Shuttle icons results in the screen below: - Shuttle Limits Clicking on the Shuttle Limits icon results in the page opposite. Here the user can enter the temperature limits for a number of temperature monitoring applications. When the user inserts the Shuttle into one of the Data Managers USB ports the Data Manager will ask the user to select between Produce or Chill or Frozen from its display menu. The corresponding alarm limits will then be applied to the data stored within the Shuttle. If any of the data points are out with these limits an alarm will be created to warn the user. The Produce Simulation option allows the Data Manager to electronically slug the response of the Shuttle temperature data points recorded, by adding a damping value, to simulate the actual product temperature during the logging time period. Saved Data Saved data allows you to graph data which has been saved from a Shuttle to the Data Manager. Log Shows log data pertaining to changes made to the options available under the Shuttle icon. Revision Page 57 of 82

72 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Alarms Configuration: From the Service page, click the "Alarms" icon: This results in the alarms menu page: - From this page, the alarm actions and modem settings can be made: - Alarm Index: Alarm Actions: Default Actions: Alarm Times: Modem Settings: Warnings Setup: Matrix showing the alarm index against actions - also allows for changes to the matrix. Configures the actions to Relays, Modems and Front Panel. Configures the default alarm index to actions. These actions will be used by controllers as they come online, and before dedicated actions have been assigned. Shows and allows changes to the Day and Night times. Shows and allows changes to be made to the modem settings. Shows and allows changes to the warnings. Revision Page 58 of 82

73 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Default Actions Complete this operation before bringing controllers online. Click the "Default Action" icon: Assign each alarm index to an action number and click the "Set" button. These actions will be used by controllers as they come online before dedicated actions have been assigned. Note this default process should not be relied upon and the end user must confirm that alarms are being directed to the appropriate actions. The action numbers assigned will be used later to navigate the alarm to the device(s) you want the alarm to be sent to. Description of alarm indexes on this page may not represent what comes through from the controller. See the controller user guide for a complete description of its alarm index. Note when replacing a controller or communication module it is important to check that the controller has the correct Alarm Indexes and that alarms are being directed to the appropriate Alarm Action. Ensure the appropriate response occurs when an alarm is generated. Revision Page 59 of 82

74 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Alarm Actions Click the Alarm Actions icon to configure the actions: Factory Preset Actions Relay 1 Relay 2 & 3 Modem 1 Console 1 Front Panel Over-temperature (OT) and Offline alarms All alarms All alarms All alarms All alarms Relays: These represent the relays that have been configured in the "outputs" section of the Data Manager. Note that the number in brackets is the physical relay number and that the preceding text is the name that relay was given. Assign Day or Night against the action number and relay. All alarms then associated with the action number will activate the relay. Up to 3 relays are supported for alarm actions, but they must first be configured in the "outputs" section. Revision Page 60 of 82

75 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Relay Configuration Alarm relays can be configured to 3 modes: - 1. Accept with delay 2. Clear with delay 3. Timed Accept with delay In this mode, the relay is not switched until the delay period has elapsed, If the alarm is accepted before the delay period, the relay does not switch. Clear with delay In this mode, the relay is not switched until the delay period has elapsed, If the alarm clears before the delay period, the relay does not switch. Timed In this mode, the relay switches as soon as the alarm is received, and it stay on until the delay time has elapsed, irrespective of the alarm being accepted or cleared. Modems: Up to 6 modems can be independently configured - similarly to relays, assign Day or Night and actions against the 6 modems. All alarms then associated with the action number will activate the modem. Front Panel: Assign Day or Night against the action number and Front Panel. All alarms then associated with the action number will be displayed on the Data Manager display. Click "Set Actions" when the matrix has been completed to your satisfaction. Modem Alarm Test: Click this button to do a test alarm dial out via the modems configured. Note this feature will operate with any modems configured to send alarms as an SMS. Mail Alarm Test: Click this button to send a test alarm to an recipient. Reset: Click this button to reset the page to its original data Actions Actions range from 0 9 and Fail: Setting alarm index s to use action 0 will result in the alarm only going to the alarm log and nowhere else. Setting alarms index s to action 1-9 allows the user to steer the alarms to the shown and selected destinations. Set the Fail action to the destinations (such as the front panel) you wish alarms to be steered after an alarm has failed to dial out. The fail action will then be used until the next alarm has successfully dialled out. Revision Page 61 of 82

76 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Alarm Index Click the Alarm Index icon to view and/or change the alarm actions matrix: Use this matrix to set up the controllers alarm types (indexes) against an action number. Note that multiple controllers can be set from this page. Note. These settings of alarm actions will override the default actions. Refer to the device User Guide for a definitive list of alarm index numbers. The Data Manager fixed inputs have alarm index numbers of: - Configured as a probe input: Probe Fault 6 Probe OT 4 Probe UT 5 Configured as a plant input: Plant Fault 3 Revision Page 62 of 82

77 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide System The device System will appear under the Alarm Indexes page. This allows for alarms generated by the Data Manager to be assigned actions Possible alarms and their index numbers are: Test fault 6 Disk warning 4 Blinds warning 5 Trim no probe 3 Dial out failed 8 Pack Fail Shutdown 7 DHCP Server Detected 9 Hard Drive Read Only 4 Power Fail 10 DHCP Server Detected If the Data Manager detects another DHCP server operating on its primary IP network, Eth 0, then a DHCP server detected alarm will be generated. The Data Manager will also stop its own DHCP server. The alarm will clear and the Data Manager DHCP server will resume normal operation once the other DHCP server has been removed from Eth 0. Power Fail In the event of the mains power supply being interrupted the Data Manager will revert to its on-board battery backup hardware (PR0492), if fitted, and generate a Power Fail alarm. RDM recommend that the battery from the on-board battery backup is replaced once a year. Note the battery backup hardware is required for an alarm to be created. Condenser TD When the Condenser TD feature is enabled a device called CondTD appears in the Alarm Indexes page. This allows actions to be assigned to the Condenser TD alarms. Listed below are the alarms generated and their index numbers. Cond N TD Alarm 1 Cond N TD Warning 2 Cond N TD Pre-warning 3 Cond N TD Discharge Probe Error 4 Cond N TD Liq Rtn Probe Error 5 Cond N TD Ambient Probe Error 6 Where N is the condenser channel set up. Revision Page 63 of 82

78 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Alarm Times Click on the Alarm Times icon to set the day and night periods: Use this page to define the Day and Night settings used in the alarm action setup. Each day can have 2 day periods. In1 and Out 1 define period 1; In 2 and Out 2 define period 2. All times outside of these 2 periods are the Night times. In1 = Day start period 1 Out 1 = Day end period 1 In2 = Day start period 2 Out 2 = Day end period 2 Note each day of the week can be configured to have a different Day/Night period. Set the short and long inhibit periods from this page. The factory set defaults times are 24 Hours for the Short Inhibit and 72 Hours for the Long Inhibit Note when a case is inhibited a system alarm is generated. This alarm can be directed via alarm indexes and is configurable for each controller. The default Alarm Inhibit index number is 6 and can be changed if required. Revision Page 64 of 82

79 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Modem Settings Click the Modem Setting icon to configure the modems: Click on the hyperlink of the modem you want to configure: - Enter the number/url or address you wish the modem to connect to, enter the number of retries (up to 20) and the number of minutes between retries. Set the type to one of the following options: - Modem for standard dial-up connection SMS (service provider) for alarms as a text message. SMS (GSM Modem) for alarms as a text message when a GSM modem is fitted to the Data Manager for the alarm to be sent to an address. Note to send an alarm as an you must also configure the Mail Sever Setup page. Other when selected operates the same as Modem apart from test dial out alarms are not sent. Check the Send Clear box to send a message when an alarm clears. Check the Send Extra box if required, leave unchecked unless instructed by RDM. Allows additional feature for RDM remote monitoring applications. Please contact RDM for further details (Ethernet connections only). Click "Set" to finish the task. Revision Page 65 of 82

80 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Warnings - Defrosts terminating on time Click the "Warnings" icon to view or change the warning settings: Which results in this screen: - Warnings are to alert the user of successive defrosts that have terminated on time and not on temperature. This is an energy saving feature which highlights cases which are not performing efficiently or may have a mechanical failure. Set the number in the field and click "Set Warning Information" to activate. Note. A setting value of "0" disables this feature. (This is the factory default setting) This alarm (Warning: Defrosts term on time) can be directed via alarm indexes and is configurable for each controller on which the feature is enabled. The default Warning: Defrosts term on time index number is 6 and can be changed if required. Revision Page 66 of 82

81 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide General Click the General icon to access the general features: This results in this page being displayed: - DHCP Information Table of controller information: Mac Address, IP address, Expiry Time and Controller name. A controller s name which is greyed out is a hidden device. Please see Hide Controller feature. Export Log Data Utility to save the logged data to a file follow the on-screen instructions. Data is exported at a fixed 15 Minute intervals. System Dump Utility to save the system information to a file follow the on-screen instructions. Software Version Indicates the Number and revision of the Data Manager software Accept All Alarms Use this utility to accept all alarms Clear Consoles This feature is generally only required for use by RDM. The Data Manager supports a maximum of three Orbit Outstations at any one time. Use this feature when adding a new Orbit Outstation to a Data Manager network if the new Orbit Outstation has been assigned an IP address but will not connect to the Data Manager. Send Layout Utility to load a prepared layout follow the on-screen instructions. (The layout must be an.xml file. Revision Page 67 of 82

82 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Get Layout Utility to get the current layout out of the Data Manager, for editing and re-loading. Remove Layout Option to delete the current site layout used in the Data Manager. Note use with caution once removed the layout is permanently deleted from the Data Manager. Network Card Setup Utility to configure the Ethernet port settings. Click on Network Card Setup to view the page opposite. If there is no secondary IP network adapter present or it has not been enabled then this screen will display eth0 only. Uncheck the Run DHCP server if the primary Ethernet port is used to connect the Data Manager to another system. (Note: not running DHCP will prevent IP controllers automatically coming online). The DHCP server operates on Eth 0 only. Enter the IP address, Netmask and default gateway. Click the Set button. The Data Manager will report the status. Set Time Here the current time and date can be entered or if the Get PC Time is used the fields will be filled using the current time and date from the PC/Laptop. It is recommended that the user restart the panel when altering the time or date manually. Note the Time-zone option, found under site setup, should be changed if the Data Manager is in a location other than the default zone Europe, London before editing the time and date via this page. If the option Use time from NTP Server is ticked then the IP address of an NTP time server can be entered. The Data Manager will then periodically synchronise with the NTP server time/date. Note you must seek the permission from the owner of the NTP time server before directing the Data Manager to it. Revision Page 68 of 82

83 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Upgrade Software This feature is currently available via the USB memory stick upgrade approach. Plug the memory stick into the Data Manager front USB connector, and follow the on-screen instructions. Plant TDB Upload Use this feature to upload a new TDB file to a Plant TDB controller. Note if a Plant controller has been split it will not appear in this screen. The split would have to be cancelled for the controller to appear in the list Delete Type Files Click this line to clear the type files, type files will reload after the reset. Note unused Plant TDB files are deleted on restart of the Data Manager. Clear Alarm Log Click this line to clear the alarm log. Note: this will delete the entire site alarm history, use with caution. System Restart Use this to reset the Data Manager Add Feature Utility to enable functions that are currently disabled. This requires an authorisation code from RDM to activate new feature Note: Data Manager will restart Mail Server Setup Here the user can configure the Data Manager so that alarms can be sent to an address. Note the Data Manager must be able to access a Mail server to send the . Sender Setup Name: Address: Name that is appended to sent alarms address appended to sent alarms. System Config Server Setup Address: Address of mail server used to send alarms e.g. office mail server. Port: Usually port 25. Authenticate: Some servers require this to send s. User Name: Enter your server account name here. Password: Enter your server password here. This is a view only screen; it allows the user to see what features are currently enabled on the Data Manager. Save Site Setup Use this option to save the Data Manager full site configuration to a file. See Appendix 2. There is also an option to save the file internally. Restore Site Setup Use this option to restore the full site configuration (Note use with caution). See Appendix 2. There is also an option to restore the site configuration from a file saved internally. Revision Page 69 of 82

84 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Wireless Mesh Network Setup The following guide should be used to configure an RDM Wireless Mesh Base unit for use with a Data Manager. Up to 4 wireless mesh base units can be connected to the Data Manager Ethernet 0 network. This is advantageous should the wireless network be split across multiple floors in a building. Shown on the right is an example screen shot from the Data Managers Wireless Network Setup page. It shows one wireless mesh base unit, Interface 1, which is configured and operating on the Data Manger. It also shows a second base unit awaiting setup. To add a new or additional base unit to a Data Manager select a network number from the Network drop down box and click the Add button. Select the desired RF channel for the new base unit from the drop down list. Note using the Auto option allows the wireless mesh base unit to scan the existing site and select an RF Channel not in use. Select the desired Net ID from the drop down menu. Note any wireless mesh device you wish to log onto the Data Manager via this base unit must have its network channel switch set to the same Net ID selected for the base unit. Press Set to save any changes made. Now configure the wireless mesh controllers you wish to log on to the Data Manager. Please refer to the Wireless Mesh User documents on the RDM website for additional information. The software feature Data Manager Wireless Mesh Software Enabler has to be enabled for each base unit you wish to configure. Revision Page 70 of 82

85 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Reports From the home page click on the Reports icon. The following options are displayed. Report Type From the drop down menu select the type of information to be generated in the report. Graph of alarms by controller Count of alarms by controller Graph of alarms by alarm Count of alarms by alarm Graph of OT alarms by controller Count of OT alarms by controller Graph of offline alarms by controller Count of offline alarms by controller Night blinds report The data can be viewed in tabular or graphical form. The user can also define the hours from which information is gathered to generate the reports, such as the trading hours for that store. Out Of Hours Normal Hours Constructs reports with data obtained from the out of hours time period e.g. when the store is closed. Normal operating hours of the DM e.g. store opening hours. Select Period From the drop down menu select the time period. Last 24 Hours Last Week Last 2 Weeks Last Month Specific Period Once configured click the submit button to retrieve the data. Revision Page 71 of 82

86 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Accepting Alarms & Appending Comments Firstly ensure the Allow alarm comments feature is enabled under the Site Setup page. Navigate to the Alarm Log from the Home Page as shown below. Now select the alarm you wish to acknowledge by clicking the Accept hyperlink. At this point the user will be asked to login. Enter the required comments and click Accept Alarm. This will accept alarm and append the entered comments. In future when viewing the alarm additional comments can be appended. Once comments are entered they cannot be edited or removed. If the feature Allow alarm comments is disabled then alarms can still be accepted using the above process however the comments feature will be disabled. Revision Page 72 of 82

87 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Ethernet Connection Appendix 1: Connecting a PC to the Data Manager The PC or laptop you want to connect must have an Ethernet network adapter that is fully functional. Using a CAT5 patch lead (straight through, not cross-over), connect the Ethernet adapter on the PC/laptop to a spare port (not an uplink port) on one of the hubs on the Data Managers IP network. (This must be the primary Ethernet on systems that have 2 Ethernet networks.) Or connect directly to the Data Manager/Director primary Ethernet port using a CAT5 cross-over patch lead. Start a Windows Explorer session and in the address field, type in and press return or click the go button: - The Data Manager Home page will be displayed: - Revision Page 73 of 82

88 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Possible Problems If the home page does not display, it may be because the Internet Explorer and/or the PC is not configured correctly for this operation. Try the following configuration options: - Internet Explorer configuration While in the Internet Explorer session, go to the Tools/Internet Options/Connection tab: - Check the Never dial a connection option Also, check that there is not a Proxy setting in the LAN Settings: - Revision Page 74 of 82

89 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Once these settings have been checked, re-try the address and see if the Home page is now displayed. If the Home page is still not displayed, it may be because the PC/laptop has previously been connected to an Ethernet network and its settings are still present. To change the settings for the Data Manager, perform the following commands: - Start a Command Prompt session: - At the command prompt, type in the following command: - ipconfig /release (use winipcfg for Windows 98) Wait for the command to complete, and then type in the following command: - ipconfig /renew (use winipcfg for Windows 98) This command should return with an IP Address n where n is a number other than 75. Close the command prompt session and return to the Internet Explorer session and re-try the address. The Data Manager Home page should now be displayed. If it does not display, there is probably a fault with the Ethernet connection to your device, or your Ethernet adapter is not functioning. Revision Page 75 of 82

90 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Appendix 2: Save/Restore Data Manager Configuration Guide Data Manager Software V and above has the ability to save or restore a Data Manager site configuration. This feature allows the end user to copy a system configuration from one Data Manager to another. This should help reduce the commissioning time should a Data Manager need to be replaced onsite. Caution should be taken when using this feature. Do not proceed if you are unsure of its consequences. To save the Data Manager site configuration, with a USB memory stick, use the following procedure: - 1. Ensure all alarms are accepted before proceeding. 2. Insert a memory stick into a USB port on the Data Manager. The Data Manager will detect the memory stick and list a series of options. 3. Select Save Site Configuration from the list. The message Please wait will be shown whilst the Data Manager complies the configuration. Once finished Configuration Backup Complete will be shown and the Data Manager will then return to the list of options. 4. The site configuration will now be saved on the memory stick. The file name given to the saved configuration will be the Data Manager Site ID. This configuration can now be copied to another Data Manager. To restore a Data Manager configuration, with a USB memory stick, use the following steps: - 1. Ensure all alarms are accepted before proceeding. 2. Insert a memory stick that has the desired Data Manager configuration saved, into a USB port and select Restore Site Configuration. An install level pin is required to proceed beyond this point. 3. Using the cursor keys select the Data Manager site configuration from the list of site configurations saved on the memory stick and press the Restore button. 4. Please wait will be shown whilst the site configuration is copied to the Data Manager. Once complete the message Configuration Restored Restarting will be shown and the Data Manager will re-start momentarily. 5. The Data Manager will now be running the selected configuration. Please note if you are copying a configuration on to a Data Manager which has already been configured then there is no way to revert to the previous site configuration once this process has been completed (unless the previous site configuration has been saved before hand). Revision Page 76 of 82

91 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide The same procedure can be completed from the Data Manager web pages. Firstly login, to the old Data manager, via the Service icon and click on General. Here the save/restore options are displayed. Click on Save Site Setup and follow the on-screen instructions. Once complete connect to the new Data Manager to upload the site configuration. Click on restore, follow the instructions and once complete the Data Manager will restart. Note if replacing one Data Manager onsite for another Data Manager firstly copy the old Data Manager configuration. Isolate the old Data Manager from its power supply and remove the unit. Now affix the new Data Manager in position. Before turning on the new Data Manager do not connect any of the controller RS485/IP networks, if fitted, this should be done once the site configuration has been copied across to the Data Manager. If expansion boards are fitted to the old Data Manager make sure they are fitted to the new Data Manager before uploading the configuration. The new Data Manager must have the same system configuration options enabled as the Data Manager that it is replacing e.g. if the old Data Manager has all the energy features and 2 IP Networks enabled then the new Data Manager must have this also. The site configuration should contain the current Data Manager set up e.g. GP timer channels, defrost timer channels, alarm indexes, alarm actions, usernames/passwords etc. You must however review the Data Manger configuration once complete to ensure the desired set up has been achieved. Care should be taken when using a configuration that hasn t been saved recently as the Data Manager configuration may have been edited/changed since saving the setup e.g. the modification of a GP timer channel. Revision Page 77 of 82

92 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Appendix 3: Related Part Numbers Hardware Related Part Numbers Software Related Part Numbers DM Base model with on board PSU PR0500 Energy Saving - Optimisation Features Only PR0474 Energy Saving - Network Trim Heaters Control PR0475 DM Base model with on board PSU & SSD PR0510 Features only On-board modem PR0491 Energy Saving - Night Blinds Features only PR0476 On-board battery back up PR0492 Energy Saving - Condenser TD Features only PR Analogue probe input expansion card PR0460 Energy Saving - Performance Features only PR Relay digital output expansion card PR0461 Energy Saving - Defrost Warning Features only PR x 4-20mA Input expansion card PR0462 Energy Saving All Features PR x 4-20mA Output expansion card PR Genus compatible network PR x 0-5 or 0-10 Volt Output expansion card PR0464 IP Network Enabler - Each 32 devices PR x 0-5 or 0-10 Volt Input expansion cards PR0465 Wireless Mesh Software Enabler - Each 32 devices PR x 0-10 V Input & 2 x 0-10 V Output PR0466 Data Manager Software Upgrade to Latest Version DMSWUPG 6 Input (240V Status) PR0467 Wireless Mesh Software Enabler PR0735 USB to RS485 Network Adapter -2 x 32 devices PR0482 ActiveFM PR0487 USB card reader kit with DM wing cover PR0493 The Data Builder PR0485 DM 4 Port hub I/O board upgrade kit PR0459 The Data Builder Lite PR0485-LITE Data Manager GSM Modem PR0496 Modbus Interface Enabler PR0470* Secondary IP Interface PR0486 BACnet Interface Enabler - Each 32 devices PR0471 USB/485 Modbus Dongle for Data Manager PR0623 Siemens NetRS/NetPX Interface Enabler PR0483* Cbiss Gas Interface PR0498* Shuttle USB Logger Interface Enabler PR0499 * IP Network Enabler required. Once the interface is enabled each device which logs on to the Data Manager takes up one position out of a block of 32 IP devices. Doesn t apply to Computer/Laptop or Orbit Outstation connections. Please note if the Data Manager has a battery backup kit fitted and the Data Manager is being transported then the battery must be removed from the Data Manager and fitted in the cardboard retaining filler which ships with the Data Manager to prevent damage during transit. Please note RDM recommend that the Data Manager is restarted, once the installation is complete, if any new hardware is connected for example part PR0482. Please refer to the appropriate installation guide, found on the RDM website, before installing any of the above additional hardware. Revision Page 78 of 82

93 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Appendix 4: Trim Heater Control Energy savings via the Mercury range of case controllers can be achieved in a number of ways. One of which is pulsing the trim heater relay off for a given period of time. This can be achieved by utilising the Trim Heater Control energy feature in the Data Manager. RDM recommend that the Trim Heater Pulse Module (PR0723) is used in all instances of trim control. This module is fitted in between the trim heater of the case and the relay output of the Mercury case controller which is pulsing the trim heater. The trim heater module output provides a smoother power distribution, compared to using the Mercury case controller trim relay output direct, as it switches at the zero voltage crossover point. Switching the trim heater on and off via a normal relay, without using the RDM trim heater pulse module, may damage the trim heater and reduce the operational life of the heater. Please see the Trim Heater Pulse Module user guide for further details. Appendix 5: Terms of Use Software running on this equipment is Licensed for use. In using this equipment you are agreeing to Resource Data Management Ltd's standard Terms and Conditions for Software Licensing. To obtain a copy of the Terms and Conditions please visit our website and select Technical Documentation. Revision Page 79 of 82

94 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Change History Revision Date Changes /04/2006 Pages to set DM Local I/O support for split 48 channels Data Monitor, Alarm relay delay functions, sort devices alphabetic /04/2006 Addition of Alphabetical Sort for the devices list. Alarm and Item Aliases added. Alarm relay delays added. System Log screen added. Support for Modbus (Siemens Net-RS template added), Probe range extended; now 99 O C to +350 O C. Local I/O now come through as items in the device list. Case performance extended to include 3 rd party controllers (Tuscans). 48 channel Data Monitor split support after 10K probe added. Local I/O can now be set-up via a PC page /05/2006 Defrost Timer channels have been enhanced to allow for individual times to be added. Foreign language support for the system log. Number handling changed from 16 bit to 32 bit /04/2007 Number of modems has increased to 6. GSM modem option has been added. Alarms send to an address has been added. Test dial out. Option to generate reports has been added. Save site and restore site configuration has been added. Option to set the Trim level after trading hours has been added. Ability to operate Mercury controller Trim s from Humidity or Dewpoint control. Colour coding to show pack optimisation performance and case performance for each controller. Offset parameter for DM analogue input s added. Revision of Network Settings page. Addition of 8 Global GP Timer channels. Ability to list calls by contractor not discipline. Ability to define the DM operational time zone. Signal alarm locally if dial out fails. System alarm Trim no probe added. Addition of System and CondTD and their alarm index numbers. Siemens NetRS/NetPX support added. BACnet Interface can be enabled. Support added in Data Builder for 6K and 10K probes. Support for 6 Digital inputs (240 Volt Status). Alarm bell can be set to none, local, all but dial up and all. Colour indication for Night Blinds score /04/2007 Changes to DM part numbers on front page of user document & General tidy up /05/2007 Additional text added to GP timer description /07/2007 Option to perform a defrost every n days included. Colour coded key added to Defrost Reports page to indicate defrosts occurring every n number of days. Night Blinds report added to Reports. Defrost header station control included. Defrost Hold feature added. Pack Recovery Setup added. Defrost Valve Setup added. System alarm generated when case placed in inhibit. 5.3A 01/08/2007 Condenser TD setup screen shot changed to show more realistic settings 5.3B 10/08/2007 Add controller example changed to reflect more realistic IP address 5.3C 31/08/2007 Additional text added to Defrost Hold operation explaining its interaction with the Length parameter from Defrost Header Control. 5.3D 12/10/2007 Defrost Header Control Additional information introduced /03/2008 General underlying operating system improvements; new features: - Detection of another DHCP server, System alarms given new index numbers, Valve performance and TPI alarms added to controller parameters, Alarm fail action added, Plant TDB upload added, GP Timer run-on added, Web Services added, latent support for RDM wireless comms added, IP controllers added to the Network Errors feature, Data Manager and Data Director software merged to be the same. Controller performance history can now be graphed, trim level control can now be graphed, TDB Digital and Analogue display blocks can now be used to display values on the controllers values page, TDB Digital output block can now be Inversed, Alarm action/index & energy features added to system dump, number of allowed TDB blocks in a TDB program increased from 1024 to 4096, number of TDB programs allowed to run increased from 8 to 16, Option to extract log data with date and time information in separate columns. Export log data now extractable in a HTML format. Dial out fail feature now operates with test dial out s, CBISS & Modbus controller support added. Option to remove site layout. Option added to view older system log entries, Save Site Setup feature now copies TDB programs Revision Page 80 of 82

95 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide residing in the Data Manager A 26/03/2008 Save/Restore Data Manager configuration guide added /06/2008 Description added for removal of site layout. Ability to point the Data Manager to an NTP time server introduced. Revision number in change history altered to follow that of Data Manager/Data Director software version. Network errors description updated regarding IP controllers. Logging on controllers screen shot updated. Additional information added regarding inhibit, case performance and valve performance alarms /04/2009 Shuttle Support included, Slave name option for TDB programs added, additional parts table added, Static namespace on web services option added, Log thin age and log thin frequency parameter introduced, controller type file and network address now shown on Network Errors page, Network Scan feature operates on both IP and Genus networks, there are now 25 packs available to configure for the pack optimisation feature, Use Standby option introduced for pack recovery option, fail input for a given pack can be allocated to any controller, a number of inputs and outputs for controllers are now selectable from a drop down list instead of entering a number which corresponds to an Input or Output, option to toggle Check Blinds or Df Warn options on the Case Setup page, Condenser TD feature now has 25 channels to configure, each channel enabled appears as a virtual controller in the device list, option to toggle Enable heading for Case Performance page, option to toggle Check Blinds heading for Case Performance page, Split controller feature added, Hide controller feature included, Visibility feature introduced, GP Run-On page added, Warning Setup: - Defrost terminating on temp alarm now created by each controller, TDB programs now reside on Data Manager and not HDD/SSD, Timer Schedule Block added to TDB Editor, support for 10K(2) USA probe added (Range -40 Deg C to 150 Deg C), changing/enabling of Pack Optimisation, Night Blinds, Defrost Warning and Case Performance are more explicit in the system log, more explicit logging of Alias changes in System Log, changes via Web Services stored in the System log, DHCP page indicates hidden controllers, ability to calculate Case Performance figure for DM local Inputs, Split Monitor etc, Configure Sources option available under Case Performance, With Battery Backup kit fitted then a power fail alarm is generated the DM, internal save and restore feature introduced (Save/Restore Site Setup), when software restart carried out DM saves any outstanding data to the HDD/SSD before restarting, % Cases Running feature added to Pack optimisation, colour coded key for Device List /07/09 Unused Plant TDB files are deleted on restart of Data Manager, Parent device of Controller Split is now displayed in Controller Information page, Modbus Interface link on the System Config page shows which templates are present even if they are not enabled, Transmit output option added to GP Timer channels /12/09 CGI browsing speed enhanced, range check carried out when setting controller parameters, new TDB blocks introduced: - Occupation Block, GpTimer2 Block, Change Over Block, Run Hours Block, Run On Block, State Block, In Range Block, Min/Max/Avg Block Levels Block Pressure to Temperature Block Revision Page 81 of 82

96 Data Manager Commissioning & Service Guide Schedule Block Filter Block Pulse counter block now saves total count on the hour/half past the hour, TDB Lite option available, Free 90 day TDB trial available, Condenser TD energy feature enhanced with second configuration option, support for up to x4 Wireless Mesh Base units introduced. V /02/2010 New TDB block Daylight Block, TDB Diagnostic blocks now have option to appear as an input, Appendix 5 Introduced V /03/2010 Case Setup page Valve Type updated. V /06/2010 Data Manager VGA display graphics enhanced, Individual alarm accepting process introduced, alarm comments feature added, USB 3G modem support, USB/RS485 Modbus adapter supported added, Wireless Mesh USB adapter support added, support for secondary webport, Defrost Timer feature enhanced, Send Extra feature included for modem configurations, Energy usage/monitoring feature introduced, USB CAN adapter, ordering, split/delete wire and find/replace options added to TDB New TDB blocks added: - ABS block X to the Y block Heartbeat block Accumulator block Revision Page 82 of 82

97 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Mercury Switch User Guide For Products: - PR0018 PR0018-PHI Revision 1.8 Page 1 of 21

98 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Table of Contents: THE MERCURY SWITCH... 3 Description... 3 Front View... 3 Rear View... 3 Top View... 4 Connection to Mercury Controllers:... 4 RS232 Lead Lengths... 4 Connection to other IP equipment... 4 Connection to another Mercury Hub/Switch or Other Ethernet Hub/switch... 4 Connection to a Data Manager/Director /100 Base T connectors... 4 Network ID... 5 ID for equipment with rotary switches PR0018-PHI USER GUIDE... 6 Front Panel Features (PR0445)... 6 Setup via Display... 7 Recommended set-up method... 8 Set/View Type... 8 Set/View Parameters (This can also be achieved at the network front end)... 8 ID... 8 Network Configuration... 9 IP-L (Local IP Address)... 9 IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server)... 9 Parameters Parameters Description Input/Output table EEV Control Operation On board 4-20mA Suction Pressure Input Control Application Remote Suction Pressure Application Mercury Switch Type Transducer Connection MOP Maximum Operating Pressure Humidity Control Operation GP Timer Set-up Trim Heater Control via Mercury Case Controller Range Network Alarms Setup via Webpages SPECIFICATION Power requirements: Mounting RS232 Cable Lengths Ethernet Cable lengths REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.8 Page 2 of 21

99 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide The Mercury Switch From Resource Data Management Description The Mercury Switch (PR0018) is a device that allows up to 10 RDM Mercury controllers to be connected to an IP network, without the need for individual IP Futura modules. There are 10 RS232 connections for linking to 10 Mercury controllers. There are 3 standard Ethernet Switch (10/100baseT) connections for other network devices. The Ethernet ports are self configuring for uplinks and standard 10/100 Base T device connections. As well as the Switch function there is the option for Island EEV control. This control can be achieved by using a transducer connected to the Mercury Switch 4-20mA input or from a remote Suction pressure reading sent across an IP network from a Mercury Plant Pack controller. Island trim heater control can also be achieved through the display port using a humidity temperature display (PR0445). To utilise either of these features then the PR0018-PHI build option would be required. Front View Mains connector 10 x RS232 Ports for direct connection to RDM controllers Rear View 3 x IP ports Display port ma Input ma input selector Note:- The display port, ma input and ma input selector are fitted on the PR0018-PHI only.the ma input is available for Pressure applications only,for Humidity please use a PR0445 connected to the display port. Revision 1.8 Page 3 of 21

100 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Top View Connection to Mercury Controllers: Using a standard CAT5 patch lead, connect the serial output of the RDM Controller to one of the RS232 ports of the Mercury Switch. RS232 Lead Lengths RS232 patch lead maximum length must not exceed 15 metres. (Ports 1-10) The 3-character address that will be seen on the system front end is determined by the position of the two Network ID rotary switches and the port the controller has been connected to, unless the connected controller has its own network ID rotary switches, in which case the controller ID will override the switch settings. Connection to other IP equipment Use a standard CAT5 patch lead to connect other IP equipment to the Mercury Switch (such as a Futura IP module) into the 10/100 Base T ports 1, 2 or 3. Connection to another Mercury Hub/Switch or Other Ethernet Hub/switch Use a standard CAT5 patch lead from any of the 3 10/100 Base T ports into any of the 3 10/100 Base T ports on the upstream Mercury Switch. The 3 10/100 Base T ports are all self configuring. Connection to a Data Manager/Director Use a standard CAT5 patch lead and connect the Data Manager or Data Director to one of the 3 10 Base T ports. 10/100 Base T connectors The three 10/100 Base T connectors have 2 LED s adjacent to them: The green LED; when static, indicates that the connection to the device is good, the green LED then flickers when data is being transmitted. When the amber LED is permanently on it indicates that the connection is full duplex and if there is an error or fault on that channel the LED flickers. Revision 1.8 Page 4 of 21

101 1 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Network ID The 3-character network ID is made up from the positions of the 2 rotary switches and the RS232 connector number. We recommend that the 2 rotary switches are set to the Bay number and that the case sections are plugged into their corresponding RS232 port numbers. E.g. Bay 10 case 2: The 2 rotary switches set to "1" and "0", controller plugged into port 2. The ID then is seen as "102" at the system front end NETWORK ID Vdc Controller at position 2 Note that case number 10 would plug into RS232 port 0 (right most port) and come through as "100". ID for equipment with rotary switches. For RDM products that use the 3 rotary switches for the network ID (such as Mercury Power tray), the ID will follow what is set on the controller local switches and NOT the port position on the Switch. Revision 1.8 Page 5 of 21

102 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide PR0018-PHI User Guide The PR0018-PHI hardware version of the Mercury Switch allows for EEV Control on an island by island basis. It also allows for the use of the energy feature Trim Control which pulses the trim relay of a Mercury case controller based on the actual shop floor humidity therefore minimising energy usage. Access to configure the Mercury Switch can be achieved by 2 ways. Through the front mounted buttons on the display (PR0445) Across an IP network Front Panel Features (PR0445) 4 Character LCD Enter Button Down Button # Button Up Button Display: The display fits a standard UK single socket pattress. Enter Button: Button used to enter/confirm values after a change. Up Button: When in the software menu, the up button is used to scroll up through the menu items. Down Button: When in the software menu, the down button is used to scroll down through the menu items # Button: No function Network LED: Green LED used to indicate network Status: Off Flashing Steady No network attached Attempting to Log on to network On-line Amber LED: Alarm LED: No function Red LED used to indicate an alarm status. Revision 1.8 Page 6 of 21

103 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Setup via Display To enter the software menu for setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Release both buttons and now press the Enter button again to enter the software menu. IO is the first item to be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the menu items which are highlighted below. Setup Function Menu Display Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Input and Output States IO PArA View or change Parameters PArA ID View or change ID ID type View or change Controller Type type net View or change the Network Settings ID SoFt View the Software version ESC Escape the menu Revision 1.8 Page 7 of 21

104 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Recommended set-up method Set/View Type a. From the function menu scroll to select type and press enter b. The current type is shown. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through the configuration types. c. Select the desired number and press enter. There are 4 types: - Type Description 1 Degree C/ Bar 2 Degree C/ PSI 3 Degree F/ Bar 4 Degree F/ PSI Set/View Parameters (This can also be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter table to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. ID Allows the user to assign a unique three digit software address to the Mercury Switch. Note this is only required when the Mercury Switch is in IP-L mode. a. From the function menu scroll to select Id b. The current id number will be shown. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through from 000 to 999. c. Select the desired number and press enter to save. Revision 1.8 Page 8 of 21

105 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Network Configuration Unlike the PR0018 (Standard Mercury Switch version) when is used with a Data Manager/Data Director it is registered on the system as a device. Once the Mercury Switch is on-line, the Switch type and parameters can be set up. The switch comes online with the ID of the 2 rotary switch settings followed by the letter a. For example with the first rotary switch set to 4 and the second switch set to 8 then the switch would appear as device 48a. If a DHCP server is present on the IP network set the 2 rotary network switches to an appropriate setting, the Mercury Switch has an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong ID has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the Switch ID by setting the ID to 0-0, power cycle and then re-enter the correct ID. This Switch does not require an external communications module. IP-L (Local IP Address) To configure the Mercury Switch for IP-L, set both rotary switches to zero. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server) Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu To configure the Mercury Switch for IP-r, set the two rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The controller should then be connected to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Revision 1.8 Page 9 of 21

106 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Parameters Parameter Range Bar (psi) Step Units Default Bar (Psi) P-01 Refrigerant None (0) N/A None R12 (1) R13 (2) R13b1 (3) R22 (4) R23 (5) R32 (6) R114 (7) R134a (8) R142B (9) R227 (10) R401 (11) R401A (12) R401B (13) R402 (14) R402A (15) R402B (16) R404A (17) R407A (18) R407B (19) R407C (20) R500 (21) R502 (22) R503 (23) R507 (24) R717 (25) R290 (Propane) (26) R744 (27) P-02 Span -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 13.8 (200) P-03 Offset -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.0 (0.0) P-04 Glide 0 to o C 0.0 P-05 Pressure Type Absolute (0), Gauge (1) 1 Absolute P-11 Evap 1 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-12 Evap 2 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-13 Evap 3 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-14 Evap 4 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-15 Evap 5 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-16 Evap 6 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-17 Evap 7 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-18 Evap 8 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-19 Evap 9 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.1 P-20 Evap 10 offset 0.0 to 0.5 (0 to 7.2) 0.1 Bar/PSI 0.1 P-31 Transducer Fault Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 Mins 01:00 P-32 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 Mins 01:00 P-33 HP Alarm -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 4.0 (58.0) P-40 MOP -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 3.4 (50.0) P-41 MOP Diff -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) 0.1 Bar (Psi) 0.3 (5.0) P-42 MOP Delay 00:00 to 02:00 00:01 min : sec 00:05 P-43 Recovery Count P-50 Humidity Low rh 20 P-51 Humidity High rh 60 Revision 1.8 Page 10 of 21

107 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide P-52 Trim Low % 30 P-53 Trim High % 100 P-54 Trim Off Level % 30 P-55 Trim Mode 0 = Off 1 On 1 = On 2 = Remote P-56 Broadcast ID P-57 Evaporator Type 0 = Local 1 = Remote 1 2 = Remote 2 3 = Remote * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the Mercury Switch. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. An example Transducer setup is: - Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 Bar to 12 Bar Span would be 190 (13 Bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 Bar) Revision 1.8 Page 11 of 21

108 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Parameters Description Number Parameter Description P-01 Refrigerant Select the gas type used within the refrigeration system. P-02 Span Total range of transducer* P-03 Offset Value below zero* P-04 Glide Glide characteristic (Offset to Evap Temperature) P-05 Pressure Type Select between Absolute or Gauge pressure P-11 Evap 1 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 1 P-12 Evap 2 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 2 P-13 Evap 3 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 3 P-14 Evap 4 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 4 P-15 Evap 5 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 5 P-16 Evap 6 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 6 P-17 Evap 7 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 7 P-18 Evap 8 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 8 P-19 Evap 9 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 9 P-20 Evap 10 offset Pressure difference between suction transducer and evaporator 10 P-31 Transducer Fault Delay Alarm generated, once transducer fault delay expires, if the transducer fails. P-32 Alarm Delay Delay before the HP alarm is generated. P-33 HP Alarm If the pressure exceeds this value then a High Pressure alarm is generated once the alarm delay expires. P-40 MOP If the pressure exceeds this value the valves on controllers connected to the Mercury Switch will closed or be reduced to a predetermined percentage. A MOP alarm is also created. (See MOP) P-41 MOP Diff When the pressure reduces below this value valves on controllers connected to the Switch will recover to their normal operational P-42 MOP Delay Delay after the MOP value has been exceeded before the MOP actions and alarm occurs. P-43 Recovery Count When the Switch comes out of MOP, the valves will come on at 1 minute intervals and turn this number of valves on per minute. P-50 Humidity Low Sets humidity low level. P-51 Humidity High Sets humidity high level. P-52 Trim Low Sets trim low level. P-53 Trim High Sets trim high level. P-54 Trim Off Level When the timer is in the off period the trims will be pulsed at this value. Note if the humidity sensor fails the trim relays will be pulsed at this level. P-55 Trim Mode Off Pulses the controller trim relays at the Trim Off Level. On trim control feature will continuously pulse the controller trim relays dependant on the measured humidity. Remote Uses Data Manager GP Timer channel to determine when to control. See GP Timer Setup P-56 Broadcast ID ID of Plant Controller being used to broadcast Suction Pressure The Broadcast ID is derived from the Rotary Switch positions set on the Plant controller which is providing the remote suction pressure. Note: no two Plant controllers on a local area network can have the same rotary switches positions set. This will have adverse affects on control. P-57 Evaporator Type Select one of the following to determine the source of the pressure value used to calculate the remote evaporator temperature. Local Uses Mercury Switch on board 4-20mA Input Remote 1 Uses the Remote Plant controllers Transducer Input 1 Remote 2 Uses the Remote Plant controllers Transducer Input 2 Remote 3 Uses the Remote Plant controllers Transducer Input 3 Note: Mercury Switch pressure units must match that of the Plant Pack controller it is mapped to e.g. both devices have to be set to Bar or PSI Revision 1.8 Page 12 of 21

109 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Input/Output table Number IO Range Units I-01 Evap Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-02 Evap 1 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-03 Evap 2 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-04 Evap 3 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-05 Evap 4 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-06 Evap 5 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-07 Evap 6 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-08 Evap 7 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-09 Evap 8 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-10 Evap 9 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-11 Evap 10 Press -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-12 Humidity 0 to 100 rh I-13 Sensor Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) I-14 Remote 1 Pressure -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-15 Remote 1 Pressure -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) I-16 Remote 1 Pressure -3.4 to (-49.3 to 2175) Bar (Psi) O-01 Evap Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-02 Evap 1 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-03 Evap 2 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-04 Evap 3 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-05 Evap 4 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-06 Evap 5 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-07 Evap 6 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-08 Evap 7 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-09 Evap 8 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-10 Evap 9 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-11 Evap 10 Temp to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-21 MOP Off ( 0 ) or On (1) O-31 Trim Level 0 to 100 % % O-32 Remote Trim Off ( 0 ) or On (1) O-33 Remote 1 Temperature to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-34 Remote 2 Temperature to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) O-35 Remote 3 Temperature to 60 (-56.2 to 140.0) o C ( o F) Revision 1.8 Page 13 of 21

110 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide EEV Control Operation Product PR0018-PHI is intended for EEV control on an Island by island basis and can be implemented in two ways. 1. Using the on board 4-20mA Input to measure the suction pressure going to the island. 2. Using a remote suction pressure sent from Mercury Plant Controller (PR0600-PACK) on the same IP network. Note this remote pressure can be shared by more than one Mercury Switch. On board 4-20mA Suction Pressure Input Control Application Ensure parameter 57 is set to Local. Configure the remaining parameters. Connect the suction pressure transducer for the Island to the 4-20mA input on the Mercury Switch. Ensure the transducer is correctly connected and the ma input selector jumper is in the Pressure position. Ensure each Mercury case controller has been configured to accept the calculated remote evaporator temperature. See Mercury user guide for further details. Remote Suction Pressure Application Note Ensure parameter 57, Evaporator Type, is set to Remote 1 or Remote 2 or Remote 3. Set parameter 56, Broadcast ID, to match the ID of the desired Plant Pack Controller. Configure the remaining parameters. Configure the desired Plant Pack controller to broadcast the Suction pressure. See RDM Plant Controller PR0600 for further information on how to broadcast pressure. If the Plant Controller being read from is set to Bar then the Mercury Switch has to be set for Bar (Type 1 or 3) If the Plant Controller being read from is set to PSI then the Mercury Switch has to be set for PSI (Type 2 or 4). Operation Once the Switch has been correctly setup, it will pass values to each of the controllers connected to ports 1 through 10. In an EEV application the evaporator in temperature probe reading for a case controller can be obtained from the Mercury Switch on which the controller is connected. A suction pressure transducer is connected from the case Island to the 4-20mA input of the Mercury Switch or the pressure read from a remote plant controller. This pressure is then converted to a temperature based on the gas type being used by the system. This temperature is transmitted to each controller connected to the switch and along with the suction temperature probe local to the controller the superheat is calculated. Please see the Mercury Case controller user document from the RDM website for further details. (P-51 Minimum valve opening) RDM recommend that this parameter be set to 0% when using Mercury Pressure Switch to calculate Superheat. Please note that RDM recommend that the evaporator in temperature probe is fitted as the controller will use this to calculate the superheat in the event of a communication loss with the Mercury Switch. (Or the remote Mercury Plant Controller) The Mercury Case controllers require to have P17 (Evaporator control) set to 1 (Remote) for this feature to function. Revision 1.8 Page 14 of 21

111 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Mercury Switch Type There are 4 types: - Type Description 1 Degree C/ Bar 2 Degree C/ PSI 3 Degree F/ Bar 4 Degree F/ PSI Transducer Connection +12V loop feed ma loop return ma Input Selector Pressure Link Top Humididty MOP Maximum Operating Pressure When the MOP alarm is created a valve off command is sent to the 6-5E controllers connected to the Mercury Switch. The percentage that the valve shuts down to is dependent on the Div Value parameter in the Mercury case controller. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if the Div Value parameter is set to 50% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve opening will be limited to 50%. Therefore as the controller pulses the valve the maximum the valve will open to is 50%. If Mercury 6-5M controllers are connected to the Switch then the LLV will be closed when the MOP alarm is created and return to normal operation when the alarm clears. When the pressure reduces below the MOP diff the valves will revert to normal operation at 1 minute intervals. The number of controller coming back to normal operation per minute depends on the recovery count value. Revision 1.8 Page 15 of 21

112 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Humidity Control Operation To utilise this feature a Humidity/Temperature Display is required (PR0445). Connect the Humidity/Temperature display to the display port on the Mercury Switch. The control algorithm will use the humidity reading from the display in calculating the percentage at which the trim relays are to be pulsed. When the measured rh is below the Humidity Low parameter the Mercury Switch will pulse the Mercury case controller trim relays to the duration set by the Trim Low parameter. When the measured rh is above the Humidity Low parameter but below the Humidity High parameter the Mercury Switch will pulse the Mercury case controller trim relays in proportion to the line drawn between the low and high levels. When rh goes above the Humidity High level the Mercury Switch will pulse the Mercury case controller trim relays at the Trim High setting. Setting the trim high parameter to 70% will result in 30 % energy savings as the controller trim relays will never pulse on for more than 70%. The trims are pulsed over a 5 minute period. Therefore if the Mercury Switch calculates the trim percentage as 50% then the trim relay will be on for 2 and a half minutes and then off for 2 and a half minutes. Humidity High Humidity Low GP Timer Set-up It is possible to set the Mercury Switch humidity control to operate at specific times. For this operation to occur set the parameter Trim Mode to Remote. A GP Timer channel must be set up to control the timer on/off periods of the Mercury Switch. For GP Timer set up please refer to the Data Manager user guide found on the RDM website. The following settings should be followed in the GP setup. Output Type This should be set to General. Output Mask This should match the Controller Name e.g. 45a Output Channel Set to 13. This will allow the GP Timer to control the state of the timer. When the parameter Trim Mode is set to Remote and the Data Manager GP timer channel directed to the Mercury Switch is in the on period the humidity control will operate as described above. During the Data Manager GP timer channel off period the relay will pulse to the preset Trim Off Level parameter. For example if the trim off level is zero then the trims will be completely off. Thus allowing the user to save energy when the store isn t trading and the trims are not required. Note if you wish the Mercury controller trim relay to follow the Data Manager Trim Control feature and not the Mercury Switch settings then please see the Mercury Controller user document (Parameter P-12). Revision 1.8 Page 16 of 21

113 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Trim Heater Control via Mercury Case Controller Range Energy savings via the Mercury controller range can be achieved in a number of ways. One of which is pulsing the trim heater relay off for a given period of time. One way to pulse the trim heater relay in the Mercury case controller range is by setting the parameter Trim Level. This sets a percentage level, of a 5- minute period, to pulse the trim heater relay off/on. Using this parameter pulses the trim relay irrespective of the actual shop floor humidity. For greater energy savings the Data Manager energy feature trim control or the Mercury Switch trim control feature can be used. These two options pulse the trim relay dependant on the actual shop floor humidity levels. Thus if the shop floor humidity is relatively low the trim heaters can be pulsed off for longer durations. Please see the relevant user guides for further details. RDM recommend that the trim heater pulse module is used in all instances (PR0723). This module is fitted in between the trim heater of the case and the relay output of the Mercury Controller which is pulsing the heater. The trim heater module output provides a smoother power distribution, compared to using the relay output direct, as it switches at the zero voltage crossover point. Switching the trim heater on and off via a normal relay, without using the RDM trim heater pulse module, may damage the trim heater and reduce the operational life of the heater. Therefore RDM recommend the use of this module in every trim heater control application. Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (Index) Transducer Fault 6 High Pressure Alarm 8 MOP Alarm 3 Revision 1.8 Page 17 of 21

114 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Setup via Webpages The Mercury Switch can be configured by navigating to the Mercury Switch WebPages. This can be achieved by using the Controller Info page in the Data Manager/Data Director. Find the IP address assigned to the Mercury Switch in question from the list. Now connect a laptop onto the IP network on which the Mercury Switch is connected. Using a web browser navigate to the IP address of the Mercury Switch. The homepage of the Mercury Switch is shown below: - Click on Configure to set the type: - Revision 1.8 Page 18 of 21

115 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Then click Type Use the drop-down selection to select the type required and then click Set Type Parameters can be changed using the connection as illustrated above or through the normal Data Manager/Director change parameter routes or through the display if fitted (PR0445). Revision 1.8 Page 19 of 21

116 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% (Mains version) Supply Frequency: Hz (Mains version) Typical supply current: <500 mamps Maximum supply current 650mA Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 300mm (L) x 35mm (H) x 110mm (W) Weight: 300 Grams Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted. The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 1A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 1A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN Mounting There is a fixing lug at each end of the Switch, with hole centres 317 mm apart. Use typically Number 6 x 1 Pan head screw with 6mm washer, torque down to 1.5 Newton metres. RS232 Cable Lengths All RS232 connections must not exceed 15 metres/connection. Ethernet Cable lengths Port number Main Powered Switch 1 Refer to Cat5 standard 2 Refer to Cat5 standard 3 Refer to Cat5 standard Revision 1.8 Page 20 of 21

117 Mercury Switch 6-5 M/E User Installation Guide guide Revision History Revision Date Changes Comments /03/ st released copy. Revision history brought into line with Mercury Switch software version /05/2009 Support added for PR0445 display to allow setting of parameters, type and so forth. 1.7a 29/06/2009 Changed Evap probe offset default value. 1.7b 24/09/2009 Update to 10/100 Base T connection description. 1.7c 18/12/2009 Fitting instructions for ma input selector included /04/2010 Range of transducer increased to 150 Bar Remote suction pressure from Plant Controller feature introduced. Revision 1.8 Page 21 of 21

118 Mercury IP Futura 6-5 Datasheet M/E Installation guide IP Futura Ethernet Communications Module for Mercury range controllers Product Part Number: PR0016 The IP Futura communication module allows the Mercury range of controllers to connect to an Ethernet (Internet Protocol) network running at 10baseT. The 3 rotary switches are used to define the modules and controllers ID to an RDM front-end system such as Data Manager. Any setting other than 000 allows the Data manager to DHCP and address to the controller. Setting the rotary switches to 000 allows the controller to have a static IP address, which must be programmed into the controller by the user. (See the user guide of the controller to do this) The IP module is powered for the controller it s connected to, and does not require an external PSU. The IP Futura module has 2 connectors, one for the controller and one for the Ethernet network. Connections: Controller: connect the controller to the IP module using a CAT5 patch lead (note that although a CAT5 lead is used, this interface is RS232) to the connector marked controller on the IP module. This lead must be no longer than 5 metres. Connect the IP module to an Ethernet device such as a hub using a CAT5 patch lead. Length of this lead must conform to the 10baseT CAT5 standard. Once the Ethernet connection is established, the green LED on the Ethernet connection will come on. This LED will flash when data is being transmitted/received. The amber LED on the Ethernet connector denotes a data error or collision. An occasional flash of this LED is acceptable, but if the amber LED is continually flashing or permanently on, there is a severe network problem and steps must be taken to remedy this. Resource Data Management Tel: Please note: The specifications of the product 80 Johnstone Avenue Fax: detailed on this data sheet may change without Hillington sales@resourcedm.com notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or Glasgow indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, G52 4NZ performance or misuse of or document.

119 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Mercury Coldroom Panel Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0150-XXX Revision 6.3e Page 1 of 36

120 Table of Contents: Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide THE MERCURY RANGE... 3 Networks... 3 Configuration... 3 Front Panel Features... 4 LED s: Keys... 4 Main Display... 4 Connections... 5 Mains Input and Outputs... 5 Probe and Alarm inputs... 6 Input/Output Allocation Tables... 8 Inputs and Outputs... 8 Digital Inputs... 8 Setting up the Panel... 9 Setup through the keypad... 9 Setup Function Menu... 9 Recommended set-up method rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) type. Set/view controller type Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) Parameter Table for Compressor/LLV type: Parameter table for EEV Type Parameters Description: EEV Control Using Pressure Maximum Operating Pressure Relay State and functional operation Network Configuration Legacy module IP Futura module Viewing Input/Output table for Coldroom Panel with Compressor/LLV option Input/Output table for Coldroom Panel with EEV option Alarm Messages Network Alarms Modifying controller states Defrost def Fans Only FAnS Case Off CASE Lights Only LitS Remote Commands: Specification Power requirements: Maximum Output Loads Inputs: Installation Fixing Display Remote Mounting Part Numbers Disclaimer: APPENDIX REVISION HISTORY Revision 6.3e Page 2 of 36

121 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide The Mercury Range From Resource Data Management The Mercury Coldroom panel has been specifically developed to suit a variety of coldroom needs. The purpose developed enclosure has a detachable display/keypad for applications where the main enclosure is required to be out of reach. The panel is available with or without a main isolator switch. Each internal circuit has either fuse or circuit breaker protection. Based on Mercury technology, the controller has parameters that give complete flexibility for controlling either produce (HT) or freezer coldrooms (LT). Coldroom lights can be configured for maximum energy saving by using a timer (local or remote) to enable the lights and using the lights on when door is open feature. A front panel over-ride switch is available when the door needs to be closed and the lights are required to be on. Networks The panel is capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network (recommended) or a RS485 network or controlling in standalone mode with no network output. The built-in communication options are determined by the part number of the coldroom panel. See Parts Numbers section for more information. For non network versions it is possible to connect the Coldroom panel to the following network interfaces: - IP Futura module (Part No PR0016) Mercury Switch (Part No PR0018 or PR0018-PHI) 485 Legacy module (Part No PR0026) Configuration The Coldroom Panel (both the EEV and Compressor/LLV versions) has 2 types: - Display value Type 1 LT Coldroom 2 HT Coldroom Revision 6.3e Page 3 of 36

122 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Front Panel Features LED s: - Valve Fans Lights Defrost On-Line Off Flashing Steady No network attached Attempting to Log on to network On-line Service Alarm HACCP Keys Enter Down Up Defrost Now Lights Alarm Mute Over-ride Note : Press and hold the defrost button to force a manual defrost Main Display 4 character blue LED display, used to display temperature and status messages. Revision 6.3e Page 4 of 36

123 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Connections Mains Input and Outputs Revision 6.3e Page 5 of 36

124 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Probe and Alarm inputs Note: - When wiring in the probes to the connector, ensure that the 3 wires fitted to the probe connector (not shown on the diagram below) are not moved and remain firmly connected. These wires are used for the external digital inputs; door-open and entrapment. The resistors for the digital inputs are already present on the PCB and therefore external resistors are not required to signal door-open and entrapment alarms. The user only needs to configure the jumper switches as outlined below and short the appropriate input when required. Links position for NTC type Probes Links position for PT1000 Probes Revision 6.3e Page 6 of 36

125 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Internal Cable Diagram for LLV type RED BLACK BLUE Internal Cable Diagram for EEV type RED BLACK BLUE The above cable is used internally to bring the Door Switch and Man-trap inputs to the main processing board. This cable must not be removed or changed in any way, Revision 6.3e Page 7 of 36

126 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Input/Output Allocation Tables The following tables indicate; on a controller type basis, the functions of the inputs and outputs. Also shown are the digital inputs that are derived by switching in a fixed value resistor across the input Inputs and Outputs Coldroom Panel Models: All Alarm Comments Action Earth Bus-bar N/A This unit must be Earthed L1 Incoming Live Feed N/A Connection on the isolator L2 Not Used N/A L3 Incoming Neutral Feed N/A Connection on the isolator L Incoming Live Feed N/A On the PCB (Non-isolator version) N Incoming Neutral Feed N/A On the PCB (Non-isolator version) Input 1 Air on Temperature Yes Grey probe Connector Input 2 Air off Temperature Yes Grey probe Connector Input 3 Evaporator Temperature No Grey probe Connector Input 4 Suction Line Temperature No Grey probe Connector Input 5 Defrost Termination (if used) No Grey probe Connector Input 6 Logging Probe (If fitted) Conditional Grey probe Connector Door Switch Door Switch Yes Uses Ground Return Entrapment Switch Entrapment Switch Yes Uses Ground Return Compressor/LLV N/O and N/C (N/O only on EEV) N/A 15A non-inductive (5A for EEV) Defrost N/O and N/C N/A 15A non-inductive Fans N/C N/A 10A non-inductive Lights N/O and N/C N/A 6A non-inductive Out 1 Always Live (heater mats) N/A 5A non-inductive Out 2 Always Live (PRV) N/A 1A non-inductive Alarm N/O, N/C & Common (Volt-free) N/A 3A non-inductive Note: - For PT1000 probes, jumpers; LK1 & LK2, are in the outer positions For NTC probes, jumpers; LK1 & LK2, are in the inner positions Digital Inputs Models: M Alarm Action Plant input Fixed input on PCB Yes Man trap Fixed input on PCB Yes Door Switch Evaporator Probe Conditional Plant fault 1/External defrost input* Suction Line Probe No Case Clean* Models: E Alarm Action Plant input Fixed input on PCB Yes Door Switch Fixed input on PCB Yes Man Trap Air on Temperature Probe Conditional Plant Fault 1//External defrost input* Air off Temperature Probe No Case Clean* * For PT1000 probes, use 820 Ohm switched resistors to activate input. For NTC2K and NTC2K25 probes, use 590 Ohm switched resistors to activate input. Revision 6.3e Page 8 of 36

127 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Setting up the Panel Access to the Panel can be achieved by the following methods: - Through the front panel keypad Direct access by PC or palm top into the RS232 comms port. This requires a software package (Communicator) available on the RDM website Direct access by PC using Ethernet (IP-L) and an IP browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Manager. Setup through the keypad To enter setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Setup Function Menu (Common to all types) Display Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Inputs / Outputs and States Input / output table PArA Set/View Parameters Set view parameters Unit Probe type and Celsius/Fahrenheit option Set View Unit type Set/View Controller Type Set/view controller type rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Clock) Real Time Clock net Set/view network configuration Network Configuration SoFt View software version def Start Defrost Defrost FANS Toggle Fans Only mode Fans CASE Toggle Case Off mode Case Off Lits Toggle Lights Only mode Lights ESC Exit Setup mode Revision 6.3e Page 9 of 36

128 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Recommended set-up method If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc type. Set/view controller type Time clock is now set a. From the function menu scroll to select type, press enter b. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through case/coldroom configuration types. (see configuration table on page 3) c. Press enter. d. Scroll to select ESC e. Press enter Controller type configuration is now set Revision 6.3e Page 10 of 36

129 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type Probe Types From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - 0 for PT1000 Celsius 1 for PT1000 Fahrenheit 2 for NTC2K Celsius 3 for NTC2K Fahrenheit 4 for NTC2K25 Celsius 5 for NTC2K25 Fahrenheit Note: Temperature range for NTC2K25 is restricted to -37 o C to +54 o C for probe inputs with a secondary function (switched resistors) and -37 o C to +60 o C for inputs that have no secondary function. Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. This function is now complete PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. Revision 6.3e Page 11 of 36

130 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Parameter Table for Compressor/LLV type: Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Def. LT o C ( o F ) Def. HT o C ( o F ) P-01 Cut-in Temp -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) P-02 Diff 0 to 10 (0 to 18) 0.1 Deg 2 (3.6) 1.5 (2.7) P-03 Control Weight 0 to % P-04 Display Weight 0 to % P-85 Key-switch Mode Not Used P-87 Control Probe type 0 = Use Air on Probe = Use Log Probe P-90 Resistor Case Off 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled) 0 0 P-92 Fans temperature mode 0 = Off 1 = Temperature 2 = Over-temperature 3 = Temp/OT P-93 Fans Off Temperature -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -10 (14) 8 (46.4) P-29 Probe 3 Operation 0 = Plant Fault ( Digital Input ) 1 = External Defrost Input P-20 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-21 UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -30 (-22) -2 (28.4) P-22 OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -15 (5) 5 (41) P-23 Log Probe Type 0 (Off), 1 (Logging), Off Off 2 (Logging/Alarm) P-24 Slug Log Probe 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-25 Log Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-26 Log UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -35 (-31) -1 (30.2) P-27 Log OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -12 (10.4) 6 (42.8) P-28 Buzzer Mode 0 (Off), 1 (On) On On P-40 Defrost Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote), Local Local 2 (External) P-41 Defrost Start 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 01:00 01:00 P-42 Defrosts per Day 0 to P-43 No Defrost Time 0 to 25 1 hours 8 8 P-44 Def Terminate -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg 14 (57.2) 10 (50) P-45 Def Min Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 05:00 P-46 Def Max Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 24:00 24:00 P-47 Drain Down 00:00 to 24:00 00:15 mm:ss 01:30 01:30 P-48 Recovery Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 30:00 30:00 P-89 Pump Down Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 P-86 Fan Delay mode 0 = Time 1 Time Time 1 = Temp P-49 Fan Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 P-88 Fan Delay Temp -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) P-50 Fans In Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) On On P-94 Defrost Hold 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-80 Door alarm dly 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-81 Door Closes LL 0 (No), 1 (Yes) 1 No No P-82 Door Stops Fan 0 (No), 1 (Yes) 1 No No P-60 Lights Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote), 1 Local Local P-61 Sun Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 Revision 6.3e Page 12 of 36

131 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide P-62 Sun Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-63 Mon Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-64 Mon Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-65 Tue Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-66 Tue Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-67 Wed Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-68 Wed Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-69 Thu Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-70 Thu Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-71 Fri Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-72 Fri Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-73 Sat Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-74 Sat Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 dflt Restore default values Revision 6.3e Page 13 of 36

132 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Parameter table for EEV Type Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Def. LT o C ( o F ) Def. HT o C ( o F ) P-01 Cut-in Temp -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) P-02 Diff 0 to 10 (0 to 18) 0.1 Deg 2 (3.6) 1.5 (2.7) P-03 Control Weight 0 to % P-04 Display Weight 0 to % P-08 Superheat Ref 4 to 12 (7.2 to 21.6) 0.1 Deg 6 (10.8) 6 (10.8) P-09 EEV Prop. Gain 0 to P-10 EEV Integral Gain 0 to P-11 EEV Integer Time 00:00 to 05:00 00:01 mm:ss 03:00 03:00 P-85 Key-switch Mode Not Used P-87 Control Probe type 0 = Use Air on Probe = Use Log Probe P-90 Resistor Case Off 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled) 0 0 P-92 Fans temperature mode 0 = Off 1 = Temperature 2 = Over-temperature 3 = Temp/OT P-93 Fans Off Temperature -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -10 (14) 8 (46.4) P-30 Evap Select 0 = Local 1 = Remote P-29 Probe 1 Operation ( Digital Input ) 0 = Plant Fault 1 = External Defrost Input P-20 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-21 UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -30 (-22) -2 (28.4) P-22 OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -15 (5) 5 (41) P-23 Log Probe Type 0 (Off), 1 (Logging), Off Off 2 (Logging/Alarm) P-24 Slug Log Probe 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-25 Log Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-26 Log UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -35 (-31) -1 (30.2) P-27 Log OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -12 (10.4) 6 (42.8) P-28 Buzzer Mode 0 (Off), 1 (On) On On P-40 Defrost Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote), 2 (External) Local Local P-41 Defrost Start 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 01:00 01:00 P-42 Defrosts per Day 0 to P-43 No Defrost Time 0 to 25 1 hours P-44 Def Terminate -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg 14 (57.2) 10 (50) P-45 Def Min Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 05:00 P-46 Def Max Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 24:00 24:00 P-47 Drain Down 00:00 to 24:00 00:15 mm:ss 01:30 01:30 P-48 Recovery Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 30:00 30:00 P-89 Pump Down Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 P-86 Fan Delay mode 0 = Time 1 = Temp P-49 Fan delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 03:00 03:00 P-88 Fan Delay Temp -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) P-50 Fans In Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) On On P-94 Defrost Hold 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off Revision 6.3e Page 14 of 36

133 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide P-80 Door alarm delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-81 Door Closes EEV 0 (No), 1 (Yes) No No P-82 Door Stops Fan 0 (No), 1 (Yes) No No P-60 Lights Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote) Local Local P-61 Sun Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-62 Sun Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-63 Mon Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-64 Mon Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-65 Tue Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-66 Tue Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-67 Wed Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-68 Wed Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-69 Thu Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-70 Thu Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-71 Fri Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-72 Fri Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-73 Sat Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-74 Sat Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 dflt Restore default settings Revision 6.3e Page 15 of 36

134 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Parameters Description: Number Parameter Description P-01 Cut-in Temp Temperature at which the LLV or compressor will switch on P-02 Diff Differential temperature below the cut-in temperature. The LLV or lead compressor switches off when below this temperature P-03 Control Weight Percentage of the Air-On temperature that is used to calculate the control temp. The remaining percentage will be used on the Air-Off temperature Example, P-03 set to 30% Control temp = 30% Air-on + 70% Air-off P-04 Display Weight As above only applied to the display temperature P-08 Superheat Ref The EEV controller will attempt to maintain this superheat value P-09 EEV Prop. Gain Adjust proportional gain value. P-10 EEV Integral Gain Adjust Integral gain value. P-11 EEV Integer Time Adjust Integer time value. Please note parameters 9,10 &11 generally do not need adjusting and changes made may have adverse effects on the valve operation P-85 Key switch mode Not used P-87 Control Probe type Switches between using the air-on probe or the logging probe. Note the control and display temperature will still be a derivative of the weighted Average of the control probe + Air-off probe P-90 Resistor Case Off Turns on/off the switched resistor case off function P-92 Fans temperature mode Allows the user to set the fans to turn off when: - A pre-determined temperature is reached (P93) When an over-temperature alarm is present When either P93 is reached or an OT alarm is present P-93 Fans Off Temperature Temperature for the above (P92) operation. Use the defrost probe. P-30 Evap Select This allows the control algorithm to use a remote temperature input, calculated from pressure, in place of the evaporator in value. In the event of no remote value being received, the control algorithm will revert to using the evaporator in probe value until the remote value is restored. P-29 Probe 3 Operation Probe 1 Operation Please see MOP note also. Plant - when a fixed resistor is switched in across the appropriate input a plant fault alarm is generated. External Defrost - when a fixed resistor is switched in across the appropriate input then it places the controller into defrost. See also P-40 for setup. If the defrost signal is continually present after completing the initial defrost then the controller will resume refrigeration. If the defrost signal remains active then the controller will initiate a defrost and generate a missed defrost alarm when the no defrost time parameter expires. Subsequent defrosts will follow the no defrost time until the defrost input is removed. P-20 Alarm Delay Delay for the over and under-temperature alarms P-21 UT Alarm Under temperature alarm set point. This alarm uses the control temperature) P-22 OT Alarm Over temperature alarm set point. This alarm uses the air-off temperature P-23 Log Probe Type Allows the user to set the logging probe mode: - Off Logging with no alarms Logging with alarms Revision 6.3e Page 16 of 36

135 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide P-24 Slug Log Probe Applies a damping factor. This can be used to make a standard probe have the same temperature response as a Product probe. P-25 Log Alarm Delay Delay for the Logging probe over and under-temperature alarms P-26 Log UT Alarm Logging probe under temperature alarm set point P-27 Log OT Alarm Logging probe over temperature alarm set point P-28 Buzzer Mode Allows the user to turn the local alarm buzzer off. Note. Man-trap alarms will sound the buzzer irrespective of this parameter setting P-40 Defrost Mode Allows the user to set the defrost mode: - Local (Uses the internal parameters P-41 and P-42) Remote (Requires a defrost schedule in the front end) External (Requires an external signal on the appropriate input) If set to Local or Remote the external defrost input will be ignored. P-41 Defrost Start When defrost mode is set to Local, this is the start time for the 1 st defrost P-42 Defrosts per Day When defrost mode is set to Local, this is the number of defrosts per day equally spaced from the start time. P-43 No Defrost Time If the controller misses a defrost command for any reason, a defrost will initiate after this time has elapsed from the last defrost. Normally set to 1 hour over the normal defrost period. P-44 Def Terminate The defrost will terminate (defrost control relay off) when the temperature of the defrost termination probe reaches this value. If the "defrost termination" probe is not fitted, defrost termination will occur when: - The "coil in" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "off during defrost") Or The "air off" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "on during defrost") If the "coil in" probe is not fitted, the "air off" probe will be used. P-45 Def Min Time Minimum time that a defrost will use (Defrost can t terminate until this time has elapsed. If termination temperature is reached during this period, the defrost control relay is turned off, but the controller will not continue the defrost cycle until the end of the defrost min period) P-46 Def Max Time Time period after defrost minimum that defrosts are allowed to terminate P-47 Drain Down A period after defrost max to allow the draining of any surplus water P-48 Recovery Time The LLV is switched on at the start of this period to allow the temperature to recover to the normal operating point. This period also inhibits the OT alarm. Note that if the air-off temperature is still above the OT alarm setpoint when this period expires, an immediate OT alarm occurs; there is not a further alarm delay. P-89 Pump Down Time Time period before the defrost min period to allow for a pump down P-86 Fan Delay mode This parameter allows the fans start after a drain-down period to be delayed, either by time (P-49) or when the temperature point (P-88) is reached. This parameter uses the same probe strategy as the defrost terminate. P-49 Fan Delay Time after a drain-down period before the fans start if P-86 is set to time P-88 Fan Delay Temp Temperature at which the fans start after a drain-down period when P-86 is set to temperature. P-50 Fans In Defrost Allows the user to set the fans on or off in defrost. Note if the fans are set to on in defrost, they will go off for the drain-down period and then follow the P-86 rules. Revision 6.3e Page 17 of 36

136 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide P-94 Defrost Hold Turns the defrost hold feature on and off. When switched on, the controller can be held in defrost until a remote command from the front end terminates the defrost and starts the recovery process. Note: defrosts will also terminate when the defrost max time-out period elapses. This command works in Defrost Remote only P-80 Door alarm delay Delay after the door open input is activated before the alarm occurs. P-81 Door Closes Valve This parameter is used to close the LLV or EEV if the door opens. P-82 Door Stops Fan This parameter is used to stop the fans if the door opens. P-60 Lights Mode Allows the user to set the lights mode: - Use a local schedule P-61 to P-74) Use a remote schedule (Set up in the system front end) P-61 Sun Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Sunday on time P-62 Sun Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Sunday off time P-63 Mon Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Monday on time P-64 Mon Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Monday off time P-65 Tue Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Tuesday on time P-66 Tue Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Tuesday off time P-67 Wed Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Wednesday on time P-68 Wed Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Wednesday off time P-69 Thu Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Thursday on time P-70 Thu Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Thursday off time P-71 Fri Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Friday on time P-72 Fri Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Friday off time P-73 Sat Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Saturday on time P-74 Sat Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Saturday off time dflt Restore default values Restores all of the parameters to their default values EEV Control Using Pressure In an EEV application the evaporator in temperature probe reading for a coldroom controller can be obtained from the Mercury switch on which the controller is connected. A suction pressure transducer is connected from the coldroom pack system to the 4-20mA input of the Mercury Switch and the pressure read from this transducer is converted to a temperature based on the gas type being used by the system. This temperature is transmitted to each controller connected to the switch and along with the suction temperature probe local to the controller the superheat is calculated. Please note that RDM recommended that the evaporator in temperature probe is fitted as the controller will use this to calculate the superheat in the event of a communication loss with the Mercury Switch. P-30 allows for the use of this remote temperature provided by the Mercury Switch. Please see the Mercury Switch user document (PR0018-PHI) for further details. Maximum Operating Pressure Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) support added to Coldroom software. In an EEV application the remote evaporator in value is obtained from the Mercury switch on which the coldroom panel is connected. MOP is a remote command sent from the Mercury switch to the coldroom panel to close the EEV valve when a predetermined pressure is reached. This MOP value is configured in the Mercury switch setup. MOP is also used in the M software and although a remote evaporator temperature is not used the LLV can be closed when the MOP value is reached. Revision 6.3e Page 18 of 36

137 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Relay State and functional operation Relay State: Function State Wired contact Comments Compressor/LLV Relay off Valve on N/C Compressor/LLV Relay on Valve off N/C Fans Relay off Fans on N/C Fans Relay on Fans off N/C Lights Relay off Lights on N/C Lights Relay on Lights off N/C Defrost Relay off Defrost off N/O Defrost Relay on Defrost on N/O Alarm Relay off Alarm on N/C Alarm Relay on Alarm off N/C The panel will display Pd (pull-down) just after switching on until the control temperature has been reached; where it will then display the temperature (display temp) The panel will operate in accordance to the parameters set. Lights: If the lights have been set to a timer mode, the lights LED will flash to indicate the timer is running during an on period, the lights will come on when the door is opened, or if the lights switch is operated. The lights LED will be off during a timer off period and the lights will not come on when the door is opened. The lights can be switched on during the off period by the panel light switch. Note. When using the lights in remote mode, do not use a GP timer input over-ride function; it will conflict with the local over-rides and door switch functions. When a person trapped alarm occurs the lights are forced on. If either or both of the LLV and Fans are set to go off when the door opens, they will revert to normal operation when the door closes or when the door-open alarm activates. Revision 6.3e Page 19 of 36

138 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). To log the controller onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module if one is not already internally fitted coldroom panel. This is either a: Legacy, or IP Futura Mercury Hub Please check Part Numbers section to determine the communication module fitted. 485 Legacy module 485 legacy support the following protocol: - Genus Connecting a 485 legacy module to the controller will govern which set up screens are made available. Display 485t 485A gadd * rlog * CLrA * ESC Option 485 Network Type 485 Address/Name Show underlying network address assigned to controller Re-log the controller back onto the network Clear the address/name from the controller Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu * These options are only available when the network type is set to Genus compatible. The 485t option shows a value representing the network type. The possible values are: Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) The 485A option shows a value representing either the name of the controller in a Genus compatible network. The value shown is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible network using the name RC05-6. The following options are also available when the network type is set to Genus compatible. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Revision 6.3e Page 20 of 36

139 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. To enter this mode, hold the Enter, Up and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message CLrA appears on the display. CLrA is the first option in the menu consisting of the following options: Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation, if the network type is set to Genus compatible. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. If the network type is not set to Genus compatible then the ClrA message will not flash and the ESC option can be used to exit the menu. IP Futura module In an IP system there are two options IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Director) Revision 6.3e Page 21 of 36

140 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide IP-L To configure the communication module for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length IP-r To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. Mercury Hub 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server Please refer to the Mercury Hub user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a network via the Mercury Hub. Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. IO. View Inputs / Outputs and States a. From the function menu, select IO, press enter b. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Revision 6.3e Page 22 of 36

141 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Input/Output table for Coldroom Panel with Compressor/LLV option Number IO Range (dependant on probe type) Step Units o C ( o F ) I-01 Control Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-02 Display temp -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-03 Air on Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-04 Air off Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-05 Evaporator Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-06 Suction Line Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-07 Superheat -30 to 60 (-54 to 108) 0.1 Deg I-08 Logging Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-09 Defrost Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-10 Plant Fault 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-11 Case Clean 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-12 Door Sensor 0 (Closed), 1 (Open) I-13 Person Trapped 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-15 External Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-16 MOP 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-01 Liquid Line Valve 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-05 Defrost Control 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-07 Case Fans 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-08 Lights 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-09 Alarm Relay 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) O-10 Last Def. Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-11 Last Def. Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-12 Last Def. Ctrl Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-13 Last Def. Type 0 (None), 1 (Internal), 2 (External), 3 (Network), 4 (Display), 5 (Timed) O-20 Door Open Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-21 Door Open Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-30 Set Point Offset -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-32 Timer 0 (Off), 1 (On) S-01 Control State 0 (Stabilise), 1 (Normal), 2 (Defrost Min), 3 (Defrost Max), 4 (Drain Down), 5 Fan Delay 6 (Recovery), 7 (OT Alarm), 8 (UT Alarm), 9 (Fans Only), 10 (Lights Only), 11 (Case Off), 12 (Case off) 13 (Pump_Down) Revision 6.3e Page 23 of 36

142 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Input/Output table for Coldroom Panel with EEV option Number IO Range (dependant on probe type) Step Units o C ( o F ) I-01 Control Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-02 Display temp -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-03 Air on Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-04 Air off Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-05 Evaporator Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-06 Suction Line Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-07 Superheat -30 to 60 (-54 to 108) 0.1 Deg I-08 Logging Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-09 Defrost Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-10 Plant fault 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-11 Case Clean 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-12 Door Sensor 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-13 Person trapped 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-15 Remote Evap In Temp -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-14 External Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-16 MOP 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-05 Defrost Control 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-07 Case Fans 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-08 Light Relay 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-09 EEV Opening 0 to % O-10 Last Def. Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-11 Last Def. Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-12 Last Def. Ctrl Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 hh:mm O-13 Last Def. Type 0 (None), 1 (Internal), 2 (External), 3 (Network), 4 (Display), 5 (Timed) O-15 Alarm Relay 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) O-20 Door Open Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-21 Door Open Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-30 Set Point Offset -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-32 Timer 0 (Off), 1 (On) S-01 Control State 0 (Stabilise), 1 (Normal), 2 (Defrost Min), 3 (Defrost Max), 4 (Drain Down), 5 Fan Delay 6 (Recovery), 7 (OT Alarm), 8 (UT Alarm), 9 (Fans Only), 10 (Lights Only), 11 (Case Off), 12 (Case off) 13 (Pump_Down) Revision 6.3e Page 24 of 36

143 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury display. Display Message Ft Prb1 Prb2 Prb3 Prb4 Prb5 Prb6 Pd def AL FAnS ONLy LitS ONLy CASE OFF Ot Ut door TrAP PLnt LgOt LgUt System status Control Fault Probe 1 Fault Probe 2 Fault Probe 3 Fault Probe 4 Fault Probe 5 Fault Probe 6 Fault Control State in Recovery Control Sate in Defrost Control State in Alarm Controller in Fans Only Controller in Lights Only Controller in Case Off Over Temperature Alarm Under Temperature Alarm Door Open Alarm Person Trapped Alarm Plant Fault Log Probe Over Temperature Log Probe Under Temperature Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) Missed defrost 15 Plant Fault 1 3 Case over temperature 4 Case under temperature 5 Probe 1 Faulty 6 Probe 2 Faulty 6 Probe 3 Faulty 6 Probe 4 Faulty 6 Probe 5 Faulty 6 Probe 6 Faulty 6 Door Left Open 2 Product over temperature 8 Product under temperature 9 Person Trapped 1 Revision 6.3e Page 25 of 36

144 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Modifying controller states During normal operation you can change the following states from the function menu Defrost def Selecting the defrost option starts a defrost cycle. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show def Defrosts can also be manually started by pressing and holding the display # button. There is also a remote defrost command which starts a defrost cycle from the network front end or remote system. Fans Only FAnS Selecting the Fans Only option will put the controller into the Fans Only state if the current state is not Fans Only. If the current state is Fans Only then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show FAnS OnLy If a remote display with key switch is being used, this function can be invoked by turning the key switch to the fans only position (90 degrees clockwise) with parameter P85 set to "fans" Case Off CASE Selecting the Case Off option will put the controller into the Case Off state if the current state is not Case Off. If the current state is Case Off then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show CASE OFF If a remote display with key switch is being used, this function can be invoked by turning the key switch to the case-off position. (Clockwise 90 degrees) with parameter P85 set to "case" Lights Only LitS Selecting the Lights Only option will put the controller into the Lights Only state if the current state is not Lights Only. If the current state is Lights Only then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show LitS OnLy Note. When lights are being used in Remote mode with a timing channel: - If the controller goes offline, the lights are turned ON after a delay of 5 minutes. The lights will stay on until the controller comes back on-line where they will revert to the state of the timing channel being used. Revision 6.3e Page 26 of 36

145 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Remote Commands: The following commands can be used by a Data Builder program: - Command Value to Description Conditions; send Setpoint Command ±10 O C (±20 O F) Is added to or subtracted from the setpoint Haccp Command HACCP LED OFF HACCP LED On HACCP LED Flashes Defrost Command 1 Initiates a defrost cycle Defrost mode: remote Defrost Command 3 Terminates the defrost Defrost mode: remote Defrost hold: On Defrost min state complete Case Off Command 0 Case runs normally 5 Valve Command 2 1 Case Off; all alarms are inhibited Shuts the valve off Restores the valve to normal operation Use an Analogue Out block configured to the controller name and in the value field type in the command you require. Use a Setting block as the input to the Analogue Out block to send the Value. See Example below, which sets the HACCP LED on: Revision 6.3e Page 27 of 36

146 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz Maximum supply current: 40 Amps Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 240mm (W) x 300mm (H) x 140mm (D) Weight: 2.2 Kilograms Safety: EN61010 This device MUST be earthed EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 40A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 40A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. Revision 6.3e Page 28 of 36

147 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Maximum Output Loads Note in later Coldroom panel hardware revisions, Revision 2, the Compressor/LLV, Fans and Defrost ratings have been revised. Please view the appropriate listing, shown below, depending on the hardware revision in use. A visual inspection of the Coldroom panel must take place to determine the hardware revision. A label is affixed alongside the relay outputs highlighting the current rating in Amps. Note in Revision 2 the Compressor/LLV and Defrost MCB or Fuse can be interchanged to allow the higher rated MCB or Fuse to be used on the Compressor/LLV relay output and the lower rated MCB or fuse to be used on the Fans relay output. Please see Appendix 1 Revision 1 (Earlier Hardware) Compressor/LLV: 15A (non inductive) 8A CosФ=0.4: Motor Load (CosФ=0.6) ½ HP Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage EEV: 5A (non inductive) 2A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Defrost: 15A (non inductive) 8A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Fans: 10A (non inductive) 8A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Lights: 6A (non inductive) 6A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Out 1: Permanent Output Voltage: Out 2: Permanent Output Voltage: 5A Same as supply voltage 1A Same as supply voltage Revision 2 Compressor/LLV: 10A (non inductive) User configuration dependant see Appendix 1 8A CosФ=0.4: Motor Load (CosФ=0.6) ½ HP Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage EEV: 5A (non inductive) 2A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Defrost: 20A (non inductive) User configuration dependant see Appendix 1 8A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Fans: 8A (non inductive) 8A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Lights: 6A (non inductive) 6A CosФ=0.4 Switched Output Voltage: Same as supply voltage Out 1: Permanent Output Voltage: 5A Same as supply voltage Out 2: Permanent Output Voltage: 1A Same as supply voltage Revision 6.3e Page 29 of 36

148 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Inputs: Probes: Input type Entrapment and Door alarms Comms: Ethernet (IP) RS485 PT1000 or NTC2K or NTC2K25 (selectable) 0V return RS232 with flow control 10BaseT Genus compatible Installation Fixing The Coldroom Panel has 4 fixing holes: - (dimensions are in mm) Revision 6.3e Page 30 of 36

149 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Display Remote Mounting The display section of the Coldroom Panel can be removed for remote fixing. Unscrew the two front panel screws; take of the display front and then remove the 4 screws housing the display back onto the main enclosure. The display has a 5 meter cable which requires to be uncoiled from its internal location. Ensure that all power is disconnected before this operation. Mount the display back onto the surface using the centres below and then assemble the display front, securing with the 2 front panel screws. Display dimensions and fixing Dimensions are in mm Revision 6.3e Page 31 of 36

150 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Part Numbers Variations Coldroom - EEV, No Isolator, MCB's and No Comms Coldroom - EEV, Isolator, MCB's and No Comms Coldroom - EEV, Isolator, MCB's and RS485 Comms Coldroom - EEV, Isolator, MCB's and IP Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, MCB's and No Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, MCB's and RS485 Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, MCB's and IP Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, Fused and No Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, Fused and RS485 Comms Coldroom - LLV, No Isolator, Fused and IP Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, MCB's and No Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, MCB's and RS485 Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, MCB's and IP Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, Fused and No Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, Fused and RS485 Comms Coldroom - LLV, Isolator, Fused and IP Comms Part Number PR0150-ENB PR0150-ESB PR0150-ESB485 PR0150-ESBIP PR0150-MNB PR0150-MNB485 PR0150-MNBIP PR0150-MNF PR0150-MNF485 PR0150-MNFIP PR0150-MSB PR0150-MSB485 PR0150-MSBIP PR0150-MSF PR0150-MSF485 PR0150-MSFIP Disclaimer: The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 6.3e Page 32 of 36

151 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Appendix 1 For later hardware revisions of Coldroom panels the Compressor/LLV and Defrost MCB/Fuse can be interchanged to allow the higher rated MCB/Fuse, 20A, to be used on the Compressor/LLV relay output and the lower rated MCB/Fuse, 10A, to be used on the Defrost relay output. By default the Coldroom panel ships with the 20A MCB/Fuse fitted to the Defrost relay and the 10A MCB/Fuse fitted to the Compressor/LLV. Changing the configuration of this part must be carried out by competent personnel. RDM will not be held responsible for any damage incurred to the equipment through mishandling or faulty installation when carrying out this work. If unsure do not carry out this procedure and contact RDM Technical Support for further assistance. Instructions MCB Variants 1) Before working on this equipment, ensure that the device is fully isolated from any supply voltage, including connections to all relays and other I/O connectors. 2) Open the Coldroom front panel by unscrewing the screw fixings at the top right and bottom right of the panel door. If an Isolator switch is fitted to the Coldroom panel then this must be in the off position before the door will open. 3) Locate the MCB s. Note a fixing plate is attached over the MCB s. 4) On the fixing plate a label is affixed indentifying each output and the current rating in Amps for the associated MCB for the default configuration. Note the ratings of the MCB s are marked on the side of the MCB and they should be checked to ensure the current MCB rating and position matches that indicated by the label. 5) To swap the higher rated Defrost MCB over with the Compressor/LLV MCB firstly unscrew the plastic washer for all four MCB s. 6) Now remove the two screws at the top and bottom of the fixing plate. Screw Fixing Points For Fixing Plate Plastic Mounting Nut Revision 6.3e Page 33 of 36

152 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide 7) Remove the fixing plate. Swap the MCB in position F5 Defrost to F1 Compressor/LLSV and the MCB from F1 Compressor/LLSV to F5 Defrost taking note of the orientation of the MCB. The image below shows the view of the Coldroom with the fixing plate removed. 8) Ensure the MCB s are securely fitted and the desired rated MCB s are in the appropriate positions before re-inserting the fixing plate. 9) Now secure the fixing plate using the previously removed screws. 10) Reattach the plastic washers to the MCB s. 11) A secondary label is supplied with the Coldroom panel and must be affixed to indicate that the MCB positions and therefore ratings have changed for the Compressor/LLV and Defrost MCB. 12) Close the Coldroom panel door and secure the front panel via the two screw fixings. Warning : Only the Compressor/LLV and Defrost MCB positions are interchangeable. No other MCB positions can be altered. Revision 6.3e Page 34 of 36

153 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Instructions Fuse Variants 1) Before working on this equipment, ensure that the device is fully isolated from any supply voltage, including connections to all relays and other I/O connectors. 2) Open the Coldroom front panel by unscrewing the screw fixings at the top right and bottom right of the panel door. If an Isolator switch is fitted to the Coldroom panel then this must be in the off position before the door will open. 3) Locate the Fused outputs. 4) Look at the PCB screen print to identify each output and the associated Fuse. Note the ratings of the Fuse are marked on each Fuse and they should be checked to ensure the current Fuse rating is correct for the position in which the Fuse is fitted. 5) To swap the higher rated Defrost Fuse over with the Compressor/LLV Fuse firstly remove the rubber cover on each Defrost and Compressor/LLV Fuse. 6) Now remove and swap the Fuse in position F5 Defrost to F1 Compressor/LLSV and the Fuse from F1 Compressor/LLSV to F5 Defrost. 7) Ensure the Fuses are securely fitted and the desired rated Fuse is in the appropriate position. 8) Now reattached the rubber cover over each Fuse ensuring the fuse and holder is fully covered. 9) Close the Coldroom panel door and secure the front panel via the two screw fixings. Warning : Only the Compressor/LLV and Defrost Fuse positions are interchangeable. No other Fuse positions can be altered. Revision 6.3e Page 35 of 36

154 Mercury 6-5 Coldroom M/E Installation Panel guide Revision History Revision Date Changes Comments /08/ st Issue /08/2007 Typo s corrected /07/2008 Revision number in revision history now reflects that of the controller software version, option to disable buzzer operation, additional text added for onboard digital inputs, man trap alarm forces lights on, table with part numbers added, table added highlighting available digital inputs, ability to initiate a defrost from an external defrost input added, response on/off changed to EEV prop gain, integ gain and integ time, parameter for remote suction select added, MOP support added (see P-30), IO tables updated for E & M to include new features, additional remote commands added /10/2008 Internal Cable for alarm inputs added 6.3a 21/05/2009 Typo s corrected 6.3b 22/06/2009 Updated digital input descriptions. 6.3c 26/03/2010 Revised relay ratings guide introduced. 6.3d 14/04/2010 EEV Control information updated. Revision 6.3e Page 36 of 36

155 Mercury 11-10P Pack/Condenser Controller Installation & User Guide Resource Data Management PRESSURE 1 PRESSURE 2 FLT 1 FLT 2 Product Numbers: - PR0332 PR0334 PR0333 PR0335 PR0339 (DIN rail bracket for controller) Revision 2.4 Page 1 of 34

156 Contents: THE MERCURY RANGE... 4 Description... 4 Configuration... 4 Networks... 4 Front Panel: Section 1 Display... 5 Section 2 Display... 5 Front Panel Buttons... 5 Connections (Mains Version: PR0332 & PR0334)... 6 Connections (Low Voltage Version: PR0333 or PR0335 )... 7 Input/Output Allocation Tables... 8 Setting up the controller... 9 Set-up Mode... 9 Set-up through front buttons... 9 Set-up Menu for Single Pack controller (Type1)... 9 Recommended set-up method... 9 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)... 9 Set/View Relay Invert type. Set/view controller type PArA. Set/view parameters Set/View Units Network Configuration Legacy module Fast Network Address Reset IP Futura module IP-L IP-r Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Pack Controller (Type 1) Parameter table for Dual Pack Controller (Type 2) Parameter table for Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 3) Parameter table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Configuration of inputs and outputs: Stage Inputs: Section Stages: Stage Sizes Operation Viewing Inputs and Outputs Input/Output Tables Input/Output table for Pack Controller (Type 1) Input/Output table for Dual Pack Controller (Type 2) Input/Output table for Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 3) Input/Output table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Viewing Alarms Quickview Override Standby Mode Display Messages Alarm Display Messages Network Alarms Specification Power requirements for PR0332 and PR0334: Power requirements for PR0333 and PR0335: General Revision 2.4 Page 2 of 34

157 Inputs: Relay Ratings for PR0332 and PR Relay Ratings for PR0333 and PR Important Safety Notice: Installation: Panel Cut-out: Fixing: Clearances: Wiring for PR0332 & PR0334: Wiring for PR0333 & PR0335: Cleaning: APPENDIX Typical Transducer Connection: REVISION HISTORY Revision 2.4 Page 3 of 34

158 The Mercury Range From Resource Data Management This documentation refers to the Mercury 11-10P controller range Description The Mercury 11-10P is a versatile controller intended for Pack and Condenser control. It has 10 relay outputs that are configurable for compressors, loaders or fans. The 10 digital inputs can be assigned for Pack or Condenser section inputs or general alarms. There are two 4-20mA inputs for pressure transducers and one temperature probe input. The controller has 4 options, Pack, Dual Pack, Pack and Condenser, and Condenser. The control is a "Fuzzy logic" based algorithm, giving enhanced control whilst maintaining the starts/hr requirement. The algorithm also reduces the number of input parameters required for control; only a target pressure is needed. Like all Mercury controllers, the 11-10P has a serial output that can connect directly to a PC for quick set-up (PC running RDM Communicator application) or to one of RDMs' network modules. Each relay can switch in excess of 2 Amps. There is an internal or remote display option as well as mains supply versions ( Vac) or low voltage supply versions (10-35 Vdc or Vac). There are four variants to choose from: - PR0332 Mercury P - Mains voltage version with internal display. PR0333 Mercury P - Low voltage version with internal display. PR0334 Mercury PR - Mains voltage version with Remote display (Inc 5M cable). PR0335 Mercury PR - Low voltage version with Remote display (Inc 5M cable). Configuration The controller has four configuration options: - (see Set/View Type for changing the type) Display value Type 1 Pack 2 Dual Pack 3 Pack/Condenser 4 Condenser The controller is delivered pre-configured as a Pack Controller (Type 1) Networks The controller is capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network or a RS485 network or controlling in standalone mode with no network output. To connect to a network you must add the correct communications module. (See network set-up) 485 Legacy module (Part No PR0026) IP Futura module (Part No PR0016) Connecting to either of these communication modules will automatically be detected on power up and this will affect the set up screens made available to you. Revision 2.4 Page 4 of 34

159 Front Panel: - Section 1 Display Section 2 Display Resource Data Management Section 1 Alarm indicator PRESSURE 1 PRESSURE 2 FLT 1 FLT 2 Section 2 Alarm indicator Enter button Up button Down button Quick view button Override button Alarm button Section 1 Display 4 character display, normally shows the pressure for section 1 In set-up mode, displays the set-up menu items In quick view mode, indicates the target pressure for section 1 In alarm view mode, indicates the alarm number In Override mode, indicates and allows the number of stages of section 1 forced on Section 2 Display 4 character display, normally shows the pressure for section 2 In set-up mode, display is blank In quick view mode, indicates the target pressure for section 2 In alarm view mode, indicates the alarm channel (e.g. S101 = section 1 input 1) In Override mode, indicates and allows the number of stages of section 2 forced on Front Panel Buttons Enter Button: - Up Button: - Down Button: - Used to enter menu items. Used to scroll up Used to scroll down Quick View Button: - Used to view the target pressures (See Quickview section) In "alarm view" mode, used to view the alarm occurred Override Button: - Alarm Button: - Used with the "Enter" button, to go into the override mode. (See Override section) Used to enter the "alarm view" mode. (See View Alarms section) Revision 2.4 Page 5 of 34

160 Connections (Mains Version: PR0332 & PR0334) All connections are made to the back of the controller. The diagram below shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Specification and wiring for further details on connections. RELAYS Output Relays: Output 1 N/O Output 1 Common Output 2 N/O Output 3 N/O Output 2/3 Common Output 4 N/O Output 5 N/O Supply Live & Output 4/5 common Not Used (DO NOT CONNECT) Supply Neutral Output 6 N/O Output 6 Common Output 7 N/O Output 8 N/O Output 7/8 Common Output 9 N/O Output 10 N/O Supply Live & Output 9/10 common Not Used (DO NOT CONNECT) Supply Neutral Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Common Digital Input 3 Digital Input 4 Common Digital Input 5 Common Not Used Not Used Common Probe Input 11 Digital Input 10 Common Digital Input 9 Digital Input 8 Common Digital Input 7 Digital Input 6 Common 4-20mA Input 1 12 Vdc 4-20mA Input 2 12 Vdc Probe input is PT1000 only. Both Supplies must be connected. Do not connect an earth. Revision 2.4 Page 6 of 34

161 Connections (Low Voltage Version: PR0333 or PR0335 ) All connections are made to the back of the controller. The diagram below shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Specification and wiring for further details on connections. RELAYS Output Relays: Output 1 N/O Output 1 Common Output 2 N/O Output 3 N/O Output 2/3 Common Output 4 N/O Output 5 N/O Output 4/5 Common Low Voltage Supply (Gnd) Low Voltage Supply (Positive) Output 6 N/O Output 6 Common Output 7 N/O Output 8 N/O Output 7/8 Common Output 9 N/O Output 10 N/O Output 9/10 Common Low Voltage Supply (Gnd) Low Voltage Supply (Positive) Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Common Digital Input 3 Digital Input 4 Common Digital Input 5 Common Not Used Not Used Common Probe Input 11 Digital Input 10 Common Digital Input 9 Digital Input 8 Common Digital Input 7 Digital Input 6 Common 4-20mA Input 1 12 Vdc 4-20mA Input 2 12 Vdc Probe input is PT1000 only. Both Supplies must be connected. Low Voltage Supply (Gnd) can be Earthed if required Revision 2.4 Page 7 of 34

162 Input/Output Allocation Tables All Types Description Alarm Comments Action Digital Input 1 0V return Yes See note 1 Digital Input 2 0V return Yes Digital Input 3 0V return Yes Digital Input 4 0V return Yes Digital Input 5 0V return Yes Digital Input 6 0V return Yes Digital Input 7 0V return Yes Digital Input 8 0V return Yes Digital Input 9 0V return Yes Digital Input 10 0V return Yes Probe Input 11 PT1000 Temperature No Monitor probe only Standby Input Puts the controller into standby Yes 590 Ohm resistor on Probe I/P See Standby Mode 4-20mA Input 1 Section 1 Pressure transducer Yes See note mA Input 2 Section 2 Pressure transducer Yes See note 3 Relay 1 N/O N/A See note 2 Relay 2 N/O N/A Relay 3 N/O N/A Relay 4 N/O N/A Relay 5 N/O N/A Relay 6 N/O N/A Relay 7 N/O N/A Relay 8 N/O N/A Relay 9 N/O N/A Relay 10 N/O N/A Note 1: Digital inputs are configured as either "stage" inputs or as "general" depending on the set-up Digital inputs can be configured as "normally open" or "normally closed" Note 2: All relay outputs are normally open. The functional allocation depends on the set-up parameters. Note 3: Pressure transducers must be of the current loop 4-20mA type. Excitation voltage (12 Vdc) is provided for each transducer input. The range of the transducer will vary according to the application, this can be set to match the transducer by changing the "span and offset" in the controller parameters. Revision 2.4 Page 8 of 34

163 Setting up the controller Set-up access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons Direct access by PC or palm top into the rear comms port. This requires a software package available on the RDM website (Communicator) Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Director. Set-up Mode Set-up through front buttons To enter set-up mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Set-up Menu for Single Pack controller (Type1) LH RH Menu Item Option Display Display seen in type: Explained in Paragraph IO View Input/Output States All types View Input/Output States PArA Set/view Parameters All types Set/view parameters Unit Set/View units All types Set/View Units TyPE Set/View Controller Type All types Set/view product type rly Set/View Relay Invert All types Set/View Relay Invert rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time All types Real Time Clock Clock) net Set/view network configuration All types Network Configuration SoFt View software version All types ESC Exit set-up mode Recommended set-up method If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) 1. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc 2. Press enter. The display will show t-1. Press enter again 3. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter 4. Use up button to select t-2, press enter 5. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter 6. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) 7. Repeat for t-4 (Days up to 31) 8. Repeat for t-5 (months up to 12) 9. Repeat for t-6 (Year up to 99) 10. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set Revision 2.4 Page 9 of 34

164 Set/View Relay Invert When enabled this feature will invert all relay operation on the controller e.g. if relay 1 is off and the relay invert feature is enabled it will invert the relay to on. This feature affects all relays on the controller. 0 = Normal Relay Operation (Default) 1 = Inverted Relay Operation type. Set/view controller type 1. From the function menu scroll to "type", press enter 2. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through the type values. (See configuration on page 4) 3. Press enter. The controller will reset with the selected type now programmed. PArA. Set/view parameters (We recommend setting parameters from "Communicator" or the network front end such as "Data Director") 1. From the function menu scroll to PArA 2. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit the parameter set-up mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current controller type. See Parameter Tables for values Set/View Units This option allows the user to set the pressure units to either PSI or BAR. The user can also select an option to display the monitoring probe temperature, if used, in F. 0 = PSI C (default) 1 = BAR C 2 = PSI F 3 = BAR F Once activated, the controller parameters and display units will be in the set units. Note. If using the controller on a Genus system, bar units will not display on the system front-end. Note: - If the units are set to PSI C or BAR C then on the event of a pressure transducer probe failure, on a pack section, all compressor and loader stages are turned off. If the units are set to PSI F or BAR F then in the event of a pressure transducer probe failure, on a pack section, all compressor and loader stages are turned on. Revision 2.4 Page 10 of 34

165 Network Configuration The final section to set-up is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). To set the controller onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module. This is either a: Legacy, or IP Futura 485 Legacy module The legacy module provides for Genus compatibility Display Option 485t 485 Network Type 485A 485 Address/Name gadd Show underlying network address assigned to the Controller by the 485 system manager (e.g. Data Director) rlog Re-log the controller back onto the network CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu The 485t option shows a value representing the network type. The possible values are: Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) 2 Not available The 485A option shows a value representing the name of the controller in a Genus compatible network. In a Genus compatible system, the value shown is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible network using the name RC05-6. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. To enter this mode, use the Up/Down button from the "net" menu screen until "clra" is reached. Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Revision 2.4 Page 11 of 34

166 Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation, if the network type is set to Genus compatible. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. If the network type is not set to Genus compatible then the ClrA message will not flash and the ESC option can be used to exit the menu. IP Futura module In an IP system there are two options IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r (normally used mode) allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Director) IP-L To configure the communication module for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below IP-r Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. From the function menu select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view the address given by the DHCP server Revision 2.4 Page 12 of 34

167 Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Pack Controller (Type 1) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Target Pressure PSI 30 P-02 Section 1 Transducer Span* PSI 200 P-03 Section 1 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-04 Section 1 Target Number of Starts/hr P-05 Section 1 Optimise Limit P-80 Startup Delay 0-5 mins 1 mins/sec 0 P-82 Run Smallest** 0 = off, 1 = on 0 P-13 Section 1 HP Alarm Pressure PSI 60 P-14 Section 1 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 4 P-15 Section 1 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 2 P-16 Section 1 Alarm Delay mins 5 P-81 General Alarm Delay 0-60 mins 1 mins/sec 3 mins P-21 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-30 Stage 10 type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-51 Stage 1 Size P-60 P-41 Stage 10 size Stage 1 Input Type *** (0) N/O (1) N/C (2) Unused, 2 P-50 dflt ESc Stage 10 Input Type Restore Default Settings * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. E.g. Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) **Run smallest=on:- When all compressors are off (because the target pressure has been satisfied) the controller, when the pressure rises, will always turn on the smallest compressor. If the ASC timer is running for the smallest compressor, the controller will NOT bring on any other available compressors, it will wait until the ASC timer has elapsed and turn on the smallest. Please note that this is true for any pressure condition. *** Stage inputs have a pre-programmed delay of 10 seconds, this cannot be changed. Revision 2.4 Page 13 of 34

168 Parameter table for Dual Pack Controller (Type 2) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Target Pressure PSI 30 P-02 Section 1 Transducer Span* PSI 200 P-03 Section 1 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-04 Section 1 Target Number of Starts/hr P-05 Section 1 Optimise Limit PSI 30 P-80 Startup Delay 0-5 mins 1 mins/sec 0 P-82 Run Smallest** 0 = off, 1 = on 0 P-07 Section 2 Target Pressure PSI 30 P-08 Section 2 Transducer Span* PSI 200 P-09 Section 2 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-10 Section 2 Target Number of Starts/hr P-11 Section 2 Optimise Limit PSI 30 P-13 Section 1 HP Alarm Pressure PSI 60 P-14 Section 1 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 4 P-15 Section 1 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 2 P-16 Section 1 Alarm Delay Mins 5 P-81 General Alarm Delay 0-60 mins 1 mins/sec 3 mins P-18 Section 2 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 4 P-19 Section 2 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 2 P-20 Section 2 Alarm Delay Mins 5 P-21 Section 1 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-30 Section 1 Stage 10 Type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-31 Section 2 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-40 Section 2 Stage 10 Type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-51 Section 1 Stage 1 Size P-60 P-61 Section 1 Stage 10 Size Section 2 Stage 1 Size P-70 P-41 Section 2 Stage 10 Size Stage 1 Input Type (0) N/O (1) N/C (2) Unused, P- 50 Stage 10 Input Type dflt Restore Default Settings ESc * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Revision 2.4 Page 14 of 34 2

169 Eg Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) **Run smallest=on:- When all compressors are off (because the target pressure has been satisfied) the controller, when the pressure rises, will always turn on the smallest compressor. If the ASC timer is running for the smallest compressor, the controller will NOT bring on any other available compressors, it will wait until the ASC timer has elapsed and turn on the smallest. Please note that this is true for any pressure condition. Revision 2.4 Page 15 of 34

170 Parameter table for Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 3) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Target Pressure PSI 30 P-02 Section 1 Transducer Span* PSI 200 P-03 Section 1 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-04 Section 1 Target Number of Starts/hr P-05 Section 1 Optimise Limit PSI 30 P-80 Startup Delay 0-5 mins 1 mins/sec 0 P-82 Run Smallest** 0 = off, 1 = on 0 P-07 Section 2 Target Pressure PSI 185 P-08 Section 2 Transducer Span* PSI 500 P-09 Section 2 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-13 Section 1 HP Alarm Pressure PSI 60 P-14 Section 1 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 4 P-15 Section 1 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 2 P-16 Section 1 Alarm Delay Mins 5 P-81 General Alarm Delay 0-60 mins 1 mins/sec 3 mins P-17 Section 2 HP Alarm Pressure PSI 260 P-18 Section 2 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 100 P-19 Section 2 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 90 P-20 Section 2 Alarm Delay Mins 5 P-21 Section 1 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-30 Section 1 Stage 10 Type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-31 Section 2 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-40 Section 2 Stage 10 Type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-51 Section 1 Stage 1 Size P-60 P-41 Section 1 Stage 10 Size Stage 1 Input Type (0) N/O (1) N/C (2) Unused, 2 P-50 dflt ESc Stage 10 Input Type Restore Default Settings * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Eg Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) Revision 2.4 Page 16 of 34

171 **Run smallest=on:- When all compressors are off (because the target pressure has been satisfied) the controller, when the pressure rises, will always turn on the smallest compressor. If the ASC timer is running for the smallest compressor, the controller will NOT bring on any other available compressors, it will wait until the ASC timer has elapsed and turn on the smallest. Please note that this is true for any pressure condition. Parameter table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Target Pressure PSI 185 P-02 Section 1 Transducer Span* PSI 500 P-03 Section 1 Transducer Offset* PSI 0 P-80 Startup Delay 0-5 mins 1 mins/sec 0 P-13 Section 1 HP Alarm Pressure PSI 260 P-14 Section 1 LP Alarm Pressure PSI 100 P-15 Section 1 LP Shut-down Pressure PSI 90 P-16 Section 1 Alarm Delay Mins 5 P-81 General Alarm Delay 0-60 mins 1 mins/sec 3 mins P-21 Section 1 Stage 1 Type (0) None, 0 P-30 Section 1 Stage 10 Type (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan P-41 Stage 1 Input Type (0) N/O 2 (1) N/C (2) Unused, P-50 dflt ESc Stage 10 Input Type Restore Default Settings * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Eg Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) Revision 2.4 Page 17 of 34

172 Configuration of inputs and outputs: Stage Inputs: Digital inputs can be configured as Normally Open, Normally closed or Unused,. Each input, when assigned will attach to the corresponding section output. If there are any stages left as "None" at the end, the digital input will become a "General Alarm" input. Section Stages: Section stages can be set up as: - None, Unused, Compressor, Loader or Fan. These parameters determine which relay is assigned to the section outputs. There are a total of 10 relays that can be assigned in any combination. Stage Description None Use this option to end the number of stages in the controller If the controller is a 2 section type (Type 2 or 3) this will indicate the end of the 1st section and start assigning subsequent relays to the 2nd stage Unused Use this option to skip a relay output within a stage Comp Use this option to assign a relay output to a compressor See note 4 Loader Use this option to assign a relay output to a compressor loader Fan Use this option to assign a relay to a fan Note 4: In a pack configuration, at least 1 output must be assigned to a compressor. Loader outputs will not energise without a compressor being on. Example: Pack/Condenser mode (Type3) Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 not used This configuration shows a 6-stage pack with a 3-stage condenser controller. All digital inputs are assigned to N/O, making the first 6 inputs: - section 1 stage 1-6, the next 3 inputs; section 2 stage 1-3, and the last input a "general fault" (no relay has been assigned) Stage Sizes Stage sizes will determine the order in which compressors or loaders are switched on and off. This is a relative number between 0 and 60, reflecting the size of the compressor (usually horse power) The default stage size is 0; stage sizes must be entered for correct operation. Revision 2.4 Page 18 of 34

173 Operation Once the controller has been set-up and configured, normal operation will resume. The controller operates a "fuzzy logic" based control algorithm. The controller will determine the stages to bring on and off using the fuzzy logic rules and adhering to the starts/hr criteria. Note that on and off delays will vary according the current conditions. The fuzzy logic will attempt to optimise the compressor starts and keep them at a minimum. Viewing Inputs and Outputs Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. From the function menu, select IO, press enter 2. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Input/Output Tables Input/Output table for Pack Controller (Type 1) Number IO Range Units I-01 Suction Pressure PSI I-11 Digital Input 1 (0) Alarm (1) OK (2) Unused I-20 Digital Input 10 I-31 Temperature Probe Relay 1 (0) Off (1) On o C 0-10 Relay Optimisation Level PSI S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by Revision 2.4 Page 19 of 34

174 Input/Output table for Dual Pack Controller (Type 2) Number IO Range Units I-01 Section 1 Suction Pressure PSI I-02 Section 2 Suction Pressure PSI I-11 Digital Input 1 (0) Alarm (1) OK (2) Unused I-20 Digital Input 10 I-31 Temperature Probe Relay 1 (0) Off (1) On o C 0-10 Relay Section 1 Optimisation Level PSI 0-22 Section 2 Optimisation Level PSI S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by S-02 Section 2 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by Revision 2.4 Page 20 of 34

175 Input/Output table for Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 3) Number IO Range Units I-01 Section 1 Suction Pressure PSI I-02 Section 2 Suction Pressure PSI I-11 Digital Input 1 (0) Alarm (1) OK (2) Unused I-20 Digital Input 10 I-31 Temperature Probe Relay 1 (0) Off (1) On o C 0-10 Relay Optimisation Level PSI S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by S-02 Section 2 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by Revision 2.4 Page 21 of 34

176 Input/Output table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Number IO Range Units 1-01 Discharge Pressure PSI I-11 Digital Input 1 (0) Alarm (1) OK (2) Unused I-20 Digital Input Temperature Probe Relay o C Off On 0-10 Relay 10 S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilize (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Fail Probe (7) Stand-by Revision 2.4 Page 22 of 34

177 Viewing Alarms Press the "View Alarms" button to enter this mode, the two fault LED's will flash while in this mode. Resource Data Management FLT 1 PRESSURE 1 PRESSURE 2 FLT 2 This display shows the alarm number: E.g. Alarm 1 This display shows the alarm type: E.g. section 1 stage 1 View Alarm button Press the "down" button to scroll through the alarm log. Press the "Quick View" button to see the occurred time Resource Data Management PRESSURE 1 PRESSURE 2 FLT 1 FLT 2 This display shows the alarm time: E.g. 14:49 This display shows the alarm date: E.g. 17:09(sept 17) Press the "Quick View" button again to see the alarm "cleared" time & date. 20 alarms are held in the controller. See Alarm Display Messages for alarm screens Revision 2.4 Page 23 of 34

178 Quickview Pressing the "quickview" button during normal operation displays the target pressure. If a two-stage controller has been configured, both target pressures are displayed. Press the "quickview" button again to go back to the normal display or wait for the time-out period to elapse. Override The override function allows the user to switch output stages on or off. (Providing the output stages have been configured) Press the override and enter button together for approx 3 secs. Use the "up" button to turn the stage on, and the down button to turn the stage off. Press "enter" to exit this mode or allow the time-out to elapse. For a 2-stage controller (types 3 and 4) use the "override" button to turn section 2 stages on, and the "alarmview" button to turn section 2 stages off. Standby Mode The controller requires a 590 Ohm resistor present across Probe input 11 and common (gnd) for normal operation. If the resistor is not detected; such as in a fault condition, the controller will go into standby mode. All compressors and/or fans will be turned off and an alarm (controller in standby) generated. There is a 10 second delay for the detection of the resistor, both in and out. Revision 2.4 Page 24 of 34

179 Display Messages The following messages can appear on the Mercury display during normal operation. Display hipr LoPr Prob Ft LoSh System status High Pressure alarm Low Pressure alarm Pressure Transducer alarm Fault Low Pressure Shut-down Alarm Display Messages The following table indicates the messages that can be displayed in the "alarm view" mode. LH Display RH Display Message Description A-nn S1.xx Section 1 Stage xx alarm S2.xx Section 2 Stage xx alarm Ftxx General Fault xx FnhP Condenser High Pressure alarm FnLP Condenser Low Pressure alarm FnSd Condenser Low Pressure Shut-down alarm FnPr Condenser Probe alarm P1hP Pack 1 High Pressure alarm P1LP Pack 1 Low Pressure alarm P1Sd Pack 1 Low Pressure Shut-down alarm P1Pr Pack 1 Probe alarm P2hP Pack 2 High Pressure alarm P2LP Pack 2 Low Pressure alarm P2Sd Pack 2 Low Pressure Shut-down alarm P2Pr Pack 2 Probe alarm Ctrl Configuration fault Stby Controller in standby no AL No Alarm AL Act Alarm still active Where nn = 01 to 20 Where xx = 01 to 10 (20 alarms are stored in the controller) Revision 2.4 Page 25 of 34

180 Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # Section 1 Pack High Pressure 8 Section 1 Pack Low Pressure 9 Section 1 Pack Low Shutdown 10 Section 1 Pack Pressure Probe Fault 6 Section 2 Pack High Pressure 8 Section 2 Pack Low Pressure 9 Section 2 Pack Low Shutdown 10 Section 2 Pack Pressure Probe Fault 6 Section 1 Cond High Pressure 12 Section 1 Cond Low Pressure 11 Section 1 Cond Low Shutdown 11 Section 1 Cond Pressure Probe Fault 6 Section 2 Cond High Pressure 12 Section 2 Cond Low Pressure 11 Section 2 Cond Low Shutdown 11 Section 2 Cond Pressure Probe Fault 6 General Fault 1 20 General Fault 2 20 General Fault 3 20 General Fault 4 20 General Fault 5 20 General Fault 6 20 General Fault 7 20 General Fault 8 20 General Fault 9 20 General Fault Section 1 Stage 1 3 Section 1 Stage 2 3 Section 1 Stage 3 3 Section 1 Stage 4 3 Section 1 Stage 5 3 Section 1 Stage 6 3 Section 1 Stage 7 3 Section 1 Stage 8 3 Section 1 Stage 9 3 Section 1 Stage 10 3 Section 2 Stage 1 3 Section 2 Stage 2 3 Section 2 Stage 3 3 Section 2 Stage 4 3 Section 2 Stage 5 3 Section 2 Stage 6 3 Section 2 Stage 7 3 Section 2 Stage 8 3 Section 2 Stage 9 3 Section 2 Stage 10 3 Configuration fault 20 Controller in standby 20 Revision 2.4 Page 26 of 34

181 Specification Power requirements for PR0332 and PR0334: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz ±10% Maximum supply current: <1 Amp (with no relay loads) 10 Amps (with relays 4, 5, 9 and 10 fully loaded) Typical supply current: <1.0 Amp Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted. The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 10A, 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 10A, 240 Vac Type C conforming to BS EN The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. Power requirements for PR0333 and PR0335: Supply Voltage Range: 10 Vdc to 35 Vdc or 15 Vac to 30 Vac AC Supply Frequency: Hz ±10% Maximum supply current: 1 Amp (Controller only) Typical supply current: <1.0 Amp (Controller only) Class 2 Insulation: The supply ground can be earthed if required. The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 3A, 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 3A, 240 Vac Type C conforming to BS EN The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. General Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 180mm (W) x 68mm (H) x 110mm (D) Weight: 260 Grams Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Inputs: Probe Input type Digital Input type Comms: 4-20mA PT1000 for all versions 0 volt return (internal pull-up resistor give hi state when there is no return) RS232 with flow control 4-20mA current loop, use the 12 Vdc output to feed the pressure transducer Revision 2.4 Page 27 of 34

182 Relay Ratings for PR0332 and PR0334 Max current relay 1: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 1: 260Vac (external supply) Exclusive common Max current relay 2: 4A (non inductive) Relays 2 and 3 share a common Max Voltage relay 2: 260Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can Shared common with relay 3 have a combined total of 8A. Max current relay 3: 4A (non inductive) Relay 2 or 3 can switch a maximum. Max Voltage relay 3: 260Vac (external supply) of 6A provided the other is at 2A or Shared common with relay 2 lower. Max current relay 4: Max Voltage relay 4: Common connected to supply 1 "live" Max current relay 5: Max Voltage relay 5: Common connected to supply 1 "live" 3A (non inductive) 260Vac (Internal supply) 3A (non inductive) 260Vac (Internal supply) Max current relay 6: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 6: 260Vac (external supply) Exclusive common Max current relay 7: 4A (non inductive) Relays 7 and 8 share a common Max Voltage relay 7: 260Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can Shared common with relay 8 have a combined total of 8A. Max current relay 8: 4A (non inductive) Relay 7 or 8 can switch a maximum. Max Voltage relay 8: 260Vac (external supply) of 6A provided the other is at 2A or Shared common with relay 2 lower. Max current relay 9: Max Voltage relay 9: Common connected to supply 2 "live" Max current relay 10: Max Voltage relay 10: Common connected to supply 2 "live" 3A (non inductive) 260Vac (Internal supply) 3A (non inductive) 260Vac (Internal supply) Revision 2.4 Page 28 of 34

183 Relay Ratings for PR0333 and PR0335 Max current relay 1: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 1: 24Vac (external supply) Exclusive common Max current relay 2: 4A (non inductive) Relays 2 and 3 share a common Max Voltage relay 2: 24Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can Shared common with relay 3 have a combined total of 8A. Max current relay 3: 4A (non inductive) Relay 2 or 3 can switch a maximum. Max Voltage relay 3: 24Vac (external supply) of 6A provided the other is at 2A or Shared common with relay 2 lower. Max current relay 4: 3A (non inductive) Relays 4 and 5 share a common Max Voltage relay 4: 24Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can have a combined load of 6A Max current relay 5: 3A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 5: 24Vac (external supply) Max current relay 6: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 6: 24Vac (external supply) Exclusive common Max current relay 7: 4A (non inductive) Relays 7 and 8 share a common Max Voltage relay 7: 24Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can Shared common with relay 8 have a combined total of 8A. Max current relay 8: 4A (non inductive) Relay 7 or 8 can switch a maximum. Max Voltage relay 8: 24Vac (external supply) of 6A provided the other is at 2A or Shared common with relay 7 lower. Max current relay 9: 3A (non inductive) Relays 9 and 10 share a common Max Voltage relay 9: 24Vac (external supply) supply line and the loads can have a combined total of 6A. Max current relay 10: 3A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 10: 24Vac (external supply) Important Safety Notice: PR0332 and PR0334 must use a voltage level the same as the supply input voltage on all of the relays common. PR0333 and PR0335 must use a voltage level no greater than 40 Vdc or 30 Vac on all of the relays common. Revision 2.4 Page 29 of 34

184 Installation: Panel Cut-out: 83mm 83mm 166mm 44mm 52mm 6 Holes 3.5mm Dia. Fixing: 6 X M3 screws from the rear fix the controller. DIN rail: Use PR0039 to mount the controller to a DIN rail. Clearances: The controller must have 5mm clearance above the top and below bottom, and 25mm clearance from the sides. Clearance at the rear is dependant on the wiring. There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Revision 2.4 Page 30 of 34

185 Wiring for PR0332 & PR0334: RS232 Output Relays: Output 1 N/O Output 1 Common Output 2 N/O Output 3 N/O Output 2/3 Common Output 4 N/O Output 5 N/O Supply Live & Output 4/5 common Not Used (DO NOT CONNECT) Supply Neutral Output 6 N/O Output 6 Common Output 7 N/O Output 8 N/O Output 7/8 Common Output 9 N/O Output 10 N/O Supply Live & Output 9/10 common Not Used (DO NOT CONNECT) Supply Neutral Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Common Digital Input 3 Digital Input 4 Common Digital Input 5 Common Not Used Not Used Common Probe Input 11 Digital Input 10 Common Digital Input 9 Digital Input 8 Common Digital Input 7 Digital Input 6 Common 4-20mA Input 1 12 Vdc 4-20mA Input 2 12 Vdc Note: Suitable mechanical restraints on the wiring to the controller may be required; dependant on cable types, to prevent undue stress or distortion on the controller connectors. Revision 2.4 Page 31 of 34

186 Wiring for PR0333 & PR0335: Output Relays: RS232 Output 1 N/O Output 1 Common Output 2 N/O Output 3 N/O Output 2/3 Common Output 4 N/O Output 5 N/O Output 4/5 Common Low Voltage Supply (Gnd) Low Voltage Supply (Positive) Output 6 N/O Output 6 Common Output 7 N/O Output 8 N/O Output 7/8 Common Output 9 N/O Output 10 N/O Output 9/10 Common Low Voltage Supply (Gnd) Low Voltage Supply (Positive) Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Common Digital Input 3 Digital Input 4 Common Digital Input 5 Common Not Used Not Used Common Probe Input 11 Digital Input 10 Common Digital Input 9 Digital Input 8 Common Digital Input 7 Digital Input 6 Common 4-20mA Input 1 12 Vdc 4-20mA Input 2 12 Vdc Note: Suitable mechanical restraints on the wiring to the controller may be required; dependant on cable types, to prevent undue stress or distortion on the controller connectors. Cleaning: Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with a slightly damped lint free cloth. Revision 2.4 Page 32 of 34

187 Appendix 1 Typical Transducer Connection: For 4-20mA type transducers the diagram below shows the connections to the Mercury 11-10P: Vdc 4-20mA I/P Note: The Earth connection is not necessary unless in a noisy environment. Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this set up guide may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 2.4 Page 33 of 34

188 Revision History Revision Date Changes /08/07 Option to display monitoring probe temperature in F included. Ability to invert all relay operation on the controller introduced /09/2008 Option added to turn compressors on in the event on a pressure transducer probe failure (See section entitled Set/view Units). Invert relay option modified such that the controller reports the actual compressor/fan status instead of the relay status /11/2010 Additional ordering information included. Revision 2.4 Page 34 of 34

189 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Humidistat Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0440 Revision 1.6 Page 1 of 23

190 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Table of Contents: Types... 4 Type Description:... 4 Type 1: Triple thermostat with timer Type 2: Temperature and Humidity thermostat with timer Front Panel Features... 4 Display:... 4 Enter Button:... 4 Up Button:... 4 Down Button:... 5 # Button:... 5 Network LED:... 5 Timer LED:... 5 Fault LED:... 5 Connections... 6 Display Connection:... 6 Inputs Jumper Settings:... 6 Input/Output Allocation Tables... 7 Type 1 Triple Thermostat... 7 Type 2 Thermostat/Humidistat... 7 Setting up the controller... 8 Setup Mode... 8 Setup through front buttons... 8 Setup Function Menu... 8 Recommended set-up method... 9 type. Set/view controller type... 9 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 9 Probe Types... 9 PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end)... 9 Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Type 1 Triple Thermostat Parameter table for Type 2 Temp and Humidity Thermostat with timer rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) Network Configuration IP-L (Local IP Address) IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server) Operation: Type 1: Triple Thermostat Type 2: Temp and Humidity Thermostat with timer Frost Detect Cooling Thermostat graph Heating Thermostat graph Viewing Input/Output table Type 1 (Triple Thermostat) Input/Output table Type 2 (Thermostat/Humidistat) Alarm Messages Network Alarms Specification Power requirements: Relays Inputs Remote Sensor - Humidity Installation: Wiring: Fixing: Clearances: Fuse: Cleaning: Disclaimer: Revision 1.6 Page 2 of 23

191 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide APPENDIX REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.6 Page 3 of 23

192 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Humidistat Types From Resource Data Management There are 2 types of controller embedded in the Humidistat controller: - Display value Type 1 Triple Thermostat with Timer 2 Temp and Humidity Thermostat with timer Type Description: Type 1: Triple thermostat with timer. This controller has 3 thermostat functions. They can be independent, using a separate probe for each function. Or the controller can be configured for a three stage thermostat using a single probe. There is a 7 day timer with 2 on s and 2 offs. The humidity value for all options can be for monitoring or be used as part of the thermostat function (effective temperature). The set-point range can be limited to prevent the user moving too far. Type 2: Temperature and Humidity thermostat with timer. This controller has a temperature thermostat function and a humidistat function using a humidity sensor. There is a 7 day timer with 2 on s and 2 offs. Front Panel Features 4 Character LCD Enter Button Down Button Display: # Button Up Button The display fits a standard UK single socket patress. The display values can be selected by changing the display parameter. Enter Button: Button used to enter values after a change. Up Button: Normally the up button will increment the setpoint. When in the menu, the up button is used to scroll up through the menu items. Revision 1.6 Page 4 of 23

193 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Down Button: Normally the down button will decrement the setpoint. When in the menu, the down button is used to scroll down through the menu items # Button: Overrun function. Use this button to provide up to 6 hours of on time, if the timer is off, or if the timer is on, extend its time by up to 6 hours. The overrun function will switch off the amber LED if it s on, or keep it off for the extra hours. Press the # button during an overrun period to cancel the overrun and turn the thermostat(s) off. Network LED: Green LED used to indicate network Status: Off Flashing Steady No network attached Attempting to Log on to network On-line Timer LED: Amber LED, Indicates when the timer is out of its operational times. Fault LED: Red LED, used to indicate an alarm status. Revision 1.6 Page 5 of 23

194 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Connections Analogue Inputs Channel 1 Input Channel 1 Ground Channel 2 Input Channel 2 Ground Channel 3 Input Channel 3 Ground Channel 4 Input Channel 4 Ground CH1 Jumper CH2 Jumper Network ID Switch 3 Network ID Switch 2 Network ID Switch 1 Display Connector Not Connected SDO (Data Out) SCL (Clock) GND SDI (Data In) +5V (Vcc) Mains Neutral Mains Live Relays Relay 3 Normally Open Relay 3 Common Relay 2 Normally Open Relay 2 Common Relay 2 Normally Closed Relay 1 Normally Open Relay 1 Common Relay 1 Normally Closed Do not connect an earth. Display Connection: Controller SDO (Serial Data Out) Data In SCL (Serial Clock) Clock GND GND SDI (Serial Data In) Data Out +5V (Vcc) Vcc Display Inputs Jumper Settings: 4-20mA Humidity Temperature Sensor Probe Channel 1 Input selection Jumper Channel 2 Input selection Jumper Channel 1 showing Temperature Probe selected Channel 2 showing Humidity sensor selected Note: It is very important for the normal operation of the Humidistat controller that these jumpers are set to the correct position for the inputs being used. Revision 1.6 Page 6 of 23

195 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Input/Output Allocation Tables Type 1 Triple Thermostat Input/Output Description Alarm Action Display Temperature Fixed Sensor in the display yes Display Humidity Fixed sensor in the display yes Input 1 (Jumper selects) Probe, Humidity sensor yes Input 2 (Jumper selects) Probe, Humidity sensor yes Input 3 Probe yes Input 4 Probe yes Relay 1 Stat A control N/A Relay 2 Stat B control N/A Relay 3 Stat C control or Timer output N/A Type 2 Thermostat/Humidistat Input/Output Description Alarm Action Display Temperature Fixed Sensor in the display yes Display Humidity Fixed sensor in the display yes Input 1 (Jumper selects) Probe, Humidity sensor yes Input 2 (Jumper selects) Probe, Humidity sensor yes Input 3 Probe yes Input 4 Probe yes Relay 1 Thermostat control N/A Relay 2 Humidistat control N/A Relay 3 Timer output N/A Revision 1.6 Page 7 of 23

196 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved by 2 ways Setup Mode Through the front mounted buttons on the display Through the RDM Data Director or Data Manager Setup through front buttons To enter the setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the menu items. Setup Function Menu Display Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Input and Output States IO PArA View or change Parameters Para Unit View or change Units and Probe types Unit type View or change controller type type rtc View or change the Real Time Clock RTC net View or change the network settings Net SoFt View the Software version ESC Escape the menu Revision 1.6 Page 8 of 23

197 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Recommended set-up method The first two set-up items (Type and Units) must be set from the display; they can not be set from the Data Manager. It is also advisable to set these items before the controller is connected to the network. type. Set/view controller type a. From the function menu scroll to select type, press enter b. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through configuration types. (see configuration table on page 4) c. Press enter. d. Scroll to select ESC e. Press enter Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 = PT1000 o C 1 = PT1000 o F 2 = NTC2K o C 3 = NTC2K o F 4 = NTC2K25 o C 5 = NTC2K25 o F Controller type configuration is now set Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. Probe type and units are now set PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter tables to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. Revision 1.6 Page 9 of 23

198 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Type 1 Triple Thermostat Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Def. o C ( o F ) P01 Stat A setpoint -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 15 (59) P02 Stat A diff 0 to 20 (32 to 68) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P03 Stat A Input 0 = Off 1 1 See Note 1 1 = Display Probe 2 = Probe 1 3 = Probe 2 4 = Probe 3 5 = Probe 4 P04 Stat A type 0 = Cooling = Heating P05 Stat A min set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P06 Stat A max set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P07 Stat A Comfort Index 0 = No = Display Sensor 2 = Sensor 1 3 = Sensor 2 P10 Stat A High Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 25 (77) P11 Stat A Low Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P12 Stat A Alarm Delay 00 to 99 1 mins 20 P21 Stat B setpoint -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 18 (65) P22 Stat B diff 0 to 20 (32 to 68) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P23 Stat B Input See Note 1 0 = Off 1 = Display probe 2 = Probe 1 3 = Probe 2 4 = Probe 3 5 = Probe P24 Stat B type 0 = Cooling = Heating P25 Stat B min set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P26 Stat B max set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P27 Stat B Comfort Index 0 = No = Display Sensor 2 = Sensor 1 3 = Sensor 2 P30 Stat B High Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 25 (77) P31 Stat B Low Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P32 Stat B Alarm Delay 00 to 99 1 mins 20 P41 Stat C setpoint -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 20 (68) P42 Stat C diff 0 to 20 (32 to 68) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P43 Stat C Input 0 = Off 1 0 See Note 1 1 = Display probe 2 = Probe 1 3 = Probe 2 4 = Probe 3 5 = Probe 4 P44 Stat C type 0 = Cooling 1 = Heating 1 1 Revision 1.6 Page 10 of 23

199 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide P45 Stat C min set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P46 Stat C max set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P47 Stat C Comfort Index 0 = No = Display Sensor 2 = Sensor 1 3 = Sensor 2 P50 Stat C High Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 25 (77) P51 Stat C Low Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P52 Stat C Alarm Delay 00 to 99 1 mins 20 P60 Display 0 = Cycle = Stat A 2 = Stat B 3 = Stat C 4 = Stat A & Stat B 5 = Stat A & Stat C 6 = Stat B & Stat C P61 Frost probe select 0 = Off = Display probe 2 = Probe 1 3 = Probe 2 4 = Probe 3 5 = Probe 4 P62 Frost Detect -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 0 (32) P63 Frost Cut-in -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 10 (50) P70 Timer Mode 0 = local = Remote 2 = force on 3 = force off P71 Sunday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P72 Sunday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P73 Sunday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P74 Sunday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P75 Monday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P76 Monday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P77 Monday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P78 Monday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P79 Tuesday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P80 Tuesday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P81 Tuesday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P82 Tuesday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P83 Wednesday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P84 Wednesday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P85 Wednesday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P86 Wednesday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P87 Thursday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P88 Thursday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P89 Thursday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P90 Thursday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P91 Friday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P92 Friday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P93 Friday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P94 Friday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P95 Saturday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 Revision 1.6 Page 11 of 23

200 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide P96 Saturday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P97 Saturday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P98 Saturday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 Parameter table for Type 2 Temp and Humidity Thermostat with timer Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Def. o C ( o F ) P01 Temp Stat setpoint -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 15 (59) P02 Temp Stat diff 0 to 20 (32 to 68) 0.1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P03 Temp Stat Input 0 = Display probe 1 0 See Note 1 1 = Probe 1 2 = Probe 2 3 = Probe 3 4 = Probe 4 P04 Temp Stat type 0 = Cooling = Heating P05 Temp Stat min set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P06 Temp Stat max set -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 5 (41) P07 Stat Comfort Index 0 = No = Yes P10 Temp Stat High Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 25 (77) P11 Temp Stat Low Alarm -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) -5 (23) P12 Temp Stat Alarm Delay 00 to 99 1 mins 20 P21 Humidity Stat setpoint 0 to % rh 30 P22 Humidity Stat diff 0 to 20 1 % rh 5 P23 Humidity Stat Input See Note 1 0 = Display sensor 1 = Remote sensor 1 2 = Remote sensor P24 Humidity Stat type 0 = Heating = Cooling P25 Humidity Stat min set 0 to % rh 20 P26 Humidity Stat max set 0 to % rh 40 P30 Humidity Stat High 0 to % rh 50 Alarm P31 Humidity Stat Low 0 to % rh 10 Alarm P32 Hum. Stat Alarm Delay 00 to 99 1 mins 20 P60 Display 0 = Cycle 1 = Temperature Stat 2 = Humidity Stat 1 2 P61 Frost probe select 0 = Off = Display probe 2 = Probe 1 3 = Probe 2 4 = Probe 3 5 = Probe 4 P62 Frost Detect -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 0 (32) P63 Frost Cut-in -42 to 60 (-43 to 140) 1 o C ( o F ) 10 (50) P70 Timer Mode 0 = local 1 = Remote 2 = force on 3 = force off 1 0 Revision 1.6 Page 12 of 23

201 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide P71 Sunday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P72 Sunday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P73 Sunday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P74 Sunday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P75 Monday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P76 Monday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P77 Monday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P78 Monday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P79 Tuesday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P80 Tuesday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P81 Tuesday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P82 Tuesday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P83 Wednesday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P84 Wednesday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P85 Wednesday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P86 Wednesday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P87 Thursday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P88 Thursday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P89 Thursday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P90 Thursday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P91 Friday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P92 Friday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P93 Friday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P94 Friday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P95 Saturday On Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P96 Saturday Off Time 1 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P97 Saturday On Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 P98 Saturday Off Time 2 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 00:00 Note 1. As well as selecting the input type in the parameter section, the physical input needs to be set to the corresponding type. See Inputs Jumper Settings rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set Revision 1.6 Page 13 of 23

202 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network ID. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is connected to the site network. Set the 3 rotary network switches to an appropriate setting, the controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong ID has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller ID by setting the ID to 0-0-0, power cycle and then re-enter the correct ID. This controller does not require an external communications module. IP-L (Local IP Address) To configure the controller for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server) To configure the controller for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The controller should then be connected to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Revision 1.6 Page 14 of 23

203 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Operation: Type 1: Triple Thermostat This controller has 3 temperature thermostat functions, A, B and C. They can be used as independent thermostats by selecting a different input for each function. Alternatively, they can be used as a 2 or 3 stage thermostat by selecting the same input. Or they can be switched off. When thermostat C is set to Off, Relay 3 energises when the 7 day timer is active. All three thermostat functions have their own diff, and can be set for cooling mode (diff is below the set-point) or heating mode (diff is above the set-point). Thermostat A switches relay 1, thermostat B switches relay 2, and thermostat C switches relay 3. If the comfort index is enabled, the control temp is offset by a value according to the humidity value (see appendix 1; Humidity/Temperature chart) The Display temperature is also similarly adjusted. The decimal point adjacent to the zone indicator will be on to indicate an offset temperature value. To change a setpoint value, press the up and down button together for a short time (2 seconds); the display will show thermostat A s set-point (such as 15.0 ); press enter to display thermostat B s set-point (such as 20:0 ), repeating enter moves through the set-points A, B and C. To change the set-point value, use the up/down buttons to get to the desired value and then press enter. Note that the alarm levels will also change by the same value as the setpoint is changed. High and Low alarm limits can be set for each thermostat. The controller has a built in 2 on/2 off seven day timer. The controller will continue to display outside of the set times, but the control relays will not function. When set to a 1 or 2 stage thermostat (Thermostat C off) Relay 3 energises when within the selected times, also the amber LED indicates when outside of the set times. Type 2: Temp and Humidity Thermostat with timer This controller has 2 thermostat functions; a temperature thermostat that switches relay 1, and a humidistat that switches relay 2. Both thermostat functions have there own diff, and can be set for cooling mode (diff is below the set-point) or heating mode (diff is above the set-point). If the Comfort Index is enabled, the control temp is offset by a value according to the humidity value (see appendix 1; Humidity/Temperature chart) The Display temperature is also similarly adjusted. The decimal point adjacent to the zone indicator will be on to indicate an offset temperature value. High and Low alarm limits can be set for each thermostat Set-points can be changed in the same manner as described in the above paragraph. The controller has a build in 2 on/2 off seven day timer. The controller will continue to display outside of the set times, but the control relays will not function. Relay 3 energises when within the selected times, the amber LED indicates when outside of the set times. Frost Detect Frost detect is included in both type 1 and type 2 controllers. Frost detect works when the timer is off, and the frost probe reaches the frost detcect value, the thermostat relays are energised. The thermostats will then operate to the frost cut-in and diff until the frost detect value is exceeded, where upon the thermostats are switched off. Note If the same probe is used for the thermostat and frost detect, hunting may ocurr around the frost detect point. It is better to use separtae probes. Revision 1.6 Page 15 of 23

204 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Cooling Thermostat graph Heating Thermostat graph Revision 1.6 Page 16 of 23

205 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. IO. View Inputs / Outputs and States a. From the function menu, select IO, press enter b. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Input/Output table Type 1 (Triple Thermostat) Number IO Range (dependant on probe type) o C ( o F ) Step Units I-01 Stat A Control temp ( ) 1 Deg I-02 Stat B Control temp ( ) 1 Deg I-03 Stat C Control temp ( ) 1 Deg I-10 Display Temperature ( ) 1 Deg I-11 Display Humidity %rh I-21 Stat A Temperature ( ) 1 Deg I-22 Stat B Temperature ( ) 1 Deg I-23 Stat C Temperature ( ) 1 Deg O-01 Relay 1 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-02 Relay 2 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-03 Relay 3 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-11 Timer 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - S-01 S-02 S-03 Stat A Control State Stat B Control State Stat C Control State 0 = off 1 = Stablise 2 = Normal 3 = High Alarm 4 = Low Alarm Input/Output table Type 2 (Thermostat/Humidistat) - - Number IO Range (dependant on probe type) o C ( o F ) Step Units I-01 Stat Control temp ( ) 1 Deg I-02 Control Humidity %rh I-21 Stat Temperature ( ) 1 Deg O-01 Relay 1 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-02 Relay 2 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-03 Relay 3 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-11 Timer 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - S-01 S-02 Stat A Control State Stat B Control State 0 = off 1 = Stablise 2 = Normal 3 = High Alarm 4 = Low Alarm - - Revision 1.6 Page 17 of 23

206 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury display. Display Message Ft System status Probe or sensor fault Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) Display Probe fault 6 Display Sensor fault 6 Stat A Probe fault 6 Stat A Over Temperature 4 Stat A Under Temperature 5 Stat B Probe fault 6 Stat B Over Temperature 4 Stat B Under Temperature 5 Stat C Probe fault 6 Stat C Over Temperature 4 Stat C Under Temperature 5 Humidity Sensor fault 6 High Humidity Alarm 8 Low Humidity Alarm 9 Revision 1.6 Page 18 of 23

207 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz Maximum supply current: 0.2 Amp (Not including Relay current) Typical supply current: <0.1 Amp (Not including Relay current) Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 90mm (W) x 58mm (H) x 160mm (D) Weight: Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted. The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 3A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 3A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. Relays Relay 1: contacts: - N/C, N/O and Common Max current relay 1: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 1: 260Vac (external supply) Relay 2: contacts: - N/C, N/O and Common Max current relay 2: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 2: 260Vac (external supply) Relay 3: contacts: - N/O and Common Max current relay 3: 6A (non inductive). Max Voltage relay 3: 260Vac (external supply) For compliance with the LVD, supplys to all three relays must be the same voltage. Inputs CH1: CH2: CH3: CH4: Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital), 4-20mA, Humidity Sensor or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital), 4-20mA, Humidity Sensor or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital) or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital) or CT Remote Sensor Humidity Farnell part number or similar device can be used. Revision 1.6 Page 19 of 23

208 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Installation: Wiring: CH1 & CH2 mode selectors Network ID switches Relays Mains Input Inputs Display Connector Fixing: The Humidistat Display is designed to fix on to a single socket patress, either wall or flush mount. Display cable length must not exceed 5 Metres. The Humidistat Controller fits a standard DIN rail, or the clips can be extended to allow for a surface screw fixing. Clearances: There are no clearance rules associated with this controller. Revision 1.6 Page 20 of 23

209 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Fuse: The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 1A 110Vac or 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 1A, 110Vac or240 Vac Type C conforming to BS EN Cleaning: Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the top by wiping with slightly damped lint free cloth. Disclaimer: The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 1.6 Page 21 of 23

210 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Appendix 1 Apparent Temperature for Values of Room Temperature and Relative Humidity 0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 40% 45% 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% Revision 1.6 Page 22 of 23

211 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Revision History Revision Date Changes Comments /06/2006 Changes to the type description paragraph Removed reference to case/coldroom /09/2007 Typo s corrected /08/2009 Remote humidity sensor part number added /01/10 Size Added. Revision 1.6 Page 23 of 23

212 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Plant Backup Controller Pack/Condenser Installation & User Guide Plant Backup Controller Universal Inputs/Outputs Status Inputs CLASS II RELAY RATINGS: 5A/250 Vac/AC1 RLY1 RLY2 RLY3 RLY4 RLY5 RLY6 RLY7 RLY8 RLY9 RLY 10 RLY 11 RLY 12 SUPPLY INPUT 24V AC or DC 24 V 0 E V Product Number: - PR0609 PSU: - PR0625 Revision 1.0 Page 1 of 24

213 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Contents: THE PLANT BACKUP CONTROLLER... 3 Description... 3 Configuration... 3 Backup Controller I/O Connections... 4 Input/s & Outputs... 5 Setting up the controller... 6 Display Operation... 6 Set-up Mode... 7 Set-up Function Menu... 7 Recommended set-up method... 7 type. Set/view controller type... 7 PArA. Set/view parameters... 7 Parameter Tables... 8 Parameter table for LT Pack Controller (Type 1)... 8 Parameter table for HT Pack Controller (Type 2)... 9 Parameter table for HT/LT Pack Controller (Type 3) Parameter table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Parameter table for Dual Condenser Controller (Type 5) Parameter table for LT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 6) Parameter table for HT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 7) Parameter Description: Relay Assignment Inverter Output Relay Standby Relay Operation Control Enabled Control Disabled Test Viewing Inputs and Outputs Input/Output Tables Input/Output table for LT Pack Controller (Type 1) Input/Output table for HT Pack Controller (Type 2) Input/Output table for HT / LT Pack Controller (Type 3) Input/Output table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Input/Output table for Dual Condenser Controller (Type 5) Input/Output table for LT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 6) Input/Output table for HT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 7) Specification Power requirements: General Inputs: Analogue Outputs Relay Ratings Installation: Mounting on to a DIN rail Clearances: Cleaning: APPENDIX Typical Transducer Connection: REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.0 Page 2 of 24

214 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide The Plant Backup Controller From Resource Data Management This documentation refers to the Plant Backup Controller Description The Plant Backup controller is intended as a backup system for the primary pack/condenser controller. The controller has a built in display which allows for setup of the unit as well as interrogating the controller. There are 12 relay outputs used to operate compressors, loaders, condenser fans or act as a standby relay used to place the primary pack/condenser controller into standby. Relays can also be assigned as Inverter enable relays to activate a variable speed device. There are two analogue Inputs for pressure transducers which can be set as either 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA. There are 2 analogue outputs used to control variable speed devices and either output can be set to 4-20mA or 0-10Vdc. There are 2 digital inputs which are used to return control to the primary pack/condenser controller if the backup controller is enabled. There are a number of software configuration options which can be selected during setup of the controller and they are shown in the Configuration section below. All relays are volt-free and can be mixed between low and high voltage sources. The controller requires a 24Vac supply or 24Vdc PSU (Available from RDM: - PR0625) Configuration The controller has seven configuration options: - Types Display value Type 1 LT Pack 2 HT Pack 3 HT/LT Pack 4 Condenser 5 Dual Condenser 6 LT Pack/Condenser 7 HT Pack/Condenser The controller is delivered pre-configured as an LT Pack Controller (Type 1) See Set-up to change the controller type. Revision 1.0 Page 3 of 24

215 UNIVERSAL IN PUTS/OUTPUTS Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed 24 V + 24 V Ground Earth (Optional) Universal IO 1 Universal IO 2 Universal IO 3 Universal IO 4 Status Input 1 Status Input 2 Universal IO Status Inputs Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Backup Controller I/O Connections Plant Backup Controller Universal Inputs/Outputs Status Inputs CLASS II RELAY RATINGS: 5A/250 Vac/AC1 RLY1 RLY2 RLY3 RLY4 RLY5 RLY6 RLY7 RLY8 RLY9 RLY10 RLY 11 RLY 12 SUPPLY INPUT 24V AC or DC 24 0 E V V Universal Inputs/Outputs Revision 1.0 Page 4 of 24

216 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Input/s & Outputs All Types Description Comments Status Input 1 0V return or 24 Vac Section 1 Reset Note 1 Status Input 2 0V return or 24 Vac Section 2 Reset Note 1 Universal Input/Output mA or 0-10Vdc Section 1 Suction / Discharge Transducer Universal Input/Output mA or 0-10Vdc Section 2 Suction / Discharge Transducer Universal Input/Output mA or 0-10Vdc Section 1 Inverter Output Universal Input/Output mA or 0-10Vdc Section 2 Inverter Output Relay 1 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 2 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 3 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 4 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 5 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 6 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 7 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 8 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 9 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 10 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 11 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Relay 12 N/O, N/C and Common Comp or Fan or Inverter Enable or Standby Relay : Note 2 Note 1: The Plant Backup controller will remain inactive should the corresponding reset input be present or the relevant pressure transducer is faulty. 24 Vac must have the same 24 Vac return as the supply voltage. If using the Plant controller 24V power supply only the 24Vac signal from the supply is required for the digital input. Note 2 : All relay outputs for compressors, fans, inverter enable and standby are wired to the normally open contacts. Revision 1.0 Page 5 of 24

217 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Setting up the controller Set-up access to the controller can be achieved through the front mounted buttons on the display Enter Up Unused Down The 4 character display shows the current pressure, suction for pack and discharge for condensers. Enter Button: - Up Button: - Down Button: - Used to confirm settings or enter software menus. Used to scroll up through menu options Used to scroll down through menu options Display Operation If the Type selected has 2 sections then the display alternates between section 1 pressure and section 2 pressure. The bar on the left hand side of the display indicates which section is currently being displayed. When section 1 pressure is displayed the bar is at the top. When section 2 pressure is displayed the bar is at the bottom of the display. Section 1 Pressure Section 2 Pressure Revision 1.0 Page 6 of 24

218 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Set-up Mode To enter set-up mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list Set-up Function Menu Display Option Menu Item seen in type: Explained in Paragraph IO View Input/Output States All types View Input/Output States PArA Set/view Parameters All types Set/view Parameters type Set/View Controller Type All types Set/view Configuration Type SoFt View software version All types ESC Exit set-up mode Recommended set-up method type. Set/view controller type 1. From the function menu scroll to "type", press enter 2. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through the type values. (See configuration on page 3) 3. Press enter. The controller will reset with the selected type now programmed. PArA. Set/view parameters 1. From the function menu scroll to PArA 2. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit the parameter setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current controller type. Revision 1.0 Page 7 of 24

219 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter Tables Parameter table for LT Pack Controller (Type 1) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-02 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-05 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-06 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-09 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-10 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-30 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Transducer Span * -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-61 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-62 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 8 of 24

220 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for HT Pack Controller (Type 2) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 3.4 P-02 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-05 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-06 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-09 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 5.0 P-10 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-30 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-61 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-62 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 9 of 24

221 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for HT/LT Pack Controller (Type 3) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 3.4 P-02 Section 1 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-05 Section 1 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-06 Section 1 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-09 Section 1 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 5.0 P-10 Section 1 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-03 Section 2 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-04 Section 2 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-07 Section 2 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-08 Section 2 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-11 Section 2 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-12 Section 2 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-30 Section 1 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Section 1 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-32 Section 2 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-33 Section 2 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Section 1 Number of Relays 2 to P-41 Section 2 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Section 1 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-51 Section 2 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Section 1 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-61 Section 1 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-62 Section 1 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-63 Section 2 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-64 Section 2 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-65 Section 2 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Section 1 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1= On 1-0 P-71 Section 1 Inverter response 0 to P-72 Section 2 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-73 Section 2 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Section 1 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-81 Section 2 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Section 1 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-83 Section 2 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 10 of 24

222 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-20 Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 12 P-21 Discharge Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-24 High Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 19.5 P-30 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 30.0 P-61 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-62 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 11 of 24

223 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for Dual Condenser Controller (Type 5) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-20 Section 1 Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 12 P-21 Section 1 Discharge Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-24 Section 1 High Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 19.5 P-22 Section 2 Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 12 P-23 Section 2 Discharge Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-25 Section 2 High Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 19.5 P-30 Section 1 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Section 1 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-32 Section 2 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-33 Section 2 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Section 1 Number of Relays 2 to P-41 Section 2 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Section 1 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-51 Section 2 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Section 1 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 30.0 P-61 Section 1 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-62 Section 1 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-63 Section 2 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 30.0 P-64 Section 2 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-65 Section 2 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Section 1 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Section 1 Inverter response 0 to P-72 Section 2 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-73 Section 2 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Section 1 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-81 Section 2 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Section 1 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-83 Section 2 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 12 of 24

224 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for LT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 6) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 3.4 P-02 Section 1 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-05 Section 1 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-06 Section 1 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-09 Section 1 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 5.0 P-10 Section 1 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-22 Section 2 Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 12 P-23 Section 2 Discharge Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-25 Section 2 High Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 19.5 P-30 Section 1 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Section 1 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-32 Section 2 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-33 Section 2 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Section 1 Number of Relays 2 to P-41 Section 2 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Section 1 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off 1 = On 1-0 P-51 Section 2 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Section 1 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-61 Section 1 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-62 Section 1 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-63 Section 2 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 30.0 P-64 Section 2 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-65 Section 2 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Section 1 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Section 1 Inverter response 0 to P-72 Section 2 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-73 Section 2 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Section 1 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-81 Section 2 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Section 1 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-83 Section 2 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 dflt ESc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 13 of 24

225 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter table for HT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 7) Number Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Section 1 Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 3.4 P-02 Section 1 Suction Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.7 P-05 Section 1 Low Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 2.0 P-06 Section 1 Low Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-09 Section 1 High Suction Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 5.0 P-10 Section 1 High Suction Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-22 Section 2 Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 12.0 P-23 Section 2 Discharge Diff -3.4 to Bar 0.2 P-25 Section 2 High Discharge Setpoint -3.4 to Bar 19.5 P-30 Section 1 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-31 Section 1 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-32 Section 2 On Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-33 Section 2 Off Delay 00:00 to 60:00 00:01 mm:ss 01:00 P-40 Section 1 Number of Relays 2 to P-41 Section 2 Number of Relays 2 to P-50 Section 1 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-51 Section 2 Control Test. See Test 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-60 Section 1 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 9.0 P-61 Section 1 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar -1.0 P-62 Section 1 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-63 Section 2 Transducer Span -3.4 to Bar 30.0 P-64 Section 2 Transducer Offset -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-65 Section 2 Transducer Calibration -3.4 to Bar 0.0 P-70 Section 1 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-71 Section 1 Inverter response 0 to P-72 Section 2 Inverter Output Enable 0 = Off. 1 = On 1-0 P-73 Section 2 Inverter response 0 to P-80 Section 1 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-81 Section 2 Transducer Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-82 Section 1 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 P-83 Section 2 Inverter Output Type 0 = 4-20mA. 1 = 0-10V 1-0 DFLt Esc * Transducer Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Transducer Span is the full range of the transducer. Transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 13 bar Offset would be -1 bar Transducer Calibration is used to calibrate the Controllers pressure reading to that of calibrated gauges. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Revision 1.0 Page 14 of 24

226 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Parameter Description: Number Parameter Description P-01 Section 1 Suction Setpoint Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P-02 Section 1 Suction Diff Set point below the target. P-03 Section 2 Suction Setpoint Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P-04 Section 2 Suction Diff Set point below the target. P-05 Section 1 Low Suction Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (After delay expires) P-06 Section 1 Low Suction Delay Delay before backup controller takes over after parameter P-05 pressure has been reached. P-07 Section 2 Low Suction Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (After delay expires) P-08 Section 2 Low Suction Delay Delay before backup controller takes over after parameter P-07 pressure has been reached. P-09 Section 1 High Suction Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (After delay expires) P-10 Section 1 High Suction Delay Delay before backup controller takes over after parameter P-09 pressure has been reached P-11 Section 2 High Suction Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (After delay expires) P-12 Section 2 High Suction Delay Delay before backup controller takes over after parameter P-11 pressure has been reached P-20 Section 1 Discharge Setpoint Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P-21 Section 1 Discharge Diff Set point below the target. P-22 Section 2 Discharge Setpoint Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P-23 Section 2 Discharge Diff Set point below the target. P-24 Section 1 High Discharge Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (No delay) P-25 Section 2 High Discharge Setpoint Pressure at which the backup controller becomes active and places the primary controller into standby (No delay) P-30 Section 1 On Delay Delay between stages turning On P-31 Section 1 Off Delay Delay between stages turning Off P-32 Section 2 On Delay Delay between stages turning On P-33 Section 2 Off Delay Delay between stages turning Off P-40 Section 1 Number of Relays Number of stages in the system. See Relays Assignment P-41 Section 2 Number of Relays Number of stages in the system. See Relays Assignment P-50 Section 1 Control Test See Test P-51 Section 2 Control Test See Test P-60 Section 1 Transducer Span Range of the transducer P-61 Section 1 Transducer Offset Transducer value below zero P-62 Section 1 Transducer Calibration Used to calibrate the controllers pressure to that of calibrated gauges P-63 Section 2 Transducer Span Range of the transducer P-64 Section 2 Transducer Offset Transducer value below zero P-65 Section 2 Transducer Calibration Used to calibrate the controllers pressure to that of calibrated gauges P-70 Section 1 Inverter Output Enable Enables the inverter analogue output P-71 Section 1 Inverter response Speed up/slow down stage On/Off speed P-72 Section 2 Inverter Output Enable Enables the inverter analogue output P-73 Section 2 Inverter response Speed up/slow down stage On/Off speed P-80 Section 1 Transducer Type Selects Transducer type 4-20mA or 0-10V P-81 Section 2 Transducer Type Selects Transducer type 4-20mA or 0-10V P-82 Section 1 Inverter Output Type Selects Inverter output type 4-20mA or 0-10V P-83 Section 2 Inverter Output Type Selects Inverter output type 4-20mA or 0-10V Revision 1.0 Page 15 of 24

227 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Relay Assignment The number of relays used by each section is defined by the parameter Number of relays (P-40/41). This number includes the inverter enable relay, if used, the total number of compressor/fan stages required and the standby relay. Inverter Output Relay If the parameter Section 1 Inverter Output Enable or Section 2 Inverter Output Enable is set to on then the first relay for each section will become the Inverter output enable relay. This relay is energised whenever the analogue Inverter output is active. Standby Relay The standby relay is always the last relay in the total number of relays configured. For example, if the controller is configured as an HT/LT pack with a inverter output and P-40 is set to 4 then in Section 1 the first relay will be the inverter enable relay. Relays 2 and 3 would be assigned as compressor relays and the 4 th relay would be the standby relay. Section 2 stages would start on relay 5. The Standby relay is energised when the High Suction Setpoint or Low Suction Setpoint or Discharge Setpoint is reached and the relevant delay has expired. The Standby relay is de-energised when control is returned to the primary pack/condenser controller. Operation Control Enabled If the controller is set to a two section variant then section 1 and 2 can be enabled independently of each other and are active when the following conditions are met. For a Pack section the input pressure is compared with the high limit and low limit parameters (P-05/07/09/11) together with the corresponding delay parameter (P-06/08/10/12). If the pressure is out with the high limit or low limit and the delay period has expired then the Plant Backup controller will enable the standby relay, placing the primary controller into standby and take control. When the primary pack controller is in standby and the pressure rises above the suction setpoint the first relay will turn on once the section on delay parameter expires (P-30/32). If the pressure remains above the suction setpoint and the section on delay expires for a second time then relay 2 will be turned on. As the pressure falls below the suction setpoint, including any diff, then the backup controller will begin to stage down, this results in relay 2 turning off after the parameter section off delay expires. If the pressure remains below the setpoint, including any diff and the section off delay expires then relay 1 will be turned off. For a condenser section there is only a high limit with no delay. When the high limit is exceeded the controller takes control as above. If the Inverter output is in use for a section then the Inverter output enable relay is energised and the analogue output is ramped up from 0 to 100% as soon as the pressure rises above the setpoint. Once the Inverter output reaches 100% then the section on delay timer will be initiated. Once the timer expires relay 2 is energised and the Inverter output resets to 0% where it then begins to ramp up to 100%. Once at 100% the section on delay timer is initiated again and once it expires relay 3 is energised and so forth. Once the pressure drops below setpoint, including any diff, the Inverter output begins to ramp down to 0%. Once at 0% the section off delay timer is initiated and when it expires relay 3 is turned off. The Inverter output then begins to ramp down from 100% and the process continues. The speed at which the Inverter output ramps up or down is governed by parameters P-71 and P-73. Revision 1.0 Page 16 of 24

228 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Control Disabled The plant backup controller is disabled and control returned to the primary controller when one of the following two conditions are met. Or i) The appropriate digital input Section 1 Reset or Section 2 Reset is activated and the pressure is within the predefined limits. ii) The Plant Backup test feature has been enabled and the relevant conditions satisfied. Please see Test section for further details. Test When the Plant Backup controller is enabled and the primary pack/condenser controller is in standby the Plant Backup controller can be configured to test the primary controller after one hour. If this test is successful then the Plant Backup controller would bring the primary controller out of standby and return control to the primary controller. Setting the Test Control parameter (P-50/51) to On will enable this feature. The Plant Backup controller will bring the primary pack/condenser controller out of standby and return control after 1 hour. At this point the Plant Backup controller will start checking for standby conditions. The test operation can be utilised again should the primary controller run normally for 12 hours after leaving standby. If standby conditions are encountered within 12 hours the Plant Backup controller will place the primary controller into standby and retake control. The test operation will not be repeated and the only way to return control to the primary controller is when the appropriate Section 1 Reset or Section 2 Reset is activated and the pressure is within the predefined limits. The test operation can be utilised again should once the reset input has been activated. Revision 1.0 Page 17 of 24

229 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Viewing Inputs and Outputs The controller display can be used to view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. From the function menu, select IO, press enter 2. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Input/Output Tables Input/Output table for LT Pack Controller (Type 1) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - Input/Output table for HT Pack Controller (Type 2) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - Input/Output table for HT / LT Pack Controller (Type 3) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - I-11 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % O-21 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - S-02 Control state 0 = Normal - Revision 1.0 Page 18 of 24

230 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Input/Output table for Condenser Controller (Type 4) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - Input/Output table for Dual Condenser Controller (Type 5) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - I-11 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % O-21 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - S-02 Control state 0 = Normal - Input/Output table for LT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 6) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - I-11 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % O-21 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - S-02 Control state 0 = Normal - Revision 1.0 Page 19 of 24

231 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Input/Output table for HT Pack/Condenser Controller (Type 7) Number IO Range Units I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I mA or 0-10V -3.4 to 50.0 Bar I-10 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - I-11 Reset input 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On - O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Variable output 0 to 100 % O-21 Variable output 0 to 100 % S-01 Control state 0 = Normal - S-02 Control state 0 = Normal - Revision 1.0 Page 20 of 24

232 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: 24 Vac ±10% or 24 Vdc ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz ±10% Maximum supply current: <1 Amp Typical supply current: <1.0 Amp Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required. A functional earth can be connected if the equipment is located in an electrically noisy environment. General The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: 270mm (L) x 145mm (W) x 55mm (H) Weight: 700 Grams Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Inputs: Digital Input type The preferred option is a 0 volt return through a volt free relay. Or 24 Vac referenced to the supply voltage. If a 24Vac signal is being sourced from the Plant controller power supply then do not ground the Digital Input common rail, this is grounded internally. 4-20mA 4-20mA current loop, use the 12 Vdc output to feed the device. Analogue Outputs 0 to 10 Volts dc, or 4-20mA, Selected in the Parameters. Note: the 4-20mA output will not operate correctly if the target device input impedance is > 75Ω The 0-10V output will not operate correctly if the target device input impedance is < 10KΩ A 50mA fuse is recommended for this output. Relay Ratings All Relays 5A/250 Vac/AC1 (Resistive load) 5A/30 Vdc (Resistive) 2A/250 Vac cosφ=0.3 on N/O contact (Inductive Load) Revision 1.0 Page 21 of 24

233 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Installation: Mounting on to a DIN rail Clearances: The controller must have 10mm clearance above the top and 15mm clearance from the sides. Clearance at the front and rear is dependent on the site wiring. There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Cleaning: Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with a slightly damped lint free cloth. Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this set up guide may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 1.0 Page 22 of 24

234 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Appendix 1 Typical Transducer Connection: For 4-20mA type transducers the diagram below shows the connections to the Plant Controller: Vdc 4-20mA I/P Note: The Earth connection is not necessary unless in an electrically noisy environment. Revision 1.0 Page 23 of 24

235 Plant Backup Controller Installation Guide Revision Date Changes /01/2010 Full release. Revision History Revision 1.0 Page 24 of 24

236 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide RDM Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide For Product: - PR0615 Revision 1.1a Page 1 of 24

237 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Table of Contents: THE PLANT CONTROLLER TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY... 3 Overview... 3 Physical Attributes... 3 Setting up the Display... 4 Connection to a Plant Controller... 4 USB Cable... 4 Interacting With the Touchscreen... 4 Typical Default Display Configuration... 5 Home Page... 5 Custom Page... 5 Home Page... 5 Inputs... 5 Outputs... 6 State... 6 Params (Parameters)... 6 Alarms... 8 Setup... 8 Home... 8 Logout... 8 Configuring a Custom Page... 9 Creating a Value Icon Creating a Bar Graph Icon Creating a Gauge Icon Creating an Override Icon Creating a Slide Icon Deleting an Icon from the Custom Display Viewing a Custom Display Alarm Handling Accepting Alarms Disabling Alarms System Screen Off Time Changing the Time and Date Calibrating the Display Mounting Instructions Fitting the Display to the Mounting Bracket Specification REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.1a Page 2 of 24

238 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide The Plant Controller Touchscreen Display From Resource Data Management Overview The RDM Plant Controller Touchscreen display is designed for use with the Mercury Plant Controller range and provides an intuitive user interface. The touchscreen display has a viewable area of 11cm, is full colour and has touch sensitive technology allowing user interaction. The display enables the user to view a Plant controller s current Input, Output, State, Parameter and Alarm conditions. It also allows the user to edit parameter settings and acknowledge alarms. The display has a user configurable Custom page which allows key values to be highlighted. The data from the Custom page is provided in a number of formats such as a bar graph, a semi-circular gauge or as text. From the Custom page overrides can also been initiated and setpoints adjusted using the Slide icon. The display has a built in alarm sounder and dual colour LED Status indicator. The display utilises the password protection built into a Plant controller to prevent unauthorised changing of parameters and other key features. The slim-line characteristics of the display allow the unit to be surface mounted and the enclosure is supplied with a multi function mounting bracket which provides a number of fixing solutions, one of which is a standard UK pattress box. The display is powered from the host Plant controller therefore no external power supply is required. Compatibility The display currently operates with the following software configurations:- PR0600-TDB - Plant controller running TDB application software V1.16 and above. Physical Attributes Status Indicator USB Connection During normal operating conditions the indicator is Blue. When an alarm is directed to the display the indicator flashes Red. Once the alarm is acknowledged the red status indicator remains permanently on until the alarm clears. See USB Cable section for further details. Revision 1.1a Page 3 of 24

239 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Setting up the Display Connection to a Plant Controller Touchscreen Display The touchscreen display is connected to either of the USB A-type Host sockets (1&2) on the Plant controller. With the Plant controller powered and running connect the display. The following message will be shown on the display Waiting for connect after a short delay this will be replaced with Uploading screens a few moments later the display will refresh and the start up sequence is complete. At this point the display will show either the Home page or Custom page depending on the displays configuration. Note the display can also be connected before powering the Plant controller. USB Cable The Plant Touchscreen display is supplied with a 5M USB cable fitted and a secondary 1M USB cable in the box. This provides the end user with the flexibility to select the cable length which best meets their application requirements. Both cables have a USB A-type connector at one end, which connects to the Plant Controller and a USB Micro B-type connector at the other which connects to the display. The touchscreen display derives its power from the Plant Controller and does not require an external power supply. The maximum cable length is 5M when using a standard USB cable. Interacting With the Touchscreen The touchscreen display has no physical buttons or switches, all user interaction is carried out by pressing areas on the touchscreen display such as virtual buttons or slides. The touchscreen should be operated using your finger and care should be taken not to exert too much pressure on the display as it could lead to damage. Objects such as pen nibs or screwdriver tips must not be used as this will damage the screen. Each press of the display is accompanied by a click from the sounder. On some pages where lines of text are shown, such as the parameter list, you can scroll down the page by running your finger from the bottom to the top of the list in the same manner as you would use a touchscreen equipped mobile telephone. During this motion your finger should remain in contact with the touch screen. Revision 1.1a Page 4 of 24

240 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Typical Default Display Configuration Home Page When the display is first connected to a Plant controller and a Custom page has not been defined then the Home page will be displayed with the various menu options. By default the list of Inputs will be displayed in the main area. Tap the desired menu option to navigate to that screen. Custom Page When the display has a Custom page configured then this will be displayed by default when the display is first powered on or is awoken from power saving mode. Note after 3 minutes of inactivity the display will return to the Custom page. Touch the blue bar at the top of the display to toggle between the Custom page and Home page. Home Page Inputs From the Home page, touch the "Inputs" tab, a list of current inputs will be shown. If there are more than 10 inputs then you can scroll down the page by running your finger from the bottom to the top of the list, during this motion your finger should remain in contact with the touch screen. This is accomplished in the same manner you would use a touchscreen equipped mobile telephone. Revision 1.1a Page 5 of 24

241 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Outputs From the home screen, touch the Outputs tab, a list of current outputs will be shown. Again, you can scroll down the page in the usual manner. State From the home page press the State tab, the controller s current control state, such as Normal, Alarm or Defrost, will be displayed Params (Parameters) From the home page touch the Params tab, the controller s settable parameters will be displayed. Revision 1.1a Page 6 of 24

242 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Changing a Parameter In the Params page touch the parameter you wish to change. The parameter will become highlighted, in this example the Suction Target has been selected. Now touch the Edit tab. At this point the display will prompt the user for login credentials. Type in a valid pin code and press the Enter tab. Note: the pin code is set in the Mercury Plant Controller the display is connected to and cannot be altered using the Touchscreen Display. The PIN is to prevent unauthorized changing of parameters. Using the keypad, touch the DEL tab to delete the current value, then key in the value you wish to use and touch the Set tab. The display will configure the parameter and return to the Parameters page. If the Set button is pressed without changing the previous parameter or a value which is out of range is entered then a message Value set failed. will be displayed. Revision 1.1a Page 7 of 24

243 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Alarms From the home page select Alarms. A list of all alarms the Plant controller can generate, together with their current condition, will be displayed. Setup From the home page select Setup. A page similar to the one on the left will be shown. The name, description, ID and software version of the host plant controller will be shown as well as the display software version. Home Tapping home returns the user to the Home page. Logout When entering into the Custom, Alarm or System pages or when changing a parameter, the user is asked to login. Once logged in the Logout button can be used to log the current user out and prevent any unauthorised user from accessing the Custom, Alarm and System pages. If the Logout button is not pressed, any user will automatically be logged out after a predetermined time of inactivity on the display. Revision 1.1a Page 8 of 24

244 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Configuring a Custom Page The Custom option allows the user to produce a customised screen comprising of up to four icons, each icon using one quarter of the display area. This customised screen will become the default screen when the display is connected to a Plant controller. Note the Custom page configuration is stored in the display and not the Plant controller to which it is connected. There are five different types of icons which can be configured although only a maximum of four will be displayed at any one time, these types are as follows: Value This will display a current value in text or numerical form such as a temperature, a relay status or an operating parameter. Bar This will display an analogue value, such as temperature or pressure, in the form of a vertical bar graph. Gauge This will display an analogue value, such as temperature or pressure, in the form of a semicircular gauge or dial. Override This will display a button which can be touched to override a particular function in the Plant controller, for example to manually force a relay on or off. Slide This will display a vertical slider which allows the user to increase or decrease a particular set point or value within the plant controller. Revision 1.1a Page 9 of 24

245 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Creating a Value Icon From the setup menu, select Custom, you will be asked to login. Once logged in the blank screen on the left will be shown. This screen will only be blank if a custom screen has not been set up previously. Touch the Value tab and drag it towards the blank area to the right. Removing your finger from the screen will cause a Value box to be fixed into one of four positions. In the example, the box is in the top left position. The box can be dragged into any of the other three positions as long as they are empty. The position of the box relates to the position in the custom screen where the value will be displayed. Touching the Value box will now bring up the screen on the left which allows the user to select which value to display. The Current box will be blank initially until a value is selected. Selecting Change will show the menu on the left which allows the type of value to be displayed, to be selected. Revision 1.1a Page 10 of 24

246 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Selecting the Input option will show a list of all available inputs, as shown in the example. Touching one of the items will highlight it for selection, now touch the Select tab to confirm. The selected item will now be shown in the Current box. At this point select the Back tab, the screen on the left will be shown. Select Yes to save the current value or No to return to the custom menu without saving. Touching the blue bar at the top of the screen will now show the custom screen which has been created. The parameter s name and its current value will be displayed in the appropriate part of the display. Revision 1.1a Page 11 of 24

247 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Creating a Bar Graph Icon From the custom menu, touch the Bar tab and drag across to an unused area. Removing your finger from the touchscreen will place a Bar box in one quarter of the screen. As shown on the left, the Bar box uses the entire height of the available area but only one quarter of the width. The Value box on the other hand, uses one half of the width and half of the height. For this reason, a Bar box cannot be placed underneath a Value box for example. Touching the recently placed Bar box brings up the menu on the left. Selecting Change next to the Current field allows you to select the item you want to display as a bar graph. Selecting Input will show all the available input values, selecting Output will show all the available output values. In this example, Input has been selected and Plant Room Temp. highlighted. Touching the Select tab will confirm this value to be used. Revision 1.1a Page 12 of 24

248 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide The menu now shows the name of the selected value to be used in the Current field. The bar graph can now be scaled to match the maximum and minimum limits of the value to be displayed. Selecting Change next to the Min: field allows the lower limit value of the bar to be selected. There is also an option to select which colours are to be displayed on the bar. Selecting Bg Colour, Lo Colour or Hi Colour will display a colour palette as shown on the left. Touch the colour you wish to use for that particular part of the Bar. Now configure the minimum value, this should be below the lowest value you would ever expect to display on the bar graph and is dependent on the application. For example, under normal operating conditions you would never expect a plant room temperature to go below -5 degrees centigrade so you could choose this as your minimum value. The maximum value can be set in the same way. This would be the highest value you would ever expect to display on the bar graph and is dependent on the application. For example, you would never expect a plant room temperature to go above 40 degrees centigrade under normal operating conditions so you could choose this as your maximum value. Revision 1.1a Page 13 of 24

249 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Bg Colour Lo Colour Hi Colour Selects background colour, in this example it is grey. Selects the colour of the bar when the value is below zero, in this example it is yellow. Selects the colour of the bar when the value is above zero, in this example it is red. Creating a Gauge Icon From the custom menu, touch the Gauge tab and drag across to an unused area. Removing your finger from the touchscreen will place a Gauge box in one quarter of the screen. As shown on the left, the Gauge box uses half the height of the available area and half of the width. For this reason a Graph box for example, cannot be placed below a Gauge box. Touching the Gauge box brings up the menu on the left. Selecting Change next to the Current field allows you to select the parameter you want to display as a gauge. Selecting Input will show all the available input values, selecting Output will show all the available output values. Revision 1.1a Page 14 of 24

250 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide In this example, Input has been selected and Suction. highlighted. Touching the Select tab will confirm this value to be used. The menu now shows the name of the selected value to be used in the Current field. The gauge can now be scaled to match the maximum and minimum limits of the value to be displayed. Selecting Change next to the Min: field allows the lower limit value of the gauge to be selected. Similarly, selecting Change next to the Max field allows the upper limit of the gauge to be selected. There is also an option to select a Lo Band value and a Hi Band value, this will create upper and lower regions of the gauge which can be a different colour and could be used to show when a value is entering a high or low condition. In the above example, the Max value is set to 100 and the Hi Band set to 90. The Hi Colour is set as red so this gives a red band between 90 and 100 on the gauge. The Min value is set to -10 and the Lo Band set to 0. The Lo Colour is set as yellow so this gives a yellow band between 0 and -10. The Bg Colour is set as grey so this gives a grey background for the area of the gauge between the High Band and Low Band values. Revision 1.1a Page 15 of 24

251 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Creating an Override Icon From the custom menu, touch the Override tab and drag across to an unused area. Removing your finger from the touchscreen will place a Override box in one quarter of the screen. As shown on the left, the Override box uses half the height of the available area and half the width. For this reason a Graph box for example, cannot be placed below an Override box. Note: An Override icon can only be used with a Plant controller running TDB software with one or more Display Override blocks configured. Please refer to the TDB Plant Controller user document for further details. Touching the Override box will display the screen on the left. The Current field will be blank unless an Override icon has already been setup, in which case the current value will be shown. Touching the Change tab will display a list of all the available Display Override blocks in the Plant TDB controller and their current status. Touch the Display Override block you wish to use. In the example on the left Comp1 Override is currently selected. Touch the Select tab to confirm the choice. Touching the Back tab will display a Save Changes? screen with a Yes or No option. Touching the Home bar at the top of the screen will return to the home page without saving any changes. The Home page will now show the override Icon as shown in the example on the left. Touching the Turn On button will enable the override. In this case Comp1, which is mapped to Relay 1 on the Plant TDB controller, will be turned on. Revision 1.1a Page 16 of 24

252 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Once the previous step is complete the Turn On box will refresh to Turn Off. Touching the Turn Off button will toggle the relay back on again and the Turn Off box will change to Turn On ready for the next override instance. In this example the default descriptions have been used, such as State: On and Turn Off. These descriptions can be altered by the user in the Display Override Block within the TDB program, to provide more relevant descriptions. Please refer to the TDB Plant Controller user document for further details. Creating a Slide Icon From the custom menu, touch the Slide tab and drag across to an unused area. Removing your finger from the touchscreen will place a Slide box in one quarter of the screen. As shown on the left, the Slide box uses the full height of the available area and one quarter of the width. For this reason a Override box for example, cannot be placed below a Slide box. Note: A Slide icon can only be used with a Plant controller running TDB software with one or more Display Slide blocks configured. Please refer to the TDB Plant Controller user document for further details. Touching the Slide box will display the menu on the left. The Current field will be blank unless a slide icon has already been selected. Revision 1.1a Page 17 of 24

253 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Touching the Change tab will display a list of all available slide blocks in the Plant controller. Touching the slide block to be used will highlight it, touching Select will confirm. Touching the Back tab will display a Save Changes? screen with a Yes or No option. Touching the Home bar at the top of the screen will return to the home page without saving any changes. The Current field will now show the selected slide block, in this example Suction Target. There is also an option to select Lo Colour and Hi Colour. The Hi Colour tab selects the colour to be displayed at the top of the slide icon and the Lo Colour selects the colour at the bottom of the slide icon. The two colours will blend into each other giving a gradual change in colour from top to bottom. In the example on the left the Hi Colour is red and the Lo Colour is blue. The values shown on the Slide Icon are determined by the setup of the Slide block in the TDB program running in the associated Plant controller. In the example above the Set Value parameter is set to 14, the Offset Max parameter is set to 16 and the Offset Min parameter is set to 16. This provides a Slide Icon on the touchscreen display with a centre point of 14, a lower limit of -2 and an upper limit of 30. Touching the pointer in the Slide Icon and dragging it up or down will change this setpoint within these defined limits. Note: The Offset Min and Offset Max values should always be a positive numbers (V1.0 software only). Note: If the set point value is changed in the controller using a PC this will override the value currently set on the slide on the touchscreen display. If the set point is changed using the Parameters menu on the touchscreen display, the slide setpoint will not change but the upper and lower limits on the slide will change accordingly allowing the slide to select the new setpoint. Revision 1.1a Page 18 of 24

254 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Deleting an Icon from the Custom Display The example on the left shows a complete custom display setup in the Custom menu, all four display segments are used. To delete an icon, touch the appropriate box and drag it to the delete tab and release. In the example on the left, the Override box has been dragged over to the Delete tab and has now been deleted. Viewing a Custom Display Once the custom display has been set up with the Icons required, touching the blue bar at the top of the display will switch between the Custom and Home pages. The configured Custom page will now be the default page when the plant controller is powered up or the touchscreen display is connected. An example of a completed custom display is shown on the left. Revision 1.1a Page 19 of 24

255 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Alarm Handling Accepting Alarms When an alarm is created by the Plant controller, an alarm message is shown on the touchscreen display. The status indicator on the display will change from static blue to flashing red and the alarm sounder in the display will be activated. The alarm can be accepted by touching the Accept button on the display, this will acknowledge the alarm and silence the sounder. The status indicator will change to static red also. At this point the touchscreen will revert back to the home page. The status indicator will remain red until the alarm has cleared. Disabling Alarms From the Setup menu, select the Alarm tab. This will display a list of all the possible alarms that can be generated. Touching a particular alarm will highlight it as shown on the left. Touching the Toggle tab will change the alarm status from Enable to Disable. If an alarm is set as Disabled then when generated it will not create an alarm message on the touchscreen display i.e. the alarm sounder will not be activated, the status indicator will not flash red and an alarm accept screen will not be shown. The alarm will, however, be shown in the Alarms page. Note the above feature disables the alarm handling function within the display only. Alarm information will still be sent out on the Ethernet interface of the Plant controller i.e. to a Data Manager. System Screen Off Time From the Setup menu, selecting the System tab will show the screen on the left. Selecting the Change tab next to Screen Off (mins): will allow the time to be adjusted. This is the time period in minutes that the touchscreen backlight will stay on after it is last used. This feature significantly extends the life of the display and reduces energy usage. Setting this value to 0 will leave the display backlight permanently on. Note: leaving the display on for extended periods of time may lead to screen burn which is not covered under warranty. Revision 1.1a Page 20 of 24

256 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Changing the Time and Date From the Setup menu, select the System tab. Selecting the Change tab next to Date: allows the date on the plant controller s time clock to be changed. Delete the existing date using the DEL tab and enter the correct date in the format DD/MM/YYYY. Press the Set tab to set the new date. The time of day can be altered in a similar way. The time should be entered in the format HH:MM. It is advisable to power the plant controller off and on after making date or time changes. The time and date settings are retained by the plant controller to which the display is connected. If the display is connected to a different Plant controller, the time and date on the display will reflect the time and date in that Plant controller. Calibrating the Display Display calibration is factory set and should not need to be adjusted under normal operating circumstances. If, however, the area of the display being touched does not match up to the graphic (for example, if the user has to touch slightly above the Home tab before it operates) then the display can be recalibrated. Note: Care should be taken when calibrating the display as incorrect calibration may result in the display becoming unusable. Should this occur please use the Calibrate Screen option found in the Plant TDB controller webpage. From the Setup menu, selecting the System tab followed by the Calibrate tab will show the screen on the left. Select the Continue tab to proceed with the calibration, otherwise select Cancel. A cross will appear on the screen. Touch the cross at its centre, another cross will then appear in a different position. The process will be repeated three times with each cross in a different position. Once the calibration process is complete the touchscreen display will then restart and the calibration process will be complete. Revision 1.1a Page 21 of 24

257 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Mounting Instructions The touchscreen display is supplied with a mounting bracket. The bracket is removed from the display by removing the two screws on the underside of the display and sliding the bracket downwards and then away from the display. The mounting plate can then be fitted to the desired surface using the mounting holes shown below. Two of the mounting holes match the position of the threaded inserts on a standard UK pattress box, providing another mounting option. 30mm 30mm 13/16 13/16 42mm 15/8 42mm 15/8 Pattress Mounting Holes Fitting the Display to the Mounting Bracket The back of the display has two recessed channels to route the cable through, one enables the cable to exit the display at the underside (for routing through conduit for example) and the other allows the cable to exit through the back. The image below shows the cable exiting through the underside. The cable can be unplugged at the display for ease of installation if required. Care should be taken with regards to plug orientation when re-connecting. Display Cable Cable Channel for Rear Cable Exit Bracket Mounting Slots The display should be positioned on the bracket so that the two mounting lugs on the bracket locate in the two slots in the back of the display. The display is then moved down so that the two screw holes at the bottom of the bracket meet up with the two threaded inserts at the bottom of the display. The two mounted screws are then fitted to secure the display onto the bracket. Note In general use the USB Micro B-type connector should never have to be disconnected. If for any reason the cable is removed at the display end care must be taken to ensure it is not pulled in an upward motion. Revision 1.1a Page 22 of 24

258 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Specification Hardware USB 2.0 Power Requirements Powered from host Plant controller, no external power supply required. Display Type 11cm (4.3 ) TFT Colour Resolution (pixels) 480 x 272 Brightness (cd/m²) 340 LED Backlight Contrast Ratio 250:1 Viewing Angle 50º Backlight LED Backlight Lifespan 50,000 hrs Touchscreen Type 4 Wire Analogue Resistive Resolution Continuous Light Transmission Above 80% Lifespan >1 Million Activations Environmental Operating temperature range: Operating Humidity: Storage temperature range: Environmental: +5 º C to +40ºC 80% maximum C to C Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Cat II. Mechanical Size: 136mm (L) x 98mm (H) x 22mm (D) Weight: Display 170g, 345g with cable and mounting bracket EMC: EN 55022/A1: 2007 EN 55024/A2: 2003 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Revision 1.1a Page 23 of 24

259 Plant Controller Touchscreen Display User Guide Mercury 6-5 M/E Installation guide Revision History Revision Date Changes /07/ st Issue /12/2010 Optional Screen Calibration feature introduced, Time & Date feature added (Plant Controller Time/Date settable from the display and viewable on each page). For use with Plant TDB V1.18 application software and above. Revision 1.1a Page 24 of 24

260 Intuitive PR0650-PACK PR0650D-PACK ` Plant PR0600-PACK Intuitive and Plant Pack Controller Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0710, PR0711, PR0720, PR0721 Resource Data Management Ltd 80 Johnstone Avenue, Hillington Industrial Estate, Glasgow, Scotland G52 4NZ UK +44(0) Switchboard support@resourcedm.com Technical Support sales@resourcedm.com Sales Enquiries

261 Intuitive / Plant Controller Table of Contents: THE MERCURY RANGE... 4 Description... 4 Configuration... 4 Types... 4 Front Panel... 5 Remote Display (PR0620)... 5 Integral Display (PR0650D-PACK)... 5 Section 1 Display... 6 Section 2 Display... 6 Front Panel Remote Display Buttons... 6 Front Panel, Integral display (Intuitive Range) Buttons... 6 Mercury Plant Controller I/O Connections... 7 Mercury Plant Controller I/O Connections... 7 Mercury Plant Controller Variable Analogue Input / Output Connections... 7 Intuitive Plant Controller I/O Connections... 8 Intuitive Plant Controller, Universal Analogue Input / Output Connections... 9 Input/s & Outputs... 9 Setting up the controller... 9 Set-up Mode... 9 Set-up through front buttons... 9 Set-up Menu Recommended set-up method Universal IO Input Type Output Type Status Input Type rtc. Real time clock type. Set/view controller type Broadcast Set/View Probe Types & Units Set/View Offset Network Configuration IP-L IP-r PArA. Set/view parameters Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Controller (Types 1-5, Fuzzy) Parameter table for Controller (Types 6-10, Staged) Parameter Description: Run-Proof Gas Dump Compressor Loaders Equal Run Times Inverter Bypass Relay Run Hours Relay Starts Setup via a PC Plant Controller home page Change Configuration (PC) Status Inputs External Target Pack Controller Condenser Controller Remote TDB Command Relay Outputs Configuration Section Stages Revision 2.7 Page 2 of 42

262 Intuitive / Plant Controller Alarm Relay Stage Sizes Operation (Fuzzy) Operation (Staged) Other operational features Floating Head Pressure Drop Leg Night Set-back Day Set-back Invert Relays Sticky Fans USB Operation Viewing Inputs and Outputs Input/Output table for Controller Types 1-5 (Fuzzy) Input/Output table for Controller Types 6-10 (Staged) Quickview Override Info Button Standby Mode Probe Offsets Display Messages Network Alarms Specification Power requirements: General Inputs Relay Ratings, Mercury Plant Controller Relay Ratings, Intuitive Plant Controller Fuse Ratings, Intuitive Plant Controller Installation: Mounting on to a DIN rail, Mercury Plant Controller Mounting on to a DIN rail, Intuitive Plant Controller Clearances: Cleaning: APPENDIX 1 TYPICAL TRANSDUCER CONNECTION APPENDIX 2 SUPPLY & STATUS INPUT WIRING REVISION HISTORY Revision 2.7 Page 3 of 42

263 Intuitive / Plant Controller The Intuitive and Mercury Range From Resource Data Management This documentation refers to the controllers Mercury Plant Controller and Intuitive Plant Controller Description These are versatile controllers intended for Pack and/or Condenser control. Both controllers are identical in function with the Intuitive controller having the added benefits of a fused supply & relay outputs, higher relay ratings and the option of an integral display. Both controller variants have 12 relay outputs that are configurable for compressors, loaders, trim compressors or fans. The 12 digital inputs can be assigned for Pack or Condenser section inputs or general alarms. There are three (4-20mA, 0-5Vdc or 0-10Vdc) inputs for pressure transducers; 2 for control purposes and 1 monitoring. The Pressure readings obtained from the three inputs can be broadcast over a Data Manager IP network for use by RDM Mercury Switch (PR0018-PHI). There are 8 temperature probe inputs and 2 analogue outputs (either can be set to 0-10Vdc, 0-5Vdc, 4-20mA or 0-20mA) to control variable speed devices. Both controller types have 10 software type options, see table below The "Fuzzy" based algorithm, will give enhanced control whilst maintaining the starts per hour requirement. The algorithm also reduces the number of input parameters required for control; only a target pressure is needed. The staged type allows the user to fully program the output stages to the desired elements. The Plant controllers have an embedded Ethernet port to allow for connection to a Data Manager system without the need for a communications module. A USB port allows for a direct PC connection. All relays are volt-free and can be mixed between low and high voltage sources. The controllers require a 24Vac or 24Vdc PSU (PSU available from RDM: - PR0625) Intuitive / Plant Controller Descriptions Intuitive Controller with Pack application (No Internal Display) Intuitive Controller with Pack application (Internal Display) Plant Controller with Pack Application Part Number PR0650-PACK PR0650D-PACK PR0600-PACK Configuration The controllers have ten configuration options: - Types Display value Type Control Type 1 Pack Fuzzy 2 Dual Pack Fuzzy 3 Pack/Condenser Fuzzy 4 Dual Condenser Fuzzy 5 Condenser Fuzzy 6 Pack Staged 7 Dual Pack Staged 8 Pack/Condenser Staged 9 Dual Condenser Staged 10 Condenser Staged Both controllers are delivered pre-configured as a Pack Controller (Type 1) See Type Change A PC program is available to pre-configure the Pack controller for downloading into the Plant hardware. Contact RDM for further details. See Set-up to change the controller type. Revision 2.7 Page 4 of 42

264 Intuitive / Plant Controller Front Panel Remote Display (PR0620) The remote display PR0620 will operate with either the Plant or Intutive Controller. Note the Plant controller doesn t have an internal display option, only the remote display can be used. Section 1 Display Section 2 Display FLT1 System Alarms FLT2 Status Alarms Enter Button Up Button Down Button Quick view Button Override Button Info Button Integral Display (PR0650D-PACK) Section 1 Display Section 2 Display Relay Status Enter Button Override Button Up Button Down Button Info Button Quick View Button Status LED Revision 2.7 Page 5 of 42

265 Intuitive / Plant Controller Section 1 Display 4 character display, shows the pressure (suction for pack, discharge for condensers) In set-up mode, displays the set-up menu items In quick view mode, indicates the target pressure In Override mode, indicates and allows the relays to be forced on Section 2 Display 4 character display, shows the pressure (suction for pack, discharge for condensers) In set-up mode, display is blank In Override mode, display is blank Front Panel Remote Display Buttons Enter Button: - Up Button: - Down Button: - Quick View Button: - Override Button: - Info Button: - Used along with down button to enter menu items. Used to scroll up. Used to scroll down. Used to view the target pressure (See Quickview section). Used with the "Enter" button, to go into the override mode. (See Override section). Used to view the current analogue outputs values. (See Info section). Front Panel, Integral display (Intuitive Range) Buttons Enter Button: - Override Button A : - Up Button: - Down Button: - Info Button B : - Quick View Button Hash : - Used along with down button to enter menu items. Used with the "Enter" button, to go into the override mode. (See Override section). Used to scroll up. Used to scroll down. Used to view the current analogue outputs. (See info section). Used to view the target pressures (See Quickview section). Revision 2.7 Page 6 of 42

266 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed Normally Open Common Normally Closed 24V + 24V Ground Earth (Optional) Modem Ethernet 10/100 Base T Status LED CAN High Screen CAN Low Ground 5V Data In Ground Clock Data Out 5V USB Device USB Host 1&2 Analogue Input 1 Analogue Input 2 Analogue Input 3 Analogue Input 4 Analogue Input 5 Analogue Input 6 Analogue Input 7 Analogue Input 8 CAN Bus Display 4-20mA / 0-10 / 5V Output mA / 0-10 / 5V Output mA / 0-10 / 5V Input mA / 0-10 / 5V Input mA / 0-10 / 5V Input 3 Status Input 1 Status Input 2 Status Input 3 Status Input 4 Status Input 5 Status Input 6 Status Input 7 Status Input 8 Status Input 9 Status Input 10 Status Input 11 Status Input 12 Analogue Inputs Status Inputs Intuitive / Plant Controller Mercury Plant Controller I/O Connections Mercury Plant Controller Variable Analogue Input / Output Connections Outputs Upper Tier 0-10V / 5V dc Output or 4-20mA Output Lower Tier Ground Inputs Upper Tier 0-10V / 5V Ground or 4-20mA Loop Input Lower Tier 0-10V / 5V Input or +12V Feed for 4-20mA Loop Revision 2.7 Page 7 of 42

267 Ground Status Input 1 Ground Status Input 2 Ground Status Input 3 Ground Status Input 4 Ground Status Input 5 Ground Status Input 6 Ground Status Input 7 Ground Status Input 8 Ground Status Input 9 Ground Status Input 10 Ground Status Input 11 Ground Status Input 12 Universal Input / Output 1 Universal Input / Output 2 Universal Input / Output 3 Universal Input / Output 4 Universal Input / Output 5 Universal Input / Output 6 Universal Input / Output 7 Universal Input / Output 8 Ground Temperature Probe Input 1 Ground Temperature Probe Input 2 Ground Temperature Probe Input 3 Ground Temperature Probe Input 4 Ground Temperature Probe Input 5 Ground Temperature Probe Input 6 Ground Temperature Probe Input 7 Ground Temperature Probe Input 8 Ethernet 10/100 Base T USB Host 1&2 CAN High Screen CAN Low Ground 5V Data In Ground Clock Data Out 5V CAN Bus Display Relay 7 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 8 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 9 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 10 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 11 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 12 Normally Closed Normally Open Common Relay 1 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Relay 2 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Relay 3 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Relay 4 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Relay 5 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Relay 6 Common Normally Open Normally Closed Earth (Optional) Ground 24V + Intuitive / Plant Controller Intuitive Plant Controller I/O Connections Fuse Holder Bottom Row Connections Top Row Connections Revision 2.7 Page 8 of 42

268 Intuitive / Plant Controller Intuitive Plant Controller, Universal Analogue Input / Output Connections 0 or 4-20mA Input U1-U3 U1-U3 U4-U5 U4-U5 U6-U8 0 or 4-20mA Loop Input or 0-10V / 5V Ground 12v Transducer Feed or 0-10V / 5V Input Ground 0 or 4-20mA Output or 0-10V / 5V Output Unused (May be used for future development) Input/s & Outputs All Types Description Comments Digital Inputs V return or 24 Vac Note 1 Analogue Inputs 1-8 Probe input Note 2 Analogue Inputs 1-3 Analogue input 4-20mA or 0-10V / 5V Input See note 3 Analogue Outputs 4-5 Analogue output 4-20mA or 0-10V / 5V Output Relay 1-12 N/O, N/C and Common Volt Free Status LED Healthy LED When powered up the LED will flash off/on every 0.5 seconds. Note 3 Note 1: 24 Vac must have the same 24 Vac return as the supply voltage. If using the Plant controller 24V power supply only the 24Vac signal from the supply is required for the digital input. Note 2: Several probe types are available, see Probe Type Note 3: The Status LED is not present on older variants of the Mercury Plant controller hardware. If the status LED is present and the Plant controller software is V1.7 or greater then Analogue inputs 1 to 3 are configurable either as a 4-20mA input or a 0-10V / 5Vdc input. If the above criteria is not met then Analogue inputs 1 to 3 are configurable as 4-20mA inputs only. On the Intuitive Plant controller the analogue inputs and outputs are universal and can be configured for 0-10V / 5Vdc or 4-20mA Setting up the controller Set-up access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons on the remote display Direct access by PC via a USB connection Direct access by a PC via an Ethernet Connection Through the RDM Data Manager. Set-up Mode Set-up through front buttons To enter set-up mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Alternatively use either a PC connection for configurations or load a configuration from a memory-stick Revision 2.7 Page 9 of 42

269 Intuitive / Plant Controller Set-up Menu Recommended set-up method LH Display RH Display Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Input/Output States View Input/Output States PArA Set/view Parameters Set/view parameters Unit Set/View Probe Type & Units Set/View Units Uni Set Universal I/O Universal IO StA Set Status Input Type Set Input Type rly Inverts the relay function Set Relay Output TyPE Set/View Controller Type Set/view product type rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Real Time Clock Clock) net Set/view network configuration Network Configuration bcst Broadcast (Pressures) Broadcast SoFt View software version USb Save/Load onto USB device USB OFSt Temperature probe offsets Set Probe Offsets ESC Exit set-up mode It is recommended that this controller is set-up using a direct connection to a PC See Setup via a PC If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. Universal IO Setting up from controller display, navigate to the screen Uni and select from the following table for U-01 to U-08 This selects what Universal IO (U-01 to U-08) can be set for. NOTE: UniIO U-01 to U-03 can only be set as Inputs, UniIO U-04 and U-05 can only be set for Outputs and UniIO U-06 to U-08 are seen in settings but are not present on the controller hardware and are for future development. U-01 to U-03 (Variable Inputs) can be set to 0, 1 or 2. U-04 and U-05 (Variable Outputs) can be set to 3, 4, 5 or 6. U-06 to U-08 do not do anything mA Input V Input V Input mA Output mA Output V Output V Output NOTE: Universal I/O U-01 to U-03 can only be set as Inputs, Universal I/O U-04 and U-05 can only be set for Outputs and Universal I/O U-06 to U-08 are not used in this application and should not be changed. Input Type The 3 analogue inputs can be set to either of the following mA Input (Default) Vdc Input Vdc Input Output Type The 2 analogue outputs can be set to either of the following: mA Output (Default) mA Output V dc Output V dc Output Revision 2.7 Page 10 of 42

270 Intuitive / Plant Controller Status Input Type Navigate to the screen StA Selects whether the status inputs require a 0V return or 24Vac return See: Note 1 Select 1 for Input type 0V return Select 2 for Input type 24V ac return rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) 1. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc 2. Press enter. The display will show t-1. Press enter again 3. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter 4. Use up button to select t-2, press enter 5. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter 6. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) 7. Repeat for t-4 (Days up to 31) 8. Repeat for t-5 (months up to 12) 9. Repeat for t-6 (Year up to 99) 10. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc type. Set/view controller type Time clock is now set 1. From the function menu scroll to "type", press enter 2. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through the type values. (See configuration on page 4) 3. Press enter. The controller will reset with the selected type now programmed. Type Change NOTE : When changing controller types from one type to another always check the parameters and the controller configuration to ensure they are appropriate for the application selected. Broadcast Allows pressure readings on the variable analogue Inputs to be broadcast over a Data Manager IP network for use with a Mercury Switch and Mercury IP Module. This remote pressure is used by the Mercury Switch and IP Module to calculate the Evaporator temperature. Note: Mercury Plant Controller Software must version 2.4 or higher Note: If broadcasting pressure to a Mercury Switch. Mercury switch must be software version 1.9 or higher. Note: If broadcasting to a Mercury IP Module. IP Module must be software version 1.1 or higher See RDM Mercury Switch User Guide (PR0018-PHI) for further information. 0 = Feature Disabled. 1 = Feature Enabled Set/View Probe Types & Units This operation is only available at the controller display or via a PC connection to the Plant controller. It cannot be set remotely via the Data manager front end system. Probe type changes apply to all probes on a controller and cannot be set individually to different types. This option allows the user to set the probe types and units. Note: If the units are set to O C, pressure will be displayed in Bar, if units are set to O F, pressure will be displayed in PSI. Unit Number Probe Type Units 0 Probes not used O C 1 PT1000 O C 2 PT1000 O F 3 NTC2K O C 4 NTC2K O F 5 NTC470R O C 6 NTC470R O F 7 NTC700R O C 8 NTC700R O F 9 NTC3K O C 10 NTC3K O F Unit Number Probe Type Units 11 NTC2K25 O C 12 NTC2K25 O F 13 NTC100K O C 14 NTC100K O F 15 NTC5K O C 16 NTC5K O F 17 NTC6K O C 18 NTC6K O F 19 NTC10K O C 20 NTC10K O F 21 NTC10K (2) O C 22 NTC10K (2) O F Temperature probe range -60 degrees Celsius to +128 degrees Celsius. Revision 2.7 Page 11 of 42

271 Intuitive / Plant Controller Set/View Offset This feature allows the probe display temperature to be offset by the value selected: Each of the 8 probes has an individual offset, see the table below: - C-01 = Probe 1 etc. Note: This can only be set at the controller display and cannot be set remotely by a Data Manager front-end. Network Configuration OFSt Display Range Step Default C-01 to C-08 ±20 O There are two network connection options IP-L (Rotary switches set to 000 ) IP-r (Rotary switches set to *** where * is a number between 0 and 9) IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r (normally used mode) allows you to give each controller on the system a unique network ID. This ID is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Director) IP-L To configure the Plant Controller for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The unit should then be connected to the network. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. Note: this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier (other than 000). The module should then be connected to the controller and the network via the Ethernet port. The Data Manager will use DHCP to allocate the controller an IP address. From the function menu select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view the address given by the DHCP server IP1: Shows the first IP address value IP2: Shows the second IP address value IP3: Shows the third IP address value IP4: Shows the forth IP address value (10 in the example below) (1 in the example below) (2 in the example below) (86 in the example below) Example: Revision 2.7 Page 12 of 42

272 Pack (Type 1) Dual Pack (Type 2) Pack/Condenser (Type 3) Dual Condenser (Type 4) Condenser (Type 5) Intuitive / Plant Controller PArA. Set/view parameters 1. From the function menu scroll to PArA 2. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P-01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit the parameter set-up mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current controller type. Parameter Tables: Parameter table for Controller (Types 1-5, Fuzzy) Not all parameters apply to all controllers types, for example P-401 is night setback for condenser fans so will not appear on a controller if it is set up as a pack (compressor) controller (type 1). In the right hand columns, a tick will be shown if that parameter applies to that type, if it does not apply it will be greyed out. No. Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Transducer 1 Span * Bar P-02 Transducer 1 Offset Bar P-03 Transducer 2 Span * Bar P-04 Transducer 2 Offset Bar P-05 Transducer 3 Span * Bar P-06 Transducer 3 Offset Bar P-20 Section 1 Target Pressure Bar P-21 Section 1 Target Pressure Above Bar P-20 P-22 Section 1 Target Pressure Below Bar P-20 P-23 Section 1 Starts/Hour P-24 Section 1 Run Smallest ** 0 = Off, 1 = On P-26 Section 1 Inverter 0 = Off, 1 = On P442 Section 1 INV Bypass 0 = Disabled = 1 + no retry 2 = retry 3 = retries 4 = retries 5 = retries P444 Section 1 INV Minimum % P446 Section 1 INV Maximum % P490 Section 1 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On P492 Section 1 Gas Diff Bar P470 Section 1 Always Run last 0 = Off, 1 = On P495 Sect 1 Compressor Unload 0 = Off, 1 = On P497 Sect 1 Equal 0 = Off, 1 = On P-27 Section 1 Response On Speed P-28 Section 1 Response Off Speed P-29 Section 1 Optimise Limit Bar P-30 Section 1 Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 P-31 Section 1 HP Alarm Bar P-32 Section 1 LP Alarm Bar Revision 2.7 Page 13 of 42

273 Intuitive / Plant Controller P-33 Section 1 LP Shut-down Bar P-34 Section 1 Low Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 P448 Section 1 Fail 0 = Off, 1 = On P400 Section 1 Sticky Fans P401 Section 1 Night Set Back 0 = Off, 1 = On = Local, 3 = Remote P402 Section 1 Night Reduction % P403 Section 1 Night Set Back On 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 20:00 20:00 Time P404 Section 1 Night Set Back Off Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 08:00 08:00 P405 Section 1 Night Set Back Bar Pressure Limit P406 Section 1 Day Reduction % P407 Section 1 Day Pressure Limit Bar P408 Section 1 Transducer fail Level % P409 Section 1 Control Type 0 = Fixed, 1 = Floating = Float Drop P410 Section 1 Float Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P411 Section 1 Drop select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P414 Section 1 Pressure at 0 O C/32 O F Bar P415 Section 1 Pressure at 10 O C/50 O F Bar P416 Section 1 Pressure at 20 O C/68 O F Bar P417 Section 1 Pressure at 30 O C/86 O F Bar P418 Section 1 Pressure at Bar O C/104 O F P419 Section 1 Pressure at Bar O C/122 O F P420 Section 1 Low Limit Bar P421 Section 1 High Limit Bar P422 Section 1 Condenser offset O C 6 6 P438 Section 1 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On P430 Section 1 Split Temp o C P432 Section 1 Split Temp Diff o C P434 Sect 1 Split Press Bar P436 Sect 1 Split Press Diff Bar P440 Section 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On, = On Rly. P473 Section 1 Ext Target Bar P-40 Section 2 Target Pressure Bar P474 Section 2 External Target Bar Pressure P-41 Section 2 Target Pressure Above Bar P-40 P-42 Section 2 Target Pressure Below Bar P-40 P-43 Section 2 Starts/Hour P-44 Section 2 Run Smallest ** 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 P-46 Section 2 Inverter 0 = Off, 1 = On P443 Section 2 INV Bypass 0 = Disabled = 1 + no retry 2 = retry 3 = retries 4 = retries 5 = retries P445 Section 2 INV Minimum % P447 Section 2 INV Maximum % P471 Section 2 Always Run last 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 Revision 2.7 Page 14 of 42

274 Intuitive / Plant Controller P496 Sect 2 Compressor Unload 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 P498 Sect 1 Equal 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 P-47 Section 2 Response On Speed P-48 Section 2 Response Off Speed P-49 Section 2 Optimise Limit Bar 2.0 P-50 Section 2 Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 P-51 Section 2 HP Alarm Bar P-52 Section 2 LP Alarm Bar P-53 Section 2 LP Shut-down Bar P-35 Section 2 Low Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 00:00 00:00 00:00 P449 Section 2 Fail 0 = Off, 1 = On P450 Section 2 Sticky Fans P451 Section 2 Night Set Back 0 = Off, 1 = On = Local, 3 = Remote P452 Section 2 Night Reduction % P453 Section 2 Night Set Back On 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 20:00 20:00 Time P454 Section 2 Night Set Back Off Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 08:00 08:00 P455 Sect 2 Night Set Back Pressure Bar Limit P456 Section 2 Day Reduction % P457 Section 2 Day Pressure Limit Bar P458 Section 2 Transducer fail Level % P459 Section 2 Control Type 0 = Fixed, 1 = Floating = Float Drop P460 Section 2 Float Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P412 Section 2 Drop Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P461 Section 2 Pressure at 0 O C/32 O F Bar P462 Section 2 Pressure at 10 O C/50 O F Bar P463 Section 2 Pressure at 20 O C/68 O F Bar P464 Section 2 Pressure at 30 O C/86 O F Bar P465 Section 2 Pressure at Bar O C/104 O F P466 Section 2 Pressure at Bar O C/122 O F P467 Section 2 Low Limit Bar P468 Section 2 High Limit Bar P469 Section 2 Condenser offset O C 6 6 P439 Section 2 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On P431 Section 2 Split Temp O C P433 Section 2 Split Temp Diff O C P435 Sect 2 Split Press Bar P437 Sect 2 Split Press Diff Bar P441 Sect 2 Heat reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On = On Rly P475 Discharge Trip Bar 22.8 P476 Discharge Trip Diff Bar 2.0 P472 Run Proof 0 = Off, 1 = On P-60 Status fault Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-61 General Alarm Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P480 Liquid Level 0 = Off, 1 = On P481 High Liquid Level % P482 Low Liquid Level % P483 Liquid Level Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 P494 Dual Standby See: Standby Mode 0 = Off, 1 = On Revision 2.7 Page 15 of 42

275 Intuitive / Plant Controller P-80 P-91 P100 P111 P120 Status Fault 1 Status Fault 12 Section 1 Stage 1 Section 1 Stage 12 Section 1 Stage 1 Size ((0) Unused (1) Comp N/O (2) Comp N/C (3) Cond N/O (4) Cond N/C (5) Gen N/O (6) Gen N/C (7) Standby 1 N/O (8) Standby 1 N/C (9) Standby 2 N/O (10) Standby 2 N/C (11) Run 1 N/O (12) Run 1 N/C (13) Run 2 N/O (14) Run 2 N/C (15) INV N/O (16) INV N/C (0) None, (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan (5) Inverter (6) Trim (7) Comp Run P131 P140 P151 P160 Section 1 Stage 12 Size Section 2 Stage 1 Section 2 Stage 12 Section 2 Stage 1 Size (0) None, (1) Unused, (2) Compressor, (3) Loader, (4) Fan (5) Inverter (6) Trim (7) Comp Run P171 dflt Section 2 Stage 12 Size Restore Default Settings (Front panel Only) * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if gauge pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) If only transducer input 1 is in use please see Note 10 also. **Run smallest = on: - When all compressors are off (because the target pressure has been satisfied) the controller, when the pressure rises, will always turn on the smallest compressor after the variable output has reached 100%. If the ASC timer is running for the smallest compressor, the controller will NOT bring on any other available compressors, the variable output will remain at 100% and the controller will wait until the ASC Timer has elapsed and then turn on the smallest. Please note that this is true for any pressure condition. Revision 2.7 Page 16 of 42

276 Pack (Type 6) Dual Pack (Type 7) Pack/Condenser (8) Dual Condenser (9) Condenser (10) Intuitive / Plant Controller Parameter table for Controller (Types 6-10, Staged) Not all parameters apply to all controllers types, for example P-401 is night setback for condenser fans so will not appear on a controller if it is set up as a pack (compressor) controller (type 6). In the right hand columns, the controller type will be shown (6-10) if that parameter applies to that type, if it does not apply it will be greyed out. No. Parameter Range Step Units Default P-01 Transducer 1 Span * Bar P-02 Transducer 1 Offset Bar P-03 Transducer 2 Span * Bar P-04 Transducer 2 Offset Bar P-05 Transducer 3 Span * Bar P-06 Transducer 3 Offset Bar P-20 Section 1 Target Pressure Bar P473 Section 1 Ext. Target Press Bar P-21 Section 1 Target Pressure Above Bar P-20 P-22 Section 1 Target Pressure Below Bar P-20 P-23 Section 1 Number of Stages P-24 Section 1 Stage On Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-25 Section 1 Stage Off Delay 00:00 99:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-26 Section 1 Inverter 0 = Off, 1 = On P442 Section 1 INV Bypass 0 = Disabled = 1 + no retry 2 = retry 3 = retries 4 = retries 5 = retries P444 Section 1 INV Minimum % P446 Section 1 INV Maximum % P490 Section 1 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On P492 Section 1 Gas Diff Bar P470 Section 1 Always Run last 0 = Off, 1 = On P-27 Section 1 Response On Speed P-28 Section 1 Response Off Speed P-29 Section 1 Optimise Limit Bar P-30 Section 1 Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 P-31 Section 1 HP Alarm Bar P-32 Section 1 LP Alarm Bar P-33 Section 1 LP Shut-down Bar P-34 Section 1 Low Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 P448 Section 1 Fail 0 = Off, 1 = On P400 Section 1 Sticky Fans P401 Section 1 Night Set Back 0 = Off, 1 = On = Local, 3 = Remote P402 Section 1 Night Reduction % P403 Section 1 Night Set Back On Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 20:00 20:00 P404 Section 1 Night Set Back Off Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 08:00 08:00 P405 Section 1 Night Set Back Pressure Bar Limit P406 Section 1 Day Reduction % P407 Section 1 Day Pressure Limit Bar P408 Section 1 Transducer fail Level % Revision 2.7 Page 17 of 42

277 Intuitive / Plant Controller P409 Section 1 Control Type 0 = Fixed,1 = Floating = Float Drop P410 Section 1 Float Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P411 Section 1 Drop select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P414 Section 1 Pressure at 0 O C/32 O F Bar P415 Section 1 Pressure at 10 O C/50 O F Bar P416 Section 1 Pressure at 20 O C/68 O F Bar P417 Section 1 Pressure at 30 O C/86 O F Bar P418 Section 1 Pressure at 40 O C/104 O F Bar P419 Section 1 Pressure at 50 O C/122 O F Bar P420 Section 1 Low Limit Bar P421 Section 1 High Limit Bar P422 Section 1 Condenser offset P438 Section 1 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On 1 P430 Section 1 Split Temp P432 Section 1 Split Temp Diff O C o C o C P434 Sect 1 Split Press Bar P436 Sect 1 Split Press Diff Bar P440 Section 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2 = On Rly P-40 Section 2 Target Pressure Bar P474 Section 2 External Target Pressure Bar P-41 Section 2 Target Pressure Above Bar P-40 P-42 Section 2 Target Pressure Below Bar P-40 P-43 Section 2 Number of Stages P-44 Section 2 Stage-on Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-45 Section 2 Stage-off Delay 00:00 99:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-46 Section 2 Inverter 0 = Off, 1 = On P443 Section 2 INV Bypass 0 = Disabled = 1 + no retry 2 = retry 3 = retries 4 = retries 5 = retries P445 Section 2 INV Minimum % P447 Section 2 INV Maximum % P491 Section 2 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 P493 Section 2 Gas diff Bar 0.5 P471 Section 2 Always Run last 0 = Off, 1 = On 1-0 P-47 Section 2 Response On Speed P-48 Section 2 Response Off Speed P-49 Section 2 Optimise Limit Bar 2.0 P-50 Section 2 Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 P-51 Section 2 HP Alarm Bar P-52 Section 2 LP Alarm Bar P-53 Section 2 LP Shut-down Bar P-35 Section 2 Low Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 00:00 00:00 00:00 P449 Section 2 Fail 0 = Off, 1 = On P450 Section 2 Sticky Fans P451 Section 2 Night Set Back 0 = Off, 1 = On = Local, 3 = Remote P452 Section 2 Night Reduction % Revision 2.7 Page 18 of 42

278 Intuitive / Plant Controller P453 Section 2 Night Set Back On Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 20:00 20:00 P454 Section 2 Night Set Back Off Time 00:00 23:59 00:01 min:sec 08:00 08:00 P455 Section 2 Night Set Back Pressure Bar Limit P456 Section 2 Day Reduction % P457 Section 2 Day Pressure Limit Bar P458 Section 2 Transducer fail Level % P459 Section 2 Control Type 0 = Fixed, 1 = Floating = Float Drop P460 Section 2 Float Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P412 Section 2 Drop Select 0 = Probe 1, 1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5, 5 = Probe 6 6 = Probe 7, 7 = Probe 8 8 = Remote P461 Section 2 Pressure at 0 O C/32 O F Bar P462 Section 2 Pressure at 10 O C/50 O F Bar P463 Section 2 Pressure at 20 O C/68 O F Bar P464 Section 2 Pressure at 30 O C/86 O F Bar P465 Section 2 Pressure at 40 O C/104 O F Bar P466 Section 2 Pressure at 50 O C/122 O F Bar P467 Section 2 Low Limit Bar P468 Section 2 High Limit Bar P469 Section 2 Condenser offset O C 6 6 P439 Section 2 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On P431 Section 2 Split Temp P433 Section 2 Split Temp Diff O C O C P435 Sect 2 Split Press Bar P437 Sect 2 Split Press Diff Bar P441 Sect 2 Heat reclaim 0 = Off = On 2 = On Rly P475 Discharge Trip Bar 22.8 P476 Discharge Trip Diff Bar 2.0 P472 Run Proof 0 = Off, 1 = On P-60 Status fault Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P-61 General Alarm Delay 00:00 60:00 00:01 min:sec 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 00:10 P480 Liquid Level 0 = Off, 1 = On P481 High Liquid Level % P482 Low Liquid Level % P483 Liquid Level Alarm Delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 min:sec 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 05:00 P494 Dual Standby See Standby Mode 0 = Off, 1 = On P-80 P-91 Status Fault 1 Status Fault 12 (0) Unused (1) Comp N/O (2) Comp N/C (3) Cond N/O (4) Cond N/C (5) Gen N/O (6) Gen N/C (7) Standby 1 N/O (8) Standby 1 N/C (9) Standby 2 N/O (10) Standby 2 N/C (11) Run 1 N/O (12) Run 1 N/C (13) Run 2 N/O (14) Run 2 N/C (15) INV N/O (16) INV N/C Revision 2.7 Page 19 of 42

279 Intuitive / Plant Controller P100 Section 1 Stage 1 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P111 P112 Section 1 Stage 1 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 2 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P123 P124 Section 1 Stage 2 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 3 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P135 P136 Section 1 Stage 3 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 4 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P147 P148 Section 1 Stage 4 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 5 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P159 P160 Section 1 Stage 5 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 6 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P171 P172 Section 1 Stage 6 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 7 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P183 P184 Section 1 Stage 7 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 8 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P195 P196 Section 1 Stage 8 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 9 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P207 P208 Section 1 Stage 9 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 10 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P219 P220 Section 1 Stage 10 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 11 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P231 P232 Section 1 Stage 11 Relay 12 Section 1 Stage 12 Relay 1 0 = Off 1 = On P243 P244 Section 1 Stage 12 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 1 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P255 P256 Section 2 Stage 1 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 2 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P267 Section 2 Stage 2 Relay 12 Revision 2.7 Page 20 of 42

280 Intuitive / Plant Controller P268 Section 2 Stage 3 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P279 P280 Section 2 Stage 3 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 4 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P291 P292 Section 2 Stage 4 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 5 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P303 P-304 Section 2 Stage 5 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 6 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P315 P316 Section 2 Stage 6 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 7 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P327 P328 Section 2 Stage 7 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 8 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P339 P340 Section 2 Stage 8 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 9 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P351 P352 Section 2 Stage 9 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 10 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P363 P364 Section 2 Stage 10 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 11 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P375 P376 Section 2 Stage 11 Relay 12 Section 2 Stage 12 Relay 1 0 = off 1 = on 1-0 P387 dflt Section 2 Stage 12 Relay 12 Restore Default Settings (Front panel Only) * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Note. The controller uses absolute pressure; if guage pressure is required, add +1 Bar to the offset value. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) If only transducer input 1 in use please see Note 10 also. Revision 2.7 Page 21 of 42

281 Intuitive / Plant Controller Parameter Description: Number Parameter Description P-01/03/05 Transducer 1/2/3 Span Range of the transducers P-02/04/06 Transducer 1/2/3 Offset Transducer value below zero. P-20/40 Target Pressure Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P473/474 External Target Pressure Pressure target when Sect1 Run/Sect2 Run is off. Control will try to maintain this pressure until Sect1 Run/Sect2 Run is on. At this point P-20/40 used. Please see: Status Inputs P-21/41 Target Pressure Above P-20 Set-point above the target, used to obtain a dead-band P-22/42 Target Pressure Below P-20 Set-point below the target, used to obtain a dead-band P-23/43 Number of Stages Number of stages in the system P-23/43Fuzzy Starts per hour Limits a compressor to this many starts per hour P-24/44Fuzzy Run smallest See explanation under the parameter tables for this parameter Run Smallest P-24/44Staged Stage-on Delay Delay time between stages on (Staged types only) P-25/45Staged Stage-off Delay Delay time between stages off (Staged types only) P-26/46 Inverter Enables the inverter analogue output and associated relay. P442/443 Inverter Bypass Enable for Inverter Bypass feature. See INV Bypass P444/445 Inverter Min The minimum percentage the inverter will operate to when Inverter Bypass parameter (P-442/443) is on e.g. if set to 25% the inverter output will never go below this value P446/447 Inverter Max The maximum percentage the inverter will operate to when Inverter Bypass parameter (P-442/443) is on e.g. if set to 80% the inverter output will never go above this value P490/491 Section 1/2 Gas Dump Enables Gas Dump feature. P492/493 Section 1/2 Gas Diff Diff below the set point that the Gas Dump valve is opened. See Gas Dump P470/471 Always run last Keeps the last stage running except for a Low Shutdown condition. If the last stage is an inverter, the inverter enable will stay energised, but the inverter analogue output may well decrease to 0% if pressure is below the set-point. P495/497 Sect 1/2 Compressor Unload Selects the order the compressor loaders are switched off See: Compressor Loaders P496/498 Sect 1/2 Equal Equalises compressor run times. See: Equal run Times P-27/47 Response On Speed Allows the user to speed up/slow down the stage on speed (Option: - 1 to 60 with 60 being fastest response) Note: This parameter applies to the inverter output only when using any of the Staged types. P-28/48 Response Off Speed Allows the user to speed up/slow down the stage off speed (Option: - 1 to 60 with 60 being fastest response) Note: This parameter applies to the inverter output only when using any of the Staged types. P-29/49 Optimise Limit This is an offset that is added to the target pressure when using the Data Manager Energy feature Pack Optimisation. For example if target pressure is 2.1 Bar and Optimise Limit set to 0.5 Bar. The remote optimise command will only be able to optimise the current suction setpoint up to a maximum of 2.6 Bar P-30/50 Alarm Delay Delay before HP and LP alarms are signalled P-31/51 HP Alarm HP alarm set-point P-32/52 LP Alarm LP alarm set-point, stage off when reached P-33/53 LP Shut-down LP shut-down set-point, all stages go off when this is reached P-34/35 Low Alarm Delay applied before LP Shutdown alarm is generated. Note as soon as the LP Shutdown setpoint is reached any Compressor/Condenser stages, for the associated section, still operating will go off immediately and does not wait for the LP Shutdown alarm to be created. P448/449 Sect 1 / 2 Fail The following will occur in the event of pressure transducer fault on Section 1 or 2: If set to On then all Compressors or Fans will turn On in the event of a transducer failure. If set to Off then all Compressors or Fans will turn Off in the event of a transducer failure. P400/450 Sticky Fans Sticky fans operation allows the user to turn the fans off in a way that keeps a number of fans running longer. See Sticky Fans P401/451 Night Set Back Turns on the night set back level. Note This feature is intended to be used when all of the fans are controlled by the inverter. If fan relays are selected, they will never come on as the inverter is required to go to 100% before staging the next fan. There are 4 options : - Revision 2.7 Page 22 of 42

282 Intuitive / Plant Controller Off : Night Feature is not used. Controller uses what is set in Day Reduction (P406/456) On : Night Reduction (parameter 402 / 452) is always used Local : Uses times in Night Set On and Night Set Off parameters (P403/453) (P404/454) to determine Day / Night Remote : Uses GP Timer to determine Day / Night P402/452 Night Reduction Reduces inverter output by this amount during night settings. P403/453 Night Set Back On Time Time for the night set back feature to operate P404/454 Night Set Back Off Time Time for the night set back feature to go off P405/455 Night Set Back Pressure Limit Pressure set-point to disable the night set back feature. Night set back is disabled above this level and enabled below it. P406/456 Day Reduction Reduces the inverter output by this amount when the timer is not in its night zone. P407/457 Day Pressure Limit Pressure set-point to disable the day reduction feature. Day reduction is disabled above this level and enabled below it. P408/458 Transducer fail Level Sets the output level of the inverter if the transducer fails P409/459 Control Type Selects between Fixed, Floating or Drop Leg control for Condenser control only. Fixed uses the set-point parameter as its target (P-20/40) with the corresponding pressure transducer. Floating uses the temperature of a selected probe converted to a pressure as the setpoint along with the corresponding pressure transducer. Drop leg uses the temperature of probe mounted on the drop leg to calculate control pressure and uses the set-point parameter as its target (P-20/40). P410/460 Float Select Selects the probe that measures the floating temperature (Note : This would be fitted to the Air On of the Condenser) See Note Floating Head Pressure P411/412 Sect 1 / 2 drop Select Selects which probe is used to measure Drop Leg temperature. See Note Drop Leg P414/461 Pressure at 0 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P415/462 Pressure at 10 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P415/463 Pressure at 20 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P417/464 Pressure at 30 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P418/465 Pressure at 40 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P419/466 Pressure at 50 O C Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P420/467 Low Limit Stops the floating pressure target from going below this level P421/468 High Limit Stops the floating pressure target from going above this level P422/469 Condenser offset Used to set a condenser differential, which is added to the incoming temperature to produce a floating set-point P438/439 Sect 1 / 2 Split Set to On to enable Condenser Split feature. P430/431 Sect 1 / 2 Split Temp If outside ambient air temperature falls to this value then the condenser split relay will come on. Note the Condenser Float temperature probe is used as the air temperature reference. P432/433 Sect 1 / 2 Split Temp Diff Diff above for the split temp feature (P-430/431). If outside ambient air temperature rises above Sect 1/2 Split Temp parameter plus Sect 1/2 Split Temp Diff parameter then the Condenser split relay will go off P434/435 Sect 1 / 2 Split Pressure If the discharge pressure rises above this setting then the condenser split relay will be forced off regardless of temperature. P436/437 Sect 1 / 2 Split Pressure Diff Diff below parameter for Split Pressure feature (P-434/435). If the pressure for Section1/2 falls below Sect 1/2 Split Pressure setpoint plus Sect 1/2 Split Pressure Diff parameter then the condenser split relay will return to normal operation (status depends on P-430/431). P440/441 Sect 1 / 2 Heat Reclaim Enable for Heat Reclaim. See : Relay Outputs 0 = Off (Not Used) 1 = On (Uses Ext Set Point) 2 = On Rly(Uses Ext Set Point and allocates a Relay) P475 Discharge trip If Discharge Pressure exceeds this setting All compressors go off immediately and all fans come on immediately. A Discharge Trip Alarm is generated. P476 Discharge Trip Diff Diff below for parameter P-475 at which point control goes back to normal and alarm clears. P472 Run Proof See section Run-Proof P-60 Status fault Delay Time delay before status faults are activated P-61 General Alarm Delay Time delay before general faults are activated P480 Liquid Level Enable for Liquid Level feature See Note : Liquid Level P481/482 Liquid Level Alarm Settings at which High and Low Liquid Level alarms are generated Revision 2.7 Page 23 of 42

283 Intuitive / Plant Controller P483 Liquid Level Alarm Delay Delay applied before the Low or High liquid alarm is generated. P494 Dual Standby Used to place two sections into Standby from one Standby status input. (Note Std 1 N/O or Std 1 N/C must be utilised when using this feature) See Note Standby Mode P-80 Status Fault 1 Used to select the type of input required P-91 P100/140 Fuzzy Status Fault 12 Stage 1 Select the output device for this stage P111/151 Fuzzy P120/160 Fuzzy Stage 12 Stage 1 Size Sets the relative size for each compressor P131/171 Fuzzy Parameters for Staged type Stage 12 Size Stage 1 Relay 1 to 12 Maps compressor relays to stages Stage 12 Relay 1 to 12 Liquid Level Liquid Level Detector uses 4-20mA or 0-5V / 10V dc on Universal Input 3 on the Plant controller. 0mA, 4mA or 0V will give a reading of 0% and 20mA, 5V or 10V will give a reading of 100% The Span and Offset parameters for Transducer input 3 do not require adjustment and can be left at the default values. Low Liquid Level Alarm (P-482) and High Liquid Level Alarm (P-481) can be generated. The alarm has a settable delay. Run-Proof This is a global parameter if set to on the Status fault inputs are used to prove that compressors are running. Configure the status inputs, using either Compressor Normally Closed or Compressor Normally Open, that correspond with each relay output. When the relay output is energised and the run proof signal isn t returned within the specified time period, then the compressor relay will go off and be taken out of the control strategy until the run proof has been reset. The run-proof feature uses the status fault delay (P-60) and all run proof signals must be returned within this delay period. Run proofs are used with compressor (Comp) stages only. This feature can be used in both Fuzzy and Staged applications. To reset the run proof for any stage, after maintenance, and return a compressor back into the control strategy use the menu item Override. The override option is used to manually turn on the compressor output. If the proof signal is returned within the allotted time delay the compressor is allocated back into the control strategy; if the proof isn t returned the compressor relay will go off and remain out of the control strategy. Alternatively the alarm can be cleared remotely by changing parameter P472 from 1 to 0 (On to Off). This clears all run proof alarms on all compressors which are currently out of the control logic due to run proof feature. Now change P472 from 0 to 1 (Off to On). The compressor(s) will then be available for selection by the control logic. If the compressor is selected by the control strategy and the run proof signal is then not returned within the allotted time delay then it will fail and will be removed from the control logic again. Gas Dump Gas Dump Enable (P-490/491). In Fuzzy pack control the Gas dump relay will come on when the Suction Pressure drops below the Set Point (P-20/40) plus the Gas Diff (P-492/493) and all but the last compressor has turned off. When an Inverter output is configured using Fuzzy pack control the Gas dump relay will come on only when the Inverter is active, i.e. above 0% and all other Compressors configured in that section are off. With Staged pack control the Gas Dump relay will come on only when last compressor is running. The Gas dump relay will go off again when: - The pressure rises above the Set Point (P-20/40) Or When the last stage compressor goes off, or Inverter Enable is turned off. Revision 2.7 Page 24 of 42

284 Intuitive / Plant Controller Compressor Loaders Parameters P495/496 determine the order the compressor loaders are switched off Giving the option to turn off one compressor and its loaders before turning off the next or to switch off all the loaders first leaving compressors running unloaded. If P495/496 set for 0 (Off) then a compressor loaders and compressor body will be another loader is switched off. If P495/496 set for 1 (On) then all loaders will be a compressor body will be switched off leaving any compressors running unloaded before switching a compressor body off. Example 1 (Type 1 Fuzzy) Pack set up: 2 compressors with 2 Loaders each Sect 1 stage 1 = Comp. Sect 1 stage 2 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 3 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 4 = Comp. Sect 1 stage 5 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 6 = Loader. Parameter P495 = 0 (Off) Switching On sequence: Pressure above set point + diff First compressor comes on. Compressor loader 1 comes on. Compressor loader 2 comes on. Second compressor comes on. Compressor loader 1 comes on. Compressor loader 2 comes on. Switching Off sequence: Pressure below set point diff One compressor loader 2 goes off. Compressor loader 1 goes off. Compressor body goes off. Next compressor loader 2 goes off. Compressor loader 1 goes off. Compressor body goes off. This configuration switches off one compressor and its loaders before switching off the next compressor loader. Thus leaving one compressor fully loaded till first one is completely off. Example 2 (Type 1 Fuzzy) Pack set up: 2 compressors with 2 Loaders each Sect 1 stage 1 = Comp. Sect 1 stage 2 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 3 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 4 = Comp. Sect 1 stage 5 = Loader. Sect 1 stage 6 = Loader. Parameter P495 = 1 (On) Switching On sequence: Pressure above set point + diff First compressor comes on. First compressor loader 1 comes on. First compressor loader 2 comes on. Second compressor comes on. Second compressor loader 1 comes on. Second compressor loader 2 comes on. Switching Off sequence: Pressure below set point diff One compressor loader 2 goes off. Compressor loader 1 goes off. Next compressor loader 2 goes off. Compressor loader 1 goes off. One compressor body goes off. Next compressor goes off. This configuration switches off all loaders before switching off a compressor Thus leaving both compressors running unloaded before switching one completely off. NOTE: If using an Inverter with loaders The Inverter and its loader/s will always be the last to go off. Equal Run Times With parameters P496/498 Set to 1 (On) the controller will bring on the compressors in a way that the running times are as near equal as possible. If the pressure is above set point the next compressor that comes on will be the compressor that has been running for the least amount of time. If the pressure is below set point the next compressor to go off will be the one that has been running the longest. This configuration will try to make each compressors run hours equal. Revision 2.7 Page 25 of 42

285 Intuitive / Plant Controller Inverter Bypass Inverter Bypass Parameter (P442/443) is used to set however many retries are required if the Inverter run signal is not returned in the allocated time after the inverter enable has been turned on. P442/443 set for 1 to 5 is the number of times enable comes on including initial inverter enable turned on. 0 = Feature disabled. 1 = Inverter enable will come on once with no retries 2 = Initial turn on and 1 retry 3 = Initial turn on and 2 retries 4 = Initial turn on and 3 retries 5 = Initial turn on and 4 retries Firstly assign the desired inverter run input using the Status Fault inputs. This input can be set as either normally closed (INV N/C) or normally open (INV N/O). When the inverter enable relay is called for by the control strategy then the inverter run signal has to be returned to the appropriate input within 2 seconds. If the run signal is received then the control strategy will continue as normally and the variable output will begin to ramp up. If the signal is not returned within the allotted time then the following will occur. P442/443 set for 1 The inverter enable will stay off and bypass relay will come on. P442/443 set for 2 to 5 The inverter enable relay will be turned off for a further 15 seconds. This process will occur a further 1 to 4 retries depending on (P442/443) if the inverter run signal is not received in any test instance. After the retries the inverter will be taken out of the control logic, until the fault is cleared using the reset process, and the pack will operate as a standard digital pack without the use of the inverter output. At this point the Bypass relay will become like another staged relay and will cycle on and off when called for. An INV Bypass alarm will be generated. Note if the inverter run signal is not returned within the allotted time in the first instance but is successful in the second, third or fourth attempt (Depending on (P442/443) then any future inverter run tests must still complete all tests. To reinstate the inverter output, once the fault has been rectified, either reset the Plant controller or by using the Override feature force the relay associated to the inverter on. The status inputs should be mapped to the relay used as the Inverter Enable relay for a given section i.e. if relay 1 is the first Inverter relay then status Input 1 would become the inverter run input for Section 1. If the second Inverter relay is 5 then status Input 5 would become the inverter run input for Section 2. Please see Relay Outputs Configuration. Relay Run Hours The total run hours for each relay can be viewed via a Laptop/PC or from the Data Manager front end. This feature informs the user of the total number of hours a given relay has been on. Therefore if a compressor is assigned to a relay the total run hours for the compressor can be viewed. To reset the run hours for any given relay connect to the Plant controller using a PC/Laptop. Login and click on the configuration link. Entering 0 into anyone of the relay hour fields and pressing the set configuration button will reset the run hours for that relay back to 0. Run hours apply to all relays including the Alarm relay. Relay Starts The total number starts for each relay can be viewed via a Laptop/PC or from the Data Manager front end. This feature informs the user of the total number of starts for a given relay. Therefore if a compressor is assigned to a relay the total number of starts for that compressor can be viewed. To reset the relay starts count for a given relay connect to the Plant controller using a PC/Laptop. Login and click on the configuration link. Entering 0 into anyone of the relay start fields and pressing the set configuration button will reset the count for that relay back to 0. Relay starts apply to all relays including the Alarm relay. Setup via a PC Log on to the RDM web site and go to Support -> Software. Download the following folder: - Plant Controller USB drivers for Windows XP/2000. Contained within this folder are installation instructions and the drivers required to connect to the Mercury Plant controller. A USB cable is required which connects to a Type A USB connector (PC) at one end and a Type B USB connector at the other end (Plant USB Device port). Revision 2.7 Page 26 of 42

286 Intuitive / Plant Controller Plant Controller home page Log in using an appropriate username and password; setup operations can then be used via the PC by clicking on the appropriate link: - Link Operation Values Shows the values being return on the controllers inputs and outputs Settings Shows the controllers parameter settings Alarm Log Shows the controllers alarm history; up to 1000 alarms are stored Graph Shows the controller values in graphical format Set Parameters Allows the user to change parameter values; see Set Parameters System Log Shows the changes made to the controller in chronological order Network Allows the user to setup: - IP Address Netmask Gateway Time Allows the user to set the Time or synchronise with the PC Reset Allows the user to reset the controller Configuration Allows the user to change the controller configuration; See: changing configuration Export Log Creates a log file of the controllers data for downloading onto a PC Save Pack Setup Saves the current Configuration Load pack Setup Allows the user to upload a pre-configuration (a stand-alone PC program is available to create Plant controller configuration files. Contact RDM for details Clear Alarm Log Clears the controller alarm log completely (Yes/No choice) Version Shows the controllers software version Revision 2.7 Page 27 of 42

287 Intuitive / Plant Controller Change Configuration (PC) This page allows the user to change the configuration of the Pack controller: - 1 example as follows:- Change Parameters (PC) Revision 2.7 Page 28 of 42

288 Intuitive / Plant Controller Configuration of inputs and outputs: Status Inputs Section Inputs can be set up as: - 0 Unused Input is not used 1 Compressor Normally Open When selected Make to generate Compressor Fault 2 Compressor Normally Closed When selected Break to generate Compressor Fault 3 Condenser Normally Open When selected Make to generate Condenser Fault 4 Condenser Normally Closed When selected Break to generate Condenser Fault 5 General Normally Open When selected Make to generate General Fault 6 General Normally Closed When selected Break to generate General Fault 7 Standby 1 Normally Open When selected Make to place Section 1 into standby and generate Standby alarm. 8 Standby 1 Normally Closed When selected Break to place Section 1 into standby and generate Standby alarm. 9 Standby 2 Normally Open When selected Make to place Section 2 into standby and generate Standby alarm. 10 Standby 2 Normally Closed When selected Break to place Section 2 into standby and generate Standby alarm. 11 Run 1 Normally Open When selected Break to use Sect 1 Ext Target (P473) OR Rem Ext 1 See note : Ext Target 12 Run 1 Normally Closed When selected Make input to use Sect 1 Ext Target (P473) OR Rem Ext 1 See note : Ext Target 13 Run 2 Normally Open When selected Break input to use Sect 2 Ext Target (P474) OR Rem Ext 2 See Note : Ext Target 14 Run 2 Normally Closed When selected Make input to use Sect 2 Ext Target (P474) OR Rem Ext 2 See note : Ext Target 15 INV N/O When selected Break to signal Inverter Run. See Note : INV Bypass 16 INV N/C When selected Make to signal Inverter Run. See Note : INV Bypass For the above any alarms will be generated after the Status Fault Delay (P-60) has timed out. Note Standby Alarm follows the General Fault Delay (P-60) External Target Pack Controller To use Sect 1/2 Ext Target (P473/474) instead of Section 1/2 Target Pressure (P-20/40) a status Input must be set to Run 1/2 N/O or N/C. When the input is activated the Target Pressure will change from (P-20/40) to (P473/474) When the input is de-activated the Target Pressure will revert back to (P-20/40) Condenser Controller Heat Reclaim must be set to On or On/Rly. To use Sect 1/2 Ext Target (P473/474) instead of Section 1/2 Target Pressure (P-20/40) a Status Input must be set to Run 1/2 N/O or N/C. With Heat Reclaim parameter (P440/441) set to On the following will occur: - Or When the input is activated the Target Pressure will change from (P-20/40) to (P473/474) When the input is de-activated the Target Pressure will revert back to (P-20/40) With Heat Reclaim parameter (P440/441) set to On/Rly the following will occur: - When input is activated the Target Pressure will change from (P-20/40) to (P473/474) and turn on the Heat Reclaim relay output. When input is de-activated the Target Pressure will revert back to (P-20/40) and turn off the Heat Reclaim relay output. Remote TDB Command To use a Remote Ext Target Set Point sent from a Data Manager TDB Program Instead of the value entered for the Ext Target setpoint (P473/474), for a Pack or Condenser, then the following must be configured: - Status Input must be set to Run 1/2 N/O or N/C and if required the above for Heat Reclaim has to be set (P440/441) to either On or On/Rly. When input is activated the Target Pressure will change from (P-20/40) to whatever Target Pressure is being sent from TDB program. The settable range for Rem Ext 1/2 is -3.4 Bar to 150 Bar. When input is de-activated the Target Pressure will revert back to (P-20/40) Send Ext Target Set Point Command to Rem Ext 1 / Rem Ext 2 using a Data Manager TDB program. Analogue Output block. Revision 2.7 Page 29 of 42

289 Intuitive / Plant Controller Relay Outputs Configuration Compressor(s)/Loader(s)/Fan(s) relays are assigned using the Stage parameters for a given section. Additional relay outputs will be assigned (if they are required) in the following order once the Stage parameters have been configured Condenser Split Heat Reclaim INV Bypass Gas Dump Alarm (An alarm relay will always be allocated as long as a relay is available for it) Section Stages Stage Description None Use this option to end the number of stages in the controller Unused Use this option to skip a relay output within a stage Comp Use this option to assign a relay output to a compressor See note 5 Loader Use this option to assign a relay output to a compressor loader See note 9 Fan Use this option to assign a relay to a fan Inverter Use this option to assign a relay to an Inverter Trim Use this option to set a relay to a trim compressor See note 6 Comp Run Use this option to set a relay as a separate compressor used only when other compressors are running See note 8 Note 5: In a pack configuration, at least 1 output must be assigned to a compressor. Loader outputs will not energise without a compressor being on. When assigning stages a Loader should follow the Compressor on which it is mounted. Note 6: This option can be used to delay the onset of the inverter output, all outputs selected as Trim will come on before the Inverter output energises. Once all the trim stages are on the inverter enable relay would be energised and the inverter analogue output would begin to ramp up. The trim stages would remain on until all other stages and the inverter are turned off. Note 8: This option is used to bring on a separate compressor. This output is active when any of the other defined compressors (Comp stages) are running. This output is off when the last compressor in its section is turned off. Note if only the inverter output is configured and no other Comp stages then the Comp Run is active when the inverter output is active. Note 9 : Relays can be configured as Loaders, selected after a Compressor stage or a Compressor running on an Inverter Alarm Relay Note 7. The alarm relay is assigned automatically to the last available relay after the stage relays, condenser split, heat reclaim, inverter bypass and gas dump have been allocated. At first power on this is likely to be relay 1 until programming of the controller is complete. The relay is energised with no alarm and de-energised when in alarm. Stage Sizes Stage sizes will determine the order in which compressors or loaders are switched on and off. This is a relative number between 0 and 60, reflecting the size of the compressor (usually horse power) The default stage size is 0; stage sizes must be entered for correct operation. Operation (Fuzzy) Once the controller has been set-up and configured, normal operation will resume. If the appropriate Type has been selected the controller will operate using a fuzzy logic based control algorithm. The controller will determine the stages to bring on and off using the fuzzy logic rules and adhering to the starts/hr criteria. The response time for devices switching on and off can be varied by adjusting the response on and response off parameters (1 is the slowest response, 60 is the quickest). The fuzzy logic will attempt to optimise the compressor starts and keep them at a minimum. Before a compressor or fan is switched on, Relay 1 will energise and the variable output will ramp to 100%, when it reaches this point, the fixed device (compressor, loader or fan); will switch on and the variable output will begin its cycle again starting from 0%. When demand is satisfied, and all compressor relays are off, the variable output ramps down 0%, if demand is still satisfied, the enable relay de-energises. Operation (Staged) Staged operation requires the output relays to be mapped to a particular stage. Each stage (there are 12 stages) has to have at least 1 relay assigned for the controller to operate correctly. More than one relay can be assigned to stages in a given section and the same relay can be used in multiple stages. Note a relay cannot be assigned in both Section 1 and Section 2. As the pressure rises above the target setpoint, plus the target above value, the controller will enter Stage 1 after the stage on delay has expired. At this point any relay assigned in Stage 1 will come on and the stage on delay timer will be reset. If the pressure remains above the setpoint, plus the target above value, and the stage on delay has expired for a second time the controller will enter stage 2. At this point any relay assigned in Stage 2 will come on. Note if a relay has been assigned in Stage 1 but not used in Stage 2 then it will go off at this point. The reverse occurs when the pressure falls below the setpoint plus the target below value. The controller will step down the stages using the stage off delay (P-08) until all stages are off. Revision 2.7 Page 30 of 42

290 Intuitive / Plant Controller When using a variable output as the pressure rises above target setpoint, plus target above, the variable speed output will ramp up from 0% to 100% without following the stage on delay. If the pressure stays above the target setpoint and the variable output is at 100% and the stage on delay has timed out then the controller will enter Stage 1. At this point the variable output will reset to 0% and start ramping up again towards 100%. If the pressure stays above the target setpoint and the variable output is at 100% and the stage on delay has timed out then the controller will enter Stage 2. As the pressure drops below the setpoint, minus the target below, the variable output will ramp from 100% down to 0%, once the stage off delay expires the controller will stage down. Note if the variable output reaches 100% and the stage on delay has not expired the output will remain at 100% until the stage on delay has expired. For example if set to dual Pack and pack 1 has 4 Compressors the following could be set: - Sect1 Stg1 : Rly 1 =On, Sect1 Stg2 : Rly 1 and Rly 2 = On, Sect1 Stg 3 : Rly 1,Rly 2 and Rly 3 = On. Sect1 Stg 4 : Rly 1, Rly 2, Rly 3 and Rly 4 = On. This would stage relay 1 through to four on after the appropriate stage delay if the pressure is above the target setpoint and differentials. Pack 2 would start as follows:- Sect2 stg1: Rly 5 = On (Note: Starting at Relay 5 as the first 4 relays have already been allocated to Pack 1) Other operational features Floating Head Pressure When the condenser controller is used in the Floating Head pressure mode, the temperature to pressure parameters must be used to profile a pressure curve from the air on temperature probe for the condenser (P414 to P419 and P461 to P466). The value read from the temperature probe is added to a Condenser Offset (P422) and then converted to a pressure. This converted pressure replaces the Target Setpoint (P01) as the target pressure and P01 is only used as a default; for instance when the probe is disconnected or develops a fault. Low and high pressure levels allow for a lower and upper limit to be set for the pressure range. The air on temperature can be read from probe inputs 1 to 8 and is settable via parameter P-410/P-460. The float temperature can also be received as a TDB command sent from a Data Manager TDB program. This would allow for a single probe temperate to be shared with multiple Plant controllers. Please see the relevant Data Builder user guide with regards to creating a TDB program. The following commands would be used in TDB to send the temperature data to the Plant controller. If P-410 is set to Remote then S1 Rem Float would be used in TDB to send the remote temperature used for Section 1 condenser float or if P-460 is set to Remote then S2 Rem Float would be used in TDB to send the remote temperature used for Section 2 condenser float. Drop Leg When the condenser is used in the Drop Leg mode, the temperature measured from the condenser Drop Leg is converted to a pressure. This converted pressure replaces the condenser pressure transducer and is used in the control strategy. If the drop leg temperature is lost then the control strategy will revert to using the relevant pressure transducer. Drop Leg temperature can be read from probe inputs 1 to 8 or set to remote then read from another pack which is reading the Drop Leg Temperature and sending temperature via a TDB Program to Input S1 Rem Drop Leg or S2 Rem Drop Leg. This is then converted to a pressure and used as Control Pressure Drop Leg temperature can be read from probe inputs 1 to 8 and is settable via parameter P-41/P-412. The drop leg temperature can also be received as a TDB command sent from a Data Manager TDB program. Please see the relevant Data Builder user guide with regards to creating a TDB program. The following commands would be used in TDB to send the temperature data to the Plant controller. S1 Rem Float would be used in TDB to send the remote temperature used for Section 1 condenser drop leg or S2 Rem Float would be used in TDB to send the remote temperature used for Section 2 condenser drop leg. Night Set-back This controller; when in condenser mode has a Night Set-back feature for the condenser controller. The variable output can be set to reduce to a pre-determined level; either by an internal timer, or by times sent to the controller over the network. (Use a GP Timer channel in a data Manager or Data Director) There is a High pressure limit, over which the night set-back feature will be turned off. As the pressure reduces under this limit the night set-back feature is switched on again. Day Set-back Similarly, this controller; when in condenser mode has a day Set-Back feature. The Day Set-Back feature uses the local night Set-Back clock, (if it s out of the night set-back time, day set-back will be on) Note: - When Set-Back mode is on, no further fan stages will come on unless the variable output reaches 100%, either by reaching the high pressure point or Set-Back going off. When configured as a condenser controller, loss of the pressure input will result in the variable output going to the value defined in P17. Invert Relays The operation of the relays can be inverted so that N/C contacts can be used for energisation. This can be done from the configure screen on web page. Choose the relay(s) you wish to invert and set them to on. This process can also be completed from the controller display. Navigate to the menu option rly and select the relay output you wish to invert for example r-05 is relay output 5. Change from 0 to 1 to invert the relay so that the N/C contact is in use. Please note: This operation does not invert the Alarm relay. The alarm relay is energised when there are no alarms present. Revision 2.7 Page 31 of 42

291 Intuitive / Plant Controller Sticky Fans Sticky fan operation allows the user to turn the fans off in a way that keeps a number of fans running longer. Example: If in a Pack/Condenser configuration fans are mapped to relays 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10; the following sequence will apply if sticky fans (P450) is set to 2 Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 Fan4 Fan5 Fan6 On Sequence 1 st 2 nd 3 rd 4 th 5 th 6 th Relay # Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Off Sequence 6 th 5 th 1 st 2 nd 3 rd 4 th USB Operation The following operations can be performed using a memory-stick plugged into the USB port: - 1. Export event log U Export logged data U Save configuration U Load configuration U Upgrade the software U-05 The above requires the user to enter the USB menu via the display and press enter at the appropriate display option. For example to save the current configuration insert a USB Memory stick into one of the USB Host ports, go to the USB software menu option, press enter, then the use the up key to scroll to U-03. Now press enter, the screen will flash USB until the operation has completed. The file is transferred to the memory-stick in.zip format. The USB memory stick must be formatted as FAT32. Revision 2.7 Page 32 of 42

292 Pack (Type 1) Dual Pack (Type 2) Pack/Condenser (Type 3) Dual Condenser (Type 4) Condenser (Type 5) Intuitive / Plant Controller Viewing Inputs and Outputs Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. From the function menu, select IO, press enter 2. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Input/Output table for Controller Types 1-5 (Fuzzy) Number IO Range Units I-01 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-02 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-03 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-10 Analogue Input 1-60 to +128 O C I-17 Analogue Input 8 I-20 Section 1 remote float -60 to +128 I-21 Section 2 remote float -60 to +128 I-22 Section 1 remote leg drop -60 to +128 I-23 Section 2 remote leg drop -60 to +128 I-30 Digital Input 1 0 = OK 1 = Alarm 2 = Unused O C O C O C O C I-41 Digital Input 12 I-50 Section 1 Run 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-51 Section 2 Run 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-52 Section 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-53 Section 2 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-54 Liquid Level % I-55 Remote External Temp.1-60 to +128 O C I-56 Remote External Temp.2-60 to +128 O C O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On O-12 Relay 12 O-31 Variable Output % O-32 Variable Output % O-41 Optimisation Level -3.4 to 180 Bar O-42 Optimisation Level Pack to 180 Bar O-51 Section 1 Float Pressure -3.4 to 180 Bar O-52 Section 2 Float Pressure -3.4 to 180 Bar O-53 Sect 1 Drop Leg Temp -60 to +180 O C O-54 Sect 2 Drop Leg Temp -60 to +180 O C Revision 2.7 Page 33 of 42

293 Intuitive / Plant Controller O-55 Sect 1 Drop Leg Press -3.4 to 180 Bar O-56 Sect 2 Drop Leg Press -3.4 to 180 Bar O-57 Sect 1 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On O-58 Sect 2 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On O-59 Sect 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On O-60 Sect 2 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On O-61 Section 1 Night Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-62 Section 1 Day Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-63 Section 2 Night Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-64 Section 2 Day Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-70 Sect.1 Bypass 0 = Off, 1 = On O-71 Sect.2 Bypass 0 = Off, 1 = On O-72 Section 1 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On O-73 Section 2 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilise (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Transducer Fail (7) Standby S-02 Section 2 Control States (0) Stabilise (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Transducer Fail (7) Stand-by Revision 2.7 Page 34 of 42

294 Pack (Type 6) Dual Pack (Type 7) Pack/Condenser (Type 8) Dual Condenser (Type 9) Condenser (Type 10) Intuitive / Plant Controller Input/Output table for Controller Types 6-10 (Staged) Number IO Range Units I-01 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-02 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-03 Pressure Input to 180 Bar I-10 Analogue Input 1-60 to +128 O C I-17 Analogue Input 8 I-20 Section 1 remote float -60 to +128 I-21 Section 2 remote float -60 to +128 I-22 Section 1 remote leg drop -60 to +128 I-23 Section 2 remote leg drop -60 to +128 I-30 Digital Input 1 0 = OK 1 = Alarm 2 = Unused O C O C O C O C I-41 Digital Input 12 I-50 Section 1 Run 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-51 Section 2 Run 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-52 Section 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-53 Section 2 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On 2 = Unused I-54 Liquid Level % I-55 Remote External Temp.1-60 to +128 O C I-56 Remote External Temp.2-60 to +128 O C O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off, 1 = On O-12 Relay 12 O-20 Section 1 Stage 0-12 O-21 Section 2 Stage 0-12 O-31 Variable Output % O-32 Variable Output % O-41 Optimisation Level -3.4 to 180 Bar O-42 Optimisation Level Pack to 180 Bar O-51 Section 1 Float Pressure -3.4 to 180 Bar O-52 Section 2 Float Pressure -3.4 to 180 Bar O-53 Sect 1 Drop Leg Temp -60 to +128 O C O-54 Sect 2 Drop Leg Temp -60 to +128 O C O-55 Sect 1 Drop Leg Press -3.4 to 180 Bar O-56 Sect 2 Drop Leg Press -3.4 to 180 Bar O-57 Sect 1 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On O-58 Sect 2 Split 0 = Off, 1 = On O-59 Sect 1 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On O-60 Sect 2 Heat Reclaim 0 = Off, 1 = On O-61 Section 1 Night Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-62 Section 1 Day Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-63 Section 2 Night Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On Revision 2.7 Page 35 of 42

295 Intuitive / Plant Controller O-64 Section 2 Day Set-back 0 = Off, 1 = On O-70 Sect.1 Bypass 0 = Off, 1 = On O-71 Sect.2 Bypass 0 = Off, 1 = On O-72 Section 1 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On O-73 Section 2 Gas Dump 0 = Off, 1 = On S-01 Section 1 Control States (0) Stabilise (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Transducer Fail (7) Standby S-02 Section 2 Control States (0) Stabilise (1) Initial (2) Normal (3) High Pressure (4) Low Pressure (5) Low Shut-down (6) Transducer Fail (7) Stand-by Quickview Pressing the quickview button during normal operation displays the target pressure. If a two-stage controller has been configured, both target pressures are displayed on the corresponding Section display. Press the quickview button again to go back to the normal display or wait for the time-out period to elapse. Override The override function allows the user to switch output stages on or off. Press the override and enter button together for approx 3 seconds until r-01 is displayed. Use the up or down button to display the relays (r-01 to r-12) and analogue outputs (A-01 and A-02) For (r-01 to r-12) Press Enter and select 1 to turn the relay on and 0 to turn the relay off. For (A-01 and A-02) Press Enter and use up and down buttons to select the desired output for A-01 or A-02. Press the Enter button when the desired output percentage is reached. Each output can be set between 0% to 100% Override will last for 30 seconds then the output will return to normal operation. Info Button When this button is used, Section 1 and Section 2 analogue output values can be displayed. When pressed the current analogue output percentage is shown on the corresponding Section display. Standby Mode Once in standby all configured stages are turned off and a standby alarm is generated for the given section. The delay applied before a section enters standby is determined by the General Alarm Delay (P-61). Once this delay expires the controller enters standby and a standby alarm is also generated for the relevant section. Section 1 and Section 2 can be placed into standby independently using two separate status inputs or both sections can be placed into standby at the same time from a single status input. P494 determines the Standby configuration. P494 set to 1 = On Controller uses one status input to place both sections into standby. Parameters P-80 to P-91 (Option 7 Std 1 N/O or Option 8 Std 1 N/C) are used to place both sections into standby from a single status input P494 set 0 = Off Controller uses two independent status inputs to place each section into standby independently. Controller uses P-80 to P-91 (Option 7 Std 1 N/O or 8 Std 1 N/C) to put section 1 into standby. Controller uses P-80 to P-91 (Option 9 Std 2 N/O or 10 Std 2 N/C) to put section 2 into standby Revision 2.7 Page 36 of 42

296 Intuitive / Plant Controller Probe Offsets Each probe input, displayed as C-01 to C-08 from the controller display menu, can have an offset applied; Up to ± 20 O C in increments of 0.1 O C. Display Messages The following messages can appear on the display during normal operation. Display HP LP Ft TrAn Ft Sd CP Cd gn Stby Conf trip System status High Pressure alarm Low Pressure alarm Pressure Transducer Fault Fault Low Pressure Shut-down Compressor Fault Compressor Run Fault Condenser Fan Fault General Fault Controller in Standby Configuration / Set up error Discharge Pressure Trip alarm Note 10: If Only 1 Transducer is fitted and the controller is set to a single section type, for example Pack, then Display 1 will show the current suction pressure but Display 2 will show Ft. Transducer input 2 is on by default to allow for the fitment of a transducer for monitoring purposes. If this probe is not fitted then set the parameter Trans2 Span to 0. This will clear the fault alarm. Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system front end. The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # High Pressure Alarms 8 Low Pressure Alarms 9 Low Pressure Shutdown 10 Transducer Faults 6 General Faults 20 Compressor faults 3 Condenser Faults 3 Configuration fault 20 Controller in standby 20 INV Bypass 3 Liquid Level Fault 6 Liquid Level High 4 Liquid Level Low 5 Discharge Trip 20 Float Probe Fault 6 Drop Leg Probe Fault 6 Revision 2.7 Page 37 of 42

297 Intuitive / Plant Controller Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: 24 Vac ±10% or 24 Vdc ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz ±10% Maximum supply current: <1 Amp Typical supply current: 0.3 Amp Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required. A functional earth can be connected if the equipment is located in an electrically noisy environment. Note : The use of centre tapped to earth transformers is not allowed. This is to prevent damage to the transformer and/or controller. The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. RDM advise the use of a suitable external over-current protection device on the Mercury Plant Controller. Warranty may be invalidated due to excess current being unlimited if there are no fuses/circuit breakers installed General Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: Mercury Plant Controller 270mm (L) x 115mm (W) x 50mm (H) Intuitive Plant Controller 280mm (L) x 122mm (W) x 67mm (H) Weight: Mercury Plant Controller 700 Grams Intuitive Plant Controller 750 Grams Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Inputs Probe Input type Digital Input type Comms: 4-20mA Analogue Outputs See Set/change Units for probe types The preferred option is a 0 volt return through a volt free relay or 24 Vac referenced to the supply voltage. If a 24Vac signal is being sourced from the Plant controller power supply then do not ground the Digital Input common rail, this is grounded internally. Ethernet 4-20mA current loop, use the 12 Vdc output to feed the device. 0 to 10 Volts DC or 0/4-20mA, Selected in the Front Panel Menu. A 50mA fuse is recommended for each Analogue output. Relay Ratings, Mercury Plant Controller Relay Ratings, Intuitive Plant Controller The 4-20mA output will not operate correctly if the target device input impedance is > 75Ω The 0-10V output will not operate correctly if the target device input impedance is < 10KΩ 5A/250 Vac/AC1 (Resistive load) 5A/30 Vdc (Resistive load) 2A/250 Vac cosφ=0.3 on N/O contact (Inductive Load) 10A/250 Vac/AC1 (Resistive load) 10A/30 Vdc (Resistive load) 5A/250 Vac cosφ=0.4 Fuse Ratings, Intuitive Plant Controller Relay Fuses 10A Antisurge HRC, 32 x 6.3mm Supply Fuse 2A Antisurge HRC, 32 x 6.3mm Revision 2.7 Page 38 of 42

298 Intuitive / Plant Controller Installation: Mounting on to a DIN rail, Mercury Plant Controller Mount Un-mount Push Up Push Up Revision 2.7 Page 39 of 42

299 Intuitive / Plant Controller Mounting on to a DIN rail, Intuitive Plant Controller Pull out, 2 clicks The Intuitive plant controller has three DIN rail mounting feet which can slide in and out to three different positions, sliding into each position is accompanied by a click which locks the foot into that position. To install the controller onto a DIN mounting rail, from the fully pushed in position slide the top mounting foot out by 2 clicks so that the foot is clear of the DIN rail channel. Slide the bottom two feet out by one click so that they are protruding slightly into the DIN rail channel. The controller can now be inserted onto the DIN rail by inserting the bottom lip of the DIN rail behind the two bottom mounting feet Pull out, 1 click Pull out, 1 click Push in, 2 clicks The controller can now be pushed flat onto the DIN rail and the top foot pushed in 2 clicks to hold the controller in place. Finally, push the bottom two feet in by one click to secure the controller. The mounting feet also have M3 holes for direct mounting where DIN rail is not being used. Push in, 1 click Push in, 1 click Clearances: The controller must have 10mm clearance above the top and 15mm clearance from the sides. Clearance at the front and rear is dependent on the site wiring. There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Cleaning: Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with a slightly damped lint free cloth. Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this set up guide may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 2.7 Page 40 of 42

300 Intuitive / Plant Controller Appendix 1 Typical Transducer Connection For 4-20mA type transducers the diagram below shows the connections to the Plant Controller: - Connection diagram for 4-20mA transducer with 12V dc loop and from a remote device Note: The Earth connection is not necessary unless in an electrically noisy environment. Appendix 2 Supply & Status Input Wiring Appendix four applies to the current version of the Plant controller hardware. Method 1. Uses the 24Vac of the transformer supplying the input voltage; which is returned via a switch (or relay) to the status input signal line. No 0V is required at the status connector. Method 2. Uses a 0V return (from the status connector) to the status signal input. Method 3. Uses a 24Vac signal derived from another transformer (supplying an auxiliary piece of kit) to feed the status input signal line. Note the auxiliary transformer must be referenced to the Plant Controller supply transformer. All transformers that have a connection to the Plant Controller must have their primaries connected to the same phase. Transformer should have fuse fitted in line with 24V input as per diagram. Note: For older versions of hardware (Software V1.6 or earlier). Please see separate data sheet. The use of centre tapped to earth transformers is not allowed. This is to prevent damage to the transformer and/or controller Revision 2.7 Page 41 of 42

301 Intuitive / Plant Controller Revision History Revision Date Changes /04/2011 Introduction of the Intuitive range 0 5Vdc Variable Input / Output option added New feature broadcast Pressure to Mercury IP Module PR0016 Pressure input range increased from 150 Bar to 180 Bar Loader operation enhanced. Equalise Run Times feature added Ability to change status input type via front panel display Revision 2.7 Page 42 of 42

302 Mercury PR0710-MPA PR0722 Intuitive PR0750-MPA PR0775 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini Pack / Condenser Controller Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0710, PR0711, PR0720, PR0721 Resource Data Management Ltd 80 Johnstone Avenue, Hillington Industrial Estate, Glasgow, Scotland G52 4NZ UK +44(0) Switchboard support@resourcedm.com Technical Support sales@resourcedm.com Sales Enquiries

303 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Table of Contents: THE MERCURY & INTUITIVE RANGE... 3 Variants... 3 Configuration... 3 Compatible Network Interfaces... 3 Front Display Features... 4 Connections... 4 Mercury Mk Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options... 5 Input and Output Allocation Table... 5 See Status Input... 5 Alarm relay... 5 Pressure Transducer Connection, Mercury Mk Setting up the controller... 6 Setup through front buttons... 6 Setup Function Menu (Common to all types)... 7 Recommended set-up method... 7 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)... 7 type. Set/view controller type... 7 Inp... 7 PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end)... 7 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 7 Parameter Tables... 8 Parameter Descriptions... 9 Stage Inputs Control - Staged Operation Run-Proof Floating Head Pressure Network Configuration Legacy module Fast Network Address Reset IP Futura module Viewing Input / Output Tables Input/Output table Alarm Messages Network Alarms Probe Offset Test Relay Outputs Remote Commands Specification Power requirements General Relay Specification Inputs Installation Dimensions Mercury Mk Fixing Intuitive Mercury controller Cleaning Disclaimer REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.3 Page 2 of 18

304 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide The Mercury & Intuitive Range From Resource Data Management For Version 1.3 This Mercury Mini Pack controller is primarily intended for use in Pack or Condenser control applications. The controller is available in two hardware platforms, a flush mount model known as the Mercury Mk2 and a DIN rail mounted model known as the Intuitive Mercury, both of which are designed to be used in a control panel or electrical tray. The controller has 5 relay outputs that are configurable as Compressors/Loaders, when set as Type1 or Condenser Fans when set as Type 2. The controller has 5 status inputs which can be assigned as a Stage Input, General Alarm, Standby Mode or Temperature Probe. The 6 th input on a Mercury controller allows for a pressure transducer interface (PR0722) to be used, the Intuitive Mercury controller has a dedicated transducer input. The controllers operate a staged logic control algorithm which allows the user to configure the controller outputs to achieve the desired control. Both the Mercury and Intuitive Mercury controller have the same features with the Intuitive Mercury having additional benefits such as higher rated relays each protected by an integral fuse and fuse protection for the incoming power supply, all connections are plug in socket. The Intuitive also had an internal transducer interface board. There are multiple network interfaces to choose from including Ethernet. The controller supports PT1000, NTC2K, 470R, 700R, 3K, 5K, 6K, NTC2K25, NTC10K or NTC10K(2) temperature probes (note: probe types cannot be mixed) Variants Description Mercury Mk2 Mini-Pack Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Mercury MK2 Transducer Interface Part Number PR0710-MPA PR0750-MPA PR0722 Configuration The controller provides two configuration options: - Display value Controller Type 1 Pack Controller 2 Condenser Controller Compatible Network Interfaces Mercury and Intuitive Mercury controllers are capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network, an RS485 Genus compatible network, an RDM wireless mesh network or they can be used in standalone mode with no network output. To connect to a network you must add the correct communications module. Connecting to any of these communication modules will automatically be detected on power up and will affect the set up screens available to you. Description IP Futura (Single Mercury to IP Interface) RS485 Interface (Single Mercury to RS485 Interface) Mercury IP Switch (IP support for 10 controllers) Mercury IP Switch with Pressure/Humidity Inputs Wireless Mesh Interface (for single Mercury) Part Number PR0016 PR0026 PR0018 PR0018-PHI PR0730 The Intuitive Mercury Controller is supplied as standard with an internal RS232 network card, this allows connection to any of the above external network interfaces. Three alternative internal network cards are also available, these can be supplied factory fitted as an option or purchased separately as an interface kit. Description Intuitive Internal IP Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal RS485 Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal Wireless Mesh Network Card Interface Kit Part Number PR0770 PR0771 PR0772 Revision 1.3 Page 3 of 18

305 Stage Input Grounds Relay 3 N/O Relay 3 Common Relay 3 N/C Relay 4 N/O Relay 4 Common Relay 4 N/C Relay 5 N/O Supply Live Supply Neutral Stage Input 1 Stage Input 2 Stage Input 3 Stage Input 4 Stage Input 5 Transducer Input Relay 1 N/O Relay 1 Common Relay 1 N/C Not Used Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 Common Relay 2 N/O Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Front Display Features LED s: - Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used On-Line Keys Off No network attached Flashing Attempting to Log on to network Steady On-line Service (See Parameter 10 for setup) Enter Up Down Note: Function keys illuminate when pressed, illumination is turned off 20 seconds after the key is used. Press and hold the defrost button to force a manual defrost Alarm Main Display HACCP 4 character LED display, used to Suction or Discharge pressure and status messages. Note the Intuitive Mercury display is Green in colour when lit. Connections Mercury Mk2 Input and Output connections are made to the back of the controller, the RS232 communication port is on the side. The diagram shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Input/Output tables for further details on connections. Revision 1.3 Page 4 of 18

306 N N/C L Relay 3 N/C Relay 3 N/O Relay 3 Common Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 N/O Relay 2 Common Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 N/O Relay 1 Common Not Used Not Used Input 5 Ground Input 4 Ground Input 3 Ground Input 2 Ground Input 1 Ground Relay 5 Common Relay 5 N/O Relay 5 N/C Relay 4 Common Relay 4 N/O Relay 4 N/C Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options RS232 Network Card (Default) The Intuitive Mercury is supplied with an RS232 Network Card fitted as standard. Some example optional network cards are shown below IP Network Card (PR0770) Rotary Address Switches Network Collision LED Network Activity LED Mains Supply vAC 50-60Hz Network Expansion Port RS485 Network Card (PR0771) Not Fitted B- A+ Network Activity LED Ground Ground Screen PR0772 Wireless Mesh Option also available. The network interfaces work in the same way as there external counterparts. Input and Output Allocation Table The following tables indicate; on a controller type basis, the functions of the inputs and outputs. I/O Type 1 Pack Type 2 Condenser Comments Stage Inputs 1-5 Status Input or Temperature Status Input or Temperature Probe See Status Input Probe Transducer Input Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer See Interface Board Relays 1-5 Compressor or Loader Fan Wire to N/O Contacts Alarm relay The alarm relay is assigned automatically to the first free relay that has not been utilised in the stage programming. At first power on this will be Relay 1 until programming of the output stage is complete. The relay is energised with no alarm and de-energised when in alarm. Any alarm condition will activate the alarm relay. Revision 1.3 Page 5 of 18

307 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Pressure Transducer Connection, Mercury Mk2 The Mercury Mk2 controller uses an external 4-20ma interface board (PR0722) which allows a pressure transducer to be connected to the probe 6 input. Pressure transducers must be of the current loop 4-20mA type. Excitation voltage (12 Vdc) is provided for the transducer. The range of the transducer will vary according to the application, the Span and Offset parameters allow for this. Mercury Controller RS232 Socket Network Interface Interface Board PR0722 Mercury Probe 6 Input Probe 6 Ground 4-20mA Input 12V Supply Pressure Transducer The RJ45 socket labelled as Mercury Controller on the interface board connects to the Mercury Mini Pack controllers RS232 Comms port. A standard CAT5 patch lead should be used. Maximum cable length 0.1m. The Connector labelled Probe INP connects to Input 6 on the Mercury Mini Pack controllers Probe 6 input. Maximum cable length 0.1m. NOTE: With the Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack PR0750-MPA and Pressure Transducer Interface Board PR0722. Intuitive Mercury Mini- Pack PR0750-MPA has to have an RS232 Card fitted Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons Direct access by PC or palm top into the controller s RS232 comms port. This requires a software package available on the RDM website Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Manager. Across an IP network. (Current controller IP address required) Setup through front buttons ENTER UP DOWN To enter setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Revision 1.3 Page 6 of 18

308 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Setup Function Menu (Common to all types) Display Option Explained in Explained in Display Option Paragraph Paragraph IO View Inputs / Outputs and States Input / output table net Set/view network configuration Network Configuration PArA Set/View Parameters Set view parameters SoFt View software version Unit Probe type and Set View Unit OFSt Probe Offset Probe Offset Celsius/Fahrenheit option inp Sets 4-20mA or 0-10V Input test Test Outputs Test Outputs type Set/View Controller Type Set/view controller type ESC Exit Setup mode rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Clock) Recommended set-up method If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set type. Set/view controller type a. From the function menu scroll to select type, press enter b. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through case/coldroom configuration types. (see configuration table on page 3) c. Press enter. d. Scroll to select ESC e. Press enter Controller type configuration is now set Inp The INP menu option is used to configure the controller to operate with either a 4 20mA or 0 10V input signal. Please note this can only be used on the Intuitive Mercury Controller, on the Mercury Mk2 controller only a 4-20mA signal is supported so this value should always be set to 0. Set to 0 for 4 20mA input Set to 1 for 0 10V Input Real Time Clock PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P- 01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 for PT1000 Celsius 1 for PT1000 Fahrenheit 2 for NTC2K Celsius 3 for NTC2K Fahrenheit 4 for 470R Celsius 5 for 470R Fahrenheit 6 for 700R Celsius 7 for 700R Fahrenheit 8 for 3K Celsius 9 for 3K Fahrenheit 10 for NTC2K25 Celsius 11 for NTC2K25 Fahrenheit 12 for 5K Celsius 13 for 5K Fahrenheit 14 for 6K Celsius 15 for 6K Fahrenheit 16 for NTC10K Celsius 17 for NTC10K Fahrenheit 18 for NTC10K(2) Celsius (USA NTC10K) 19 for NTC10K(2) Fahrenheit (USA NTC10K) Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. Note If Probe type selected is degrees Celsius then Control Pressure will be in Bar. If Probe type selected is degrees Fahrenheit then Control Pressure will be in PSI. This function is now complete Revision 1.3 Page 7 of 18

309 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Parameter Tables Not all parameters apply to all controller types, for example P-19 is Condenser Offset which only applies to the Condenser Controller (Type 2), this parameter will not appear if the controller is set up as a type 1 (Pack Controller). In the following table, the type columns on the right hand side will be greyed out if that parameter does not apply to that controller type. Number Parameter Range Bar (Psi) Step Units Default Bar (Psi) Type 1 Pack Type 2 Condenser P-01 Transducer Span* (Pack) -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 13.8 (200) Transducer Span* (Condenser) 3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 34.4 (499) P-02 Transducer Offset* -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 0.0 (14) P-03 Target (Pack) -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 2.1 (30) Target (Condenser) -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 12.7 (184) P-04 Target Above -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 0.5 (7) P-05 Target Below -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 0.5 (7) P-06 Stages P-07 Stage On Delay 00:00-60:00 00:01 mm:ss 00:10 P-08 Stage Off Delay 00:00-60:00 00:01 mm:ss 00:10 P-09 Fail Off / On 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 P-10 Service Time K Hrs 60 P-11 Run Proof 0 = Off 1 = On 1 0 P-12 Optimisation Limit -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 2.0 (29) P-15 Control Type 0 = Fixed, 1 = Floating 1 0 P-16 Probe Select 0 = Probe 1,1 = Probe = Probe 3, 3 = Probe 4 4 = Probe 5 P-17 Low Limit -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 8.2 (119) P-18 High Limit -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 23.0 (334) P-19 Condenser Offset o C 6.0 P-44 Press 0 o C / 32 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 6.0 (87) P-45 Press 10 o C / 50 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 8.2 (119) P-46 Press 20 o C / 68 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 10.9 (158) P-47 Press 30 o C / 86 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 14.2 (206) P-48 Press 40 o C / 104 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 18.1 (262) P-49 Press 50 o C / 122 o F -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 23.0 (334) P-50 Stage 1 Relay 1 0 = Off. 1 = On 1 0 P-54 P-55 P-59 P-60 P-64 P-65 P-69 P-70 Stage 1 Relay 5 Stage 2 Relay 1 Stage 2 Relay 5 Stage 3 Relay 1 Stage 3 Relay 5 Stage 4 Relay 1 Stage 4 Relay 5 Stage 5 Relay 1 0 = Off. 1 = On = Off. 1 = On = Off. 1 = On = Off. 1 = On 1 0 P-74 Stage 5 Relay 5 P-20 Alarm Delay 00:00-99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 P-21 HP Alarm -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 4.1 (59) P-22 LP Alarm -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 0.6 (9) P-23 LP Shutdown -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi 0.4 (6) P-30 Status Fault 1 (Pack) 0 = Unused, 1 = Probe = Comp N/O, 3 = Comp N/C 4 = Gen N/O, 5 = Gen N/C P-34 Status Fault 5 (Pack) 6 = Std N/O, 7 = Std N/C P-30 Status Fault 1 (Condenser) 0 = Unused, 1 = Probe = Cond N/O, 3 = Cond N/C 4 = Gen N/O, 5 = Gen N/C P-34 Status Fault 5 (Condenser) 6 = Std N/O, 7 = Std N/C P-40 Status Fault Delay 00:00-60:00 00:01 mm:ss 00:10 P-41 General Fault Delay 00:00-60:00 00:01 mm:ss 00:10 dflt Restore default values Revision 1.3 Page 8 of 18

310 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide * Span and Offset allows for the full range of the transducer to be used by the controller. Span is the full range of the transducer Offset is the value below zero. Example: Danfoss AKS 33 with range: -1 bar to 12 bar Span would be 190 (13 bar) Offset would be -15 (-1 bar) Parameter Descriptions Number Parameter Description P-01 Transducer Span Range of the transducer P-02 Transducer Offset Transducer value below zero P-03 Target Pressure target, control will try to maintain this pressure P-04 Target Above P-03 Set-point above the target, used to obtain a dead-band P-05 Target Below P-03 Set-point above the target, used to obtain a dead-band P-06 Stages Number of stages in the system P-07 Stage On Delay Delay time between stages on P-08 Stage Off Delay Delay time between stages off P-09 Fail Off / On The following will occur in the event of pressure transducer fault. If set to On then all Compressors or Fans will turn On in the event of a transducer failure. If set to Off then all Compressors or Fans will turn Off in the event of a transducer failure. P-10 Service Time Time controller is running (in 1000 x hours) before the service icon (Spanner icon) comes on. Reset the spanner icon to off by changing this parameter to 0 and then back to the desired service interval. P-11 Run Proof See section : Run Proof P-12 Optimisation Limit This is an offset that is added to the target pressure when using the Data Manager Energy feature Pack Optimisation. For example if target pressure is 2.1 Bar and Optimise Limit set to 0.5 Bar. The remote optimise command will only be able to optimise the current suction setpoint up to a maximum of 2.6 Bar P-15 Control Type Selects between Fixed or Floating. For Condenser control only. Fixed uses the set-point parameter as its target (P-03) Floating uses the temperature of a selected probe converted to a pressure as the set-point P-16 Probe Select Selects the probe that measures the floating temperature (Note : This would be fitted to the Air On of the Condenser) See note : Floating Head Pressure P-17 Low Limit Stops the floating pressure target from going below this level P-18 High Limit Stops the floating pressure target from going above this level P-19 Condenser Offset Allows for an offset to be added to the ambient temperature probe used in the floating set-point feature. P-20 Alarm Delay Delay before HP and LP alarms are signalled P-21 HP Alarm HP alarm set-point P-22 LP Alarm LP alarm set-point, stage off when reached P-23 LP Shutdown Point at which LP Shutdown alarm is generated. Note as soon as the LP Shutdown setpoint is reached any Compressor/Condenser stages, for the associated section, still operating will go off immediately and does not wait for the LP Shutdown alarm to be created. P-30 Status Fault 1 Used to select the type of input required P-34 Status Fault 5 P-40 Status Fault Delay Time delay before status faults are activated P-41 General Fault Delay Time delay before general faults are activated P-44 Press 0 o C / 32 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-45 Press 10 o C / 50 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-46 Press 20 o C / 68 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-47 Press 30 o C / 86 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-48 Press 40 o C / 104 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-49 Press 50 o C / 122 o F Used to program the temperature to pressure conversion for floating pressure use. P-50 Stage 1 Relay 1 Select the output for this stage P-74 Stage 5 Relay 5 dflt Restore default values Restores factory set points Revision 1.3 Page 9 of 18

311 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Stage Inputs Inputs 1-5 can be set up as the following: Value Type Description 0 Unused Input is not used 1 Probe Set input as a probe input. For use with Condenser Float feature or as a monitor probe with no alarm. 2 Condenser/Compressor When selected apply 0V return signal to generate Condenser/Compressor Fault. Normally Open 3 Condenser/Compressor When selected remove 0V return signal to generate Condenser/Compressor Fault. Normally Closed 4 General Normally Open When selected apply 0V return signal to generate General Fault. 5 General Normally Closed When selected remove 0V return signal to generate General Fault. 6 Standby Normally Open When selected apply 0V return signal to place controller into standby and generate Standby alarm. 7 Standby Normally Closed When selected remove 0V return to place controller into standby and generate Standby alarm. Control - Staged Operation Staged operation requires the output relays to be mapped to a particular stage. Each stage, there are 5 stages, has to have at least 1 relay assigned for the controller to operate correctly. Use P-06 to define the total number of stages required. Use parameters P-50 to P- 74 to assign relays to each stage. More than one relay can be assigned to a particular stage. Relays can be assigned to a number of stages. As the pressure rises above the target setpoint, plus the target above value, the controller will enter Stage 1 after the stage on delay (P-07) has expired. At this point any relay assigned in Stage 1 will come on and the stage on delay timer will be reset. If the pressure remains above the setpoint, plus the target above value and the stage on delay has expired for a second time the controller will enter stage 2. At this point any relay assigned in Stage 2 will come on. Note if a relay has been assigned in Stage 1 but not used in Stage 2 then it will go off at this point. The reverse occurs when the pressure falls below the setpoint plus the target below value. The controller will step down the stages using the stage off delay (P-08) until all stages are off. For example if set to Pack and the pack has 4 Compressors the following could be set: - Stage1 : Rly 1 =On, Stage2: Rly 1 and Rly 2 = On, Stage3: Rly 1,Rly 2 and Rly 3 = On. Stage4: Rly 1, Rly 2, Rly 3 and Rly 4 = On. This would stage relay 1 through to four on after the appropriate stage on delay if the pressure is above the target setpoint and differentials. Note : In the above example Relay 5 would be assigned as the Alarm Relay Please note when the Condenser type is selected only the number of condenser stages is required. Run-Proof This is a global parameter if set to on then the Status fault inputs are used to prove that compressors are running. Configure the status inputs, using either Compressor Normally Closed or Compressor Normally Open, which correspond with each relay output. If the relay output is energised and the run proof signal isn t returned within the specified time period then the compressor relay will go off, the compressor will be taken out of the control strategy until the run proof has been reset and a Compressor fault alarm will be created. Note the compressor fault alarm can be re-aliased in the Data Manager to Run Proof or similar. The run-proof feature uses the status fault delay (P-40) and all run proof signals must be returned within this delay period. Run proofs are used with compressor (Comp) stages only. To reset the run proof for any stage, after an inspection has been carried out, and return the compressor back into the control strategy use the display menu item test. The override option is used to manually turn on the compressor output. If the proof signal is returned within the allotted time delay the compressor is allocated back into the control strategy. If the proof isn t returned the compressor relay will go off and remain out of the control strategy. Another process used to reset a run proof alarm is by changing parameter P-11 from 1 to 0 (On to Off). This clears all run proof alarms on all compressors which are currently out of the control logic due to run proof feature. Changing P-11 from 0 back to 1 (Off to On). The compressor(s) will then be available for selection by the control logic. If the compressor is selected by the control strategy and the run proof signal is then not returned within the allotted time delay then it will fail and will be removed from the control logic again. Alternatively if the controller is power cycled then it will clear out any current run proof alarms. Floating Head Pressure When condenser control is achieved using the Floating Head pressure mode the temperature to pressure parameters must be used to profile a pressure curve from the air on temperature probe for the condenser (P-44 to P-49). The value read from the temperature probe is added to a Condenser Offset (P-19) and then converted to a pressure. This converted pressure replaces the Target Setpoint (P-03) as the target pressure and P-03 is only used as a default; for instance when the probe is disconnected or develops a fault. Low and high pressure levels allow for a lower and upper limit to be set for the target pressure range and the target pressure can never be any value out with this range. The air on temperature can be read from probe inputs 1 to 5 and is settable via parameter (P-15). Revision 1.3 Page 10 of 18

312 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). To set the controller onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module. This is either a: Legacy module 485 Legacy, or IP Futura Mercury Switch 485 legacy support the following protocol: - Genus Connecting a 485 legacy module to the controller will govern which set up screens are made available. Display 485t 485A gadd * rlog * CLrA * ESC Option 485 Network Type 485 Address/Name Show underlying network address assigned to Controller Re-log the controller back onto the network Clear the address/name from the controller Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu * These options are only available when the network type is set to Genus compatible. The 485t option shows a value representing the network type. The possible values are: Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) The 485A option shows a value representing either the name of the controller in a Genus compatible network. The value shown is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible network using the name RC05-6. The following options are also available when the network type is set to Genus compatible. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. To enter this mode, hold the Enter, Up and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message CLrA appears on the display. CLrA is the first option in the menu consisting of the following options: Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation, if the network type is set to Genus compatible. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. If the network type is not set to Genus compatible then the ClrA message will not flash and the ESC option can be used to exit the menu. Revision 1.3 Page 11 of 18

313 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide IP Futura module In an IP system there are two options IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Manager or Data Director) IP-L To configure the communication module for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below IP-r Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Revision 1.3 Page 12 of 18

314 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Viewing Input / Output Tables Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. 1. IO. View Inputs / Outputs and States a. From the function menu, select IO, press enter b. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below Input/Output table Number IO Range Bar (Psi) Step Units I-01 Suction Pressure / Discharge Pressure -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi I-10 Probe 1-49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 o C/ o F I-11 Probe 2-49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 o C/ o F I-12 Probe 3-49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 o C/ o F I-13 Probe 4-49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 o C/ o F I-14 Probe 5-49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 o C/ o F I-20 Status 1 0 = OK. 1 = Alarm. 2 = Unused I-21 Status 2 0 = OK. 1 = Alarm. 2 = Unused I-22 Status 3 0 = OK. 1 = Alarm. 2 = Unused I-23 Status 4 0 = OK. 1 = Alarm. 2 = Unused I-24 Status 5 0 = OK. 1 = Alarm. 2 = Unused O-01 Relay 1 0 = Off. 1 = On O-02 Relay 2 0 = Off. 1 = On O-03 Relay 3 0 = Off. 1 = On O-04 Relay 4 0 = Off. 1 = On O-05 Relay 5 0 = Off. 1 = On O-11 Optimise (Pack) Float (Condenser) -3.4 to 50.0 (-49.3 to 725) 0.1 Bar/Psi O-21 Run Time K Hrs O-22 Stage Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury Display, Display Message System Status HP High Pressure LP Low Pressure Sd Low Shutdown Tran Transducer Fault Co 1 Compressor / Condenser 1 Fault Co 2 Compressor / Condenser 2 Fault Co 3 Compressor / Condenser 3 Fault Co 4 Compressor / Condenser 4 Fault Co 5 Compressor / Condenser 5 Fault gen 1 General Fault 1 Display Message System Status gen 2 General Fault 2 gen 3 General Fault 3 gen 4 General Fault 4 gen 5 General Fault 5 Prb 1 Temperature Probe 1 Fault Prb 2 Temperature Probe 2 Fault Prb 3 Temperature Probe 3 Fault Prb 4 Temperature Probe 4 Fault Prb 5 Temperature Probe 5 Fault Stby Controller in Standby Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) High Pressure 8 Low Pressure 9 Low Shutdown 10 Transducer Fault 6 Probe 1 (Fault) 6 Probe 2 (Fault) 6 Probe 3 (Fault) 6 Probe 4 (Fault) 6 Probe 5 (Fault) 6 Comp / Cond 1 3 Alarm text Type # (index) Comp / Cond 2 3 Comp / Cond 3 3 Comp / Cond 4 3 Comp / Cond 5 3 General Fault 1 20 General Fault 2 20 General Fault 3 20 General Fault 4 20 General Fault 5 20 Controller in Standby 20 Revision 1.3 Page 13 of 18

315 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Probe Offset This feature allows each probe value to be modified by an offset to take into account long cable runs. Offset values are from -10 O C (- 18 O F) to +10 O C (+18 O F) and on a channel basis. Example C1 = Probe 1. Test Relay Outputs Selecting the test option from display software menu allows for the relay outputs to be tested. It can also be used to reset a compressor that has been locked out after a Run Fail by selecting the relay and forcing it on and then off again. This renters the compressor back into the control algorithm for selection. See Run Proof for further information. Remote Commands The following commands can be used by a Data Builder program: - Command Value to send Description Optimisation Haccp Command Button Command Stay Zero Up Down None HACCP LED OFF HACCP LED On HACCP LED Flashes Buttons backlights Off Buttons backlights On Buttons Backlights Flash Use an Analogue Out block configured to the controller name and in the value field type in the command you require. Use a Setting block as the input to the Analogue Out block to send the Value. See Example on the right, which turns on the HACCP LED. Revision 1.3 Page 14 of 18

316 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Specification Power requirements Mercury Mk2 Mini Pack Controller PR0710-MPA Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Controller PR0750-MPA Supply Voltage Range Vac ±10% Vac ±10% Supply Frequency Hz Hz Maximum supply current 5.2 Amps (when relay 5 is fully loaded) 2 Amps Typical supply current <1 Amp <1 Amp General Operating temperature range +5 0 C to C +5 0 C to C Storage temperature range C to C C to C Environmental Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Size 78mm (W) x 36mm (H) x 110mm (D) 157mm (W) x 67mm (H) x 120 (D) Approx Weight 170 grams 500 grams Safety EN61010 EN61010 EMC EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted Supply Fuse The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such Built in fuse holder, fuse 2A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm as: - Fuse: 6.3A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB 6A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN (Note: controller has integral 2A fuse) Relay Fuse Not Fitted 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Relay Specification Relays 1-4 Mechanical Exclusive common Max current 6A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 2A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4).10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac, 30V dc 250Vac. 30V dc Relay Fuse N/A 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Relay 5 Mechanical Type (M) Common connected to supply live Relay 5 Mechanical Type (M) Exclusive common Max current 3A (non inductive), COS =0.4 2A (inductive load) 200,000 operations 10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac (Internal supply) 250Vac. 30V dc (external supply) For compliance with the LVD, relays 3, 4 and 5 commons must be at the same potential as the supply voltage All relays are independent and can operate at different potentials to the supply voltage.! Warning: Relay 5 output has hazardous voltages (Supply input voltage potential) This does not apply to the Intuitive Mercury controller Revision 1.3 Page 15 of 18

317 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Inputs Input resistance: Input type Comms: 3.01K Ohms (for PTC or NTC type probes) PT1000 or NTC2K or NTC2K25 or NTC10K (selectable) RS232 with flow control Installation Panel Cut-out and Clearances Mercury Mk2 (Flush mount controller) Fixing The controller is fixed by sliding the 2 plastic retaining clips up to rear of the panel. These clips have a ratchet action and can be removed by holding in the clip sides and sliding back. There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Dimensions Mercury Mk2 Revision 1.3 Page 16 of 18

318 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury controller Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Three clips fix the Intuitive Mercury securely to DIN rail. Pull each clip until it clicks to remove the controller. Each clip has a mounting hole to provide an alternative fixing mechanism to DIN mounting. Cleaning Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with slightly damped lint free cloth. Disclaimer The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of this product or document. Revision 1.3 Page 17 of 18

319 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Mini-Pack Installation Guide Revision History Revision Date Changes /07/2011 Current Issue Revision 1.3 Page 18 of 18

320 PT1000 Mercury Temperature 6-5 M/E Installation Probe Datasheet guide RDM PT1000 Temperature Probe (Part Number: PR017X) Physical Dimensions 52.50mm Ø metre Ø 6.00 Features Unique internal construction using surface mount components inside a plastic sub-frame ensures complete consistency of sensor position inside the tube. Probe tip housing potted with heat conductive paste for good thermal conductivity. PT1000 element internally de-coupled with 1000pF capacitor. Nickel-plated brass tube for good thermal conductivity. Back filled with epoxy and vacuumed to eliminate air pockets. Noryl over-mould to secure the cable. Specification Nominal resistance: Tolerance: Accuracy: Meets: Temperature Range: Temperature coefficient: Long term stability: Cable: 1000 Ohm at 0 o C 0.5% DIN EN 60751, class B +/- 0.5 Degrees Celsius DIN EN60751 (according to IEC751) -40 o C to + 80 o C TCR = 3850 ppm/k max. R0 -drift 0.06% after 1000 h at 130 o C UL 2464, AWG 24, white/red conductors, white sleeve Resource Data Management 80 Johnstone Avenue Hillington Glasgow G52 4NZ Tel: Fax: sales@resourcedm.com Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this data sheet may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document.

321 PT1000 Mercury Temperature 6-5 M/E Installation Probe Datasheet guide Ordering Information Part Number PR0170 PT1000 6m Air Probe White cable / no printing Part Number PR PT1000 6m Air Probe No1 White cable / black printing (A1) Part Number PR PT1000 6m Air Probe No2 White cable / black printing (A2) Part Number PR PT1000 6m Air Probe No3 White cable / black printing (A3) Part Number PR PT1000 6m Air Probe No4 White cable / black printing (A4) Part Number PR PT1000 6m Air Probe No5 White cable / black printing (A5) The black text uniquely identifies each probe allowing an engineer to quickly pinpoint a given probe. For example A1 could be air on probe 1, A2 could be air off probe 2 etc. Part Number PR0171 Air Probe 6m (Box of 5 pieces, numbered 1-5) Part Number PR Air Probe 6m (Box of 5 pieces, probe No. 1) Part Number PR Air Probe 6m (Box of 5 pieces, probe No. 2) Part Number PR0172 Air Probe 6m (Box of 100 pieces, numbered 1-5) Part Number PR Air Probe 6m (Box of 100 pieces, probe No. 1) Part Number PR Air Probe 6m (Box of 100 pieces, probe No. 2) Part Number PR0173 Part Number PR0174 PT1000 Probe Set (2 Air Probes (1&2), 2 Pipe Probes (3&4)) 20 x PT1000 Probe Set (2 Air Probes (1&2), 2 Pipe Probes (3&4)) Resource Data Management 80 Johnstone Avenue Hillington Glasgow G52 4NZ Tel: Fax: sales@resourcedm.com Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this data sheet may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document.

322 PT1000 Temperature Mercury 6-5 Pipe M/E Probe Installation Datasheet guide RDM PT1000 Temperature Pipe Probe Physical Dimensions: Features: Unique internal construction using surface mount components inside a sub-frame ensures complete consistency of sensor position inside the housing. Probe housing potted with heat conductive paste for good thermal conductivity. PT1000 internal element Shaped base (curved) for close pipe mounting. Internal spring to take up wear of the tie-wrap Back filled with epoxy and vacuumed to eliminate air pockets. Specification: Nominal resistance: Tolerance: Accuracy: Meets: Temperature Range: Temperature coefficient: Long term stability: Cable: 1000 Ohm at 0 o C 0.5% DIN EN 60751, class B +/- 0.5 Degrees Celsius DIN EN60751 (according to IEC751) -40 o C to + 80 o C TCR = 3850 ppm/k max. R0 -drift 0.06% after 1000 h at 130 o C UL 2464, AWG 24, white/red conductors, cream sleeve Contact RDM Sales office for part numbers and price. Resource Data Management 80 Johnstone Avenue Hillington Glasgow G52 4NZ Tel: Fax: sales@resourcedm.com Please note: The specifications of the product detailed on this data sheet may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document.

323 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Humidistat I/O Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0444 PR0445 (Display) Revision 1.2 Page 1 of 14

324 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Table of Contents: Types...3 Front Panel Features...3 Display:...3 Buttons:...3 Network LED:...3 LEDs:...3 Inputs...3 Connections...4 Display Connection:...4 Inputs Jumper Settings:...4 Setting up the controller...5 Setup Mode...5 Setup through front buttons... 5 Setup Function Menu...5 Recommended set-up method... 6 type.view controller type...6 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 6 Probe Types...6 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)...6 Network Configuration...7 IP-L (Local IP Address)...7 IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server)... 7 Operation:...8 Viewing...9 Input/Output...9 Specification...10 Power requirements:...10 Relays...10 Inputs:...10 Installation:...11 Wiring:...11 Fixing:...11 Clearances:...11 Fuse:...12 Cleaning:...12 Disclaimer:...12 APPENDIX APPENDIX 2 DATA BUILDER EXAMPLES...14 Revision 1.2 Page 2 of 14

325 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Humidistat I/O Types From Resource Data Management This controller is pre-configured as a Remote I/O unit. It has no intrisic function, it s inputs and outputs are avaialable to be used by the Data Builder program in a Data Manager or Data Director. Front Panel Features 4 Character LCD Button 1 Button 4 Display: Button 2 Button 3 The display fits a standard UK single socket patress. The display values can be selected by changing the display parameter. Buttons: Button 1, 2,3 and 4 are available for use. Network LED: Green LED used to indicate network Status: LEDs: Off No network attached Flashing Attempting to Log on to network Steady On-line The amber and red LED s are avaialble for use. Inputs There are 4 input channels: - 1. Probe, Humidity, 4-20mA or Voltage CT 2. Probe, Humidity, 4-20mA or Voltage CT 3. Probe or Voltage CT 4. Probe or Voltage CT Revision 1.2 Page 3 of 14

326 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Connections Analogue Inputs Channel 1 Input Channel 1 Ground Channel 2 Input Channel 2 Ground Channel 3 Input Channel 3 Ground Channel 4 Input Channel 4 Ground Remove plastic cover for CH 3 and CH4 Jumpers CH1 Jumper CH2 Jumper Network ID Switch 3 Network ID Switch 2 Network ID Switch 1 Display Connector Not Connected SDO (Data Out) SCL (Clock) GND SDI (Data In) +5V (Vcc) Mains Neutral Mains Live Relays Relay 3 Normally Open Relay 3 Common Relay 2 Normally Open Relay 2 Common Relay 2 Normally Closed Relay 1 Normally Open Relay 1 Common Relay 1 Normally Closed Do not connect an earth. Display Connection: Controller SDO (Serial Data Out) Data In SCL (Serial Clock) Clock GND GND SDI (Serial Data In) Data Out +5V (Vcc) Vcc Display Inputs Jumper Settings: 4-20mA Humidity Temperature Sensor Probe Channel 1 Input selection Jumper Channel 2 Input selection Jumper Jumper off for Voltage CT s Jumper off for Voltage CT s Channel 3 & 4 Input selection Jumper Jumper off for voltage CT s, on for Probes. Note: It is very important for the normal operation of the Humidistat controller that these jumpers are set to the correct position for the inputs being used. Revision 1.2 Page 4 of 14

327 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved by 2 ways Through the front mounted buttons on the display Through the RDM Data Director or Data Manager Setup Mode Setup through front buttons To enter the setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the menu items. Setup Function Menu Display Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Input and Output States IO Unit View or change Units and Probe types Unit type View controller type type rtc View or change the Real Time Clock RTC net View or change the network settings Net SoFt View the Software version ESC Escape the menu Revision 1.2 Page 5 of 14

328 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Recommended set-up method type.view controller type a. From the function menu scroll to select type, press enter This controller has 1 type only and it cannot be changed. Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 = PT1000 o C 1 = PT1000 o F 2 = NTC2K o C 3 = NTC2K o F 4 = NTC2K25 o C 5 = NTC2K25 o F Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. Not that the Display temperature sensor is fixed as a PT1000 type. Probe type and units are now set rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set Revision 1.2 Page 6 of 14

329 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network ID. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is connected to the site network. Set the 3 rotary network switches to an appropriate setting, the controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong ID has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller ID by setting the ID to 0-0-0, power cycle and then re-enter the correct ID. This controller does not require an external communications module. IP-L (Local IP Address) To configure the controller for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r (IP Address issued by the DHCP server) To configure the controller for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The controller should then be connected to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Revision 1.2 Page 7 of 14

330 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Operation: There is no intrinsic function in this controller. Below is a list of the relevant Input and Output commands for use with the Data Builder Values for analogue input block values: Temperature returns display temperature sensor value Humidity returns display humidity sensor value Temperature 1 returns Channel 1 probe value Temperature 2 returns Channel 2 probe value Temperature 3 returns Channel 3 probe value Temperature 4 returns Channel 4 probe value Channel 1 CT returns Channel 1 CT value Channel 2 CT returns Channel 2 CT value Channel 3 CT returns Channel 3 CT value Channel 4 CT returns Channel 4 CT value Humidity 1 returns Channel 1 humidity value Humidity 2 returns Channel 2 humidity value Chan 1 (4-20) returns Channel mA % value Chan 12 (4-20) returns Channel mA % value Button 1 returns Button 1 value 0=off, 1=on Button 2 returns Button 2 value 0=off, 1=on Button 3 returns Button 3 value 0=off, 1=on Button 4 returns Button 4 value 0=off, 1=on Values for Digital Input block values: Plant 1 returns Plant 1 status (0V return = on) Plant 2 returns Plant 2 status (0V return = on) Plant 3 returns Plant 3 status (0V return = on) Plant 4 returns Plant 4 status (0V return = on) Values for Digital Output block values Relay 1 controls relay 1 Relay 2 controls relay 2 Relay 3 controls relay 3 Values for Analogue Out block values Display 1 Sends value to display 1 Display 2 Sends value to display 2 Display 3 Sends value to display 3 Led State 0 = Red and Amber Led s off Led State 1 = Red LED on Led State 2 = Amber LED on Led State 3 = Amber and Red LED s on Button 1 0 = Falied to read button 1 2 = Read button 1 ok Button 2 0 = Falied to read button 2 2 = Read button 2 ok Button 3 0 = Falied to read button 3 2 = Read button 3 ok Button 4 0 = Falied to read button 4 2 = Read button 4 ok Revision 1.2 Page 8 of 14

331 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs. Input/Output 1. IO. View Inputs / Outputs and States a. From the function menu, select IO, press enter b. You can now scroll through the IO tables as set out below. The tables you view will depend on the controller type configuration. Number IO Range (dependant on probe type) Step Units o C ( o F ) I-10 Temperature (Display) ( ) 1 Deg I-11 Humidity (Display) %rh I-30 CH 1 Temperature ( ) 1 I-31 CH 2 Temperature ( ) 1 I-32 CH 3 Temperature ( ) 1 I-33 CH 4 Temperature ( ) 1 I-41 CH 1 CT I-42 CH 2 CT I-43 CH 3 CT I-44 CH 4 CT I-50 CH 1 Humidity I-51 CH 2 Humidity I-60 CH mA I-61 CH mA O-01 Relay 1 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-02 Relay 2 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - O-03 Relay 3 0 = off, 1 = on 1 - S-01 Control State 0 = off 1 = Stablise 2 = Normal - - Revision 1.2 Page 9 of 14

332 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Specification Power requirements: Supply Voltage Range: Vac ±10% Supply Frequency: Hz Maximum supply current: 0.2 Amp (Not including Relay current) Typical supply current: <0.1 Amp (Not including Relay current) Operating temperature range: +5 0 C to C Operating Humidity: 80% maximum Storage temperature range: C to C Environmental: Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, Pollution Degree 1, Installation Category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage Size: Weight: Safety: EN61010 EMC: EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation: There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation: No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted. The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 3A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 3A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN The host equipment must provide adequate protection against contact to hazardous live parts. Relays Relay 1: contacts: - N/C, N/O and Common Max current relay 1: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 1: 260Vac (external supply) Relay 2: contacts: - N/C, N/O and Common Max current relay 2: 6A (non inductive) Max Voltage relay 2: 260Vac (external supply) Relay 3: contacts: - N/O and Common Max current relay 3: 6A (non inductive). Max Voltage relay 3: 260Vac (external supply) For compliance with the LVD, supplys to all three relays must be the same voltage. Inputs: CH1: CH2: CH3: CH4: Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital), 4-20mA, Humidity Sensor or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital), 4-20mA, Humidity Sensor or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital) or CT Selectable, PT1000 (also used for Digital) or CT Revision 1.2 Page 10 of 14

333 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Installation: Wiring: CH1 & CH2 mode selectors Network ID switches Relays Mains Input Inputs Display Connector Fixing: The Humidistat Display is designed to fix on to a single socket patress, either wall or flush mount. The Humidistat Controller fits a standard DIN rail, or the clips can be extended to allow for a surface screw fixing. Clearances: There are no clearance rules associated with this controller. Revision 1.2 Page 11 of 14

334 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Fuse: The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such as: - Fuse: 1A 110Vac or 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB: 1A, 110Vac or240 Vac Type C conforming to BS EN Cleaning: Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the top by wiping with slightly damped lint free cloth. Disclaimer: The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of or document. Revision 1.2 Page 12 of 14

335 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Appendix 1 Apparent Temperature for Values of Room Temperature and Relative Humidity 0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 40% 45% 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% Revision 1.2 Page 13 of 14

336 Humidistat Mercury 6-5 Installation M/E Installation & User guide Guide Appendix 2 Data Builder Examples Example of button use in the Data Builder: - An Analogue In block is used to obtain the button value from the controller. The button value is 0 when the button is not pressed. When the button is pressed, the Humidistat display will indicate tdb1 (for button 1). A value of 1 is now sent to the Data Builder. The Data Builder program muliplies this value by 2 and sends the result (2 if it reads sucessfully) back to the controller via the Analogue Out block. When the controller receives this value, it indicates Pass (or fail if it doesn t get a 2 back). The ouput of the multiply block is connected to an equals block, and when the output is 2, the equals block outputs a true condition. This true condition (Logic 1) is used to clock the D Latch The D Latch and the Not gate are arranged as a toggle function hence at each button press, the output of the D Latch changes state. Revision 1.2 Page 14 of 14

337 Product Mercury 6-5 Probe M/E Datasheet Installation guide Product Probe RDM Product Probe is a standard thermistor probe which has been thermally insulated with material that affects the time/temperature response. When used in a refrigeration display cabinet, the Product Probe will react in a similar manner to produce in that cabinet, thus giving a more realistic representation of the actual produce temperature. 2 types are available: - PR0206 PT1000 PR0222 NTC2K The Product Probe has a magnetic base for display case shelf mounting. Both products are supplied with a 1.5m lead and a 3 way connector. Specifications: Operating Temperature range: Relative Humidity: Weight: Size: -42 o C to +60 o C 10% to 95% rh non-condensing 0.3kg 50mm H x 75mm W x 75mm L Resistance values PR0206 PR0222 Same as a PT1000 probe Same as a NTC2K A 5m lead with mating bulkhead connector for the above products is also available: PR0220 Resource Data Management Tel: Please note: The specifications of the product 80 Johnstone Avenue Fax: detailed on this data sheet may change without Hillington sales@resourcedm.com notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or Glasgow indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, G52 4NZ performance or misuse of or document.

338 Product Mercury 6-5 Probe M/E Datasheet Installation guide 1 Product Probe Time/Temp Response Deg C Time (secs) The above graph shows the normalised Time/Temperature response The temperature change follows the following equations : - Rising Deg C = 1 e T 60 Falling Deg C = e T 60 Where T =time Resource Data Management Tel: Please note: The specifications of the product 80 Johnstone Avenue Fax: detailed on this data sheet may change without Hillington sales@resourcedm.com notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages, directly or Glasgow indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, G52 4NZ performance or misuse of or document.

339 Mercury PR0712-PHX PR0722 Intuitive PR0752-PHX Mercury 2 & Intuitive Stepper Valve Plate Heat Exchanger Controller Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0710, PR0711, PR0720, PR0721 Resource Data Management Ltd 80 Johnstone Avenue, Hillington Industrial Estate, Glasgow, Scotland G52 4NZ UK +44(0) Switchboard support@resourcedm.com Technical Support sales@resourcedm.com Sales Enquiries

340 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Table of Contents: THE MERCURY & INTUITIVE RANGE... 4 STEPPER VALVE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER CONTROLLER... 4 Variants... 4 Mercury Mk Intuitive Mercury... 4 Configuration... 4 Compatible Network Interfaces... 4 Front Display Features... 5 Connections... 5 Mercury Mk Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options... 6 Input / Output allocation table for the PHX controller... 6 Pressure Transducer Connection, Mercury Mk Pressure Transducer Connection, Intuitive Mercury... Error! Bookmark not defined. Setting up the controller... 7 Setup through front buttons... 7 Setup Function Menu... 7 Recommended set-up method... 7 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)... 8 type. Set/view controller type... 8 Inp. Set transducer input type... Error! Bookmark not defined. PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end)... 8 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 8 Display... 8 Parameter Tables... 8 Parameter Descriptions Stepper Valve Type Valve Wiring Valve State Overdriving Stepper Valve Control Using Pressure Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) Relay State and functional operation Network Configuration RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Wireless Mesh Communication Module Fast Network Address Reset IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card Mercury Switch Viewing Input / Output Table Alarm Messages Network Alarms Probe Offset Remote Commands Specification Power requirements General Valve Output Relay Specification Inputs Installation Dimensions Dimensions Fixing Revision 1.3C Page 2 of 19

341 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Cleaning Ventilation Disclaimer APPENDIX 1 STEP SPEED (FREQUENCY HZ) REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.3C Page 3 of 19

342 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide The Mercury & Intuitive Range Stepper Valve Plate Heat Exchanger Controller From Resource Data Management This controller is primarily intended for use in Plate Heat Exchanger (PHX) applications. The controller will operate the PHX stepper valve, to maintain superheat. The superheat can be obtained in three different ways which are user selectable; 1. Based on the value of the evaporator and suction line temperature probe inputs connected directly to the controller. 2. The local suction line temperature probe and a remote evaporator temperature value, received from a Mercury pressure switch (PR0018-PHI). 3. The local suction line temperature probe and local evaporator temperature value, calculated from a pressure transducer fitted to the suction line, are used to calculate the superheat. Requires (PR0722). Note: The PR0722 works with PT1000 probes only (units selected as 0 or 1) The controller has relay outputs to indicate run, fail and Alarm and can operate a variety of stepper motors. The controller supports PT1000, NTC2K, 470R, 700R, 3K, 5K, 6K, NTC2K25, NTC10K or NTC10K(2) temperature probes (note: probe types cannot be mixed) Variants Mercury Mk2 Description Mercury Mk2 Stepper valve plate heat exchanger controller, integral display. Part Number PR0712-PHX Intuitive Mercury Description Intuitive Mercury Stepper valve plate heat exchanger controller, integral display. Part Number PR0752-PHX Configuration The controller has only one type, this is fixed as type 3. Compatible Network Interfaces Mercury and Intuitive Mercury controllers are capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network, an RS485 Genus compatible network, an RDM wireless mesh network or they can be used in standalone mode with no network output. To connect to a network you must add the correct communications module. Connecting to any of these communication modules will automatically be detected on power up and will affect the set up screens available to you. Description IP Futura (Single Mercury to IP Interface) RS485 Interface (Single Mercury to RS485 Interface) Mercury IP Switch (IP support for 10 controllers) Mercury IP Switch with Pressure/Humidity Inputs Wireless Mesh Interface (for single Mercury) Part Number PR0016 PR0026 PR0018 PR0018-PHI PR0730 The Intuitive Mercury Controller is supplied as standard with an internal RS232 network card, this allows connection to any of the above external network interfaces. Three alternative internal network cards are also available, these can be supplied factory fitted as an option or purchased separately as an interface kit. Description Intuitive Internal IP Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal RS485 Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal Wireless Mesh Network Card Interface Kit Part Number PR0770 PR0771 PR0772 Revision 1.3C Page 4 of 19

343 Input Commons Relay 4 N/O Relay 3 N/O Relay 3&4 Common Relay 3 N/C Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 Common Relay 2 N/O Supply Voltage 0V Supply Voltage 24V Input 1 Signal Input 2 Signal Input 3 Signal Input 4 Signal Input 5 Signal Input 6 Signal M1B M1A M2A M2B Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 Common Relay 1 N/O Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Front Display Features LED s: - Valve (Stepper O/P) Fans (Not Used) Lights (Not Used) Defrost (Not Used) On-Line Keys Off No network attached Flashing Attempting to Log on to network Steady On-line Service (See Parameter 33 for setup) Alarm Main Display Enter Up Down Defrost Note: Function keys illuminate when pressed, illumination is turned off 20 seconds after the key is used. Press and hold the defrost button to force a manual defrost HACCP 4 character LED display, used to display superheat and status messages. Connections Mercury Mk2 6-5 Input and Output connections are made to the back of the controller, the RS232 communication port is on the side. The diagram shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Input/Output tables for further details on connections. Communication Port RS232 (Side) Stepper Output! Do not connect an earth. Revision 1.3C Page 5 of 19

344 0V N/C 24V Relay 3 N/C Relay 3 N/O Relay 3 Common Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 N/O Relay 2 Common Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 N/O Relay 1 Common 2B 2A 1A 1B Probe 6 Ground Probe 5 Ground Probe 4 Ground Probe 3 Ground Probe 2 Ground Probe 1 Ground Relay 4 Common Relay 4 N/O Relay 4 N/C Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options RS232 Network Card (Default) Stepper Output The Intuitive Mercury is supplied with an RS232 Network Card fitted as standard. Some example optional network cards are shown below IP Network Card (PR0770) Rotary Address Switches Network Collision LED Network Activity LED RS485 Network Card (PR0771) 24V Supply All inputs and outputs are plug and socket. The supply voltage and relay outputs have individual fuse protection. PR0772 Wireless Mesh Option also available. The network interfaces work in the same way as there external counterparts. Network Expansion Port Ground B- Ground A+ Network Activity LED Screen Input / Output allocation table for the PHX controller Description Alarm Action Comments Input 1 Temperature Monitor Probe Configurable Input 2 Temperature Monitor Probe Configurable Input 3 Evaporator Temperature Yes Input 4 Suction Line Temperature Yes Input 5 Run Input 0V Return Input 6 Pressure Transducer Yes See Interface Board Stepper Output Stepper Motor Valve N/A Relay 1 Run N/A Relay 2 Fail N/A Relay 3 Alarm N/A Relay 4 Remote N/A Temperature range for all probe types is -49 o C to +60 o C Revision 1.3C Page 6 of 19

345 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Pressure Transducer Interface Board for Mercury Mk2 The controller uses an external 4-20ma interface board (PR0722) which allows a pressure transducer to be connected to the probe 6 input. Pressure transducers must be of the current loop 4-20mA type. Excitation voltage (12 Vdc) is provided for the transducer. The range of the transducer will vary according to the application, the Span and Offset parameters allow for this. Note: The PR0722 works with PT1000 probes only (units selected as 0 or 1) Mercury Controller RS232 Socket Network Interface Interface Board PR0722 Mercury Probe 6 Input Probe 6 Ground 4-20mA Input 12V Supply Pressure Transducer The RJ45 socket labelled as Mercury Controller on the interface board connects to the Mercury Mini Pack controllers RS232 Comms port. A standard CAT5 patch lead should be used. Maximum cable length 0.1m. The Connector labelled Probe INP connects to Input 6 on the Mercury controller s Probe 6 input. Maximum cable length 0.1m. Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons Direct access by PC or palm top into the rear comms port. This requires a software package available on the RDM website Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Manager. Across an IP network. (Current controller IP address required) Setup through front buttons ENTER UP DOWN To enter setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Setup Function Menu Display Option Explained in Explained in Display Option Paragraph Paragraph IO View Inputs / Outputs and States Input / output table net Set/view network configuration Network Configuration PArA Set/View Parameters Set view parameters SoFt View software version Unit Probe type and Set View Unit FAnS Not used in this controller Celsius/Fahrenheit option disp Display whole units or Display CASE Not used in this controller decimal type Set/View Controller Type Set/view controller type Ligt Not used in this controller rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Clock) Recommended set-up method Real Time Clock OFSt Probe Offset Probe Offset If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. ESC Exit Setup mode Revision 1.3C Page 7 of 19

346 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set type. Set/view controller type This controller has only one type, this value is set to 3 and cannot be changed. PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P- 01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 for PT1000 Celsius 1 for PT1000 Fahrenheit 2 for NTC2K Celsius 3 for NTC2K Fahrenheit 4 for 470R Celsius 5 for 470R Fahrenheit 6 for 700R Celsius 7 for 700R Fahrenheit 8 for 3K Celsius 9 for 3K Fahrenheit 10 for NTC2K25 Celsius 11 for NTC2K25 Fahrenheit 12 for 5K Celsius 13 for 5K Fahrenheit 14 for 6K Celsius 15 for 6K Fahrenheit 16 for NTC10K Celsius 17 for NTC10K Fahrenheit 18 for NTC10K(2) Celsius (USA NTC10K) 19 for NTC10K(2) Fahrenheit (USA NTC10K) Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. This function is now complete Display From the function menu scroll to and select disp. Press enter and one of the following values will be shown: - 0. Controller display will show the whole number and tenths value of a temperature reading. (Default) 1. Controller display will show temperatures as a whole number. Parameter Tables Note: In this application EEV refers to a stepper valve. Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Default HT o C ( o F ) P-01 Superheat Ref 0 to 12 (7.2 to 21.6) 0.1 Deg 6 (10.8) P-02 Response on 1 to P-03 Response off 1 to P-20 EEV Minimum Opening 0-100% 1 % 10 P-21 Superheat Problem 0 12 o C ( o F) 0.1 Deg 0 P-22 EEV Problem Opening 0-100% 1 % 10 P-23 EEV Problem Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 03:00 P-25 EEV Start Opening 0-100% 1 % 50 P-26 EEV Divide Value 0-100% 1 % 50 P-30 Evap Select 0 = Local temp 1 = Remote temp 2 = Local pressure 1 Deg 0 Revision 1.3C Page 8 of 19

347 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide P-31 Run Input 0 = Disabled = N/O 2 = N/C P-32 Overdrive Time Hrs 8 P-33 Service Time K Hrs 60 P-40 Valve Type 0 = Carel = Sporlan 2 = Alco 3 = Other * P-41 Step Max 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type P-42 Step Close 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type P-43 Step Speed 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type 1 Hz 50 P-44 ma Peak 0 to 500 See : Valve Type 1 ma 450 P-45 Half Step 0 (Off), 1(On) See : Valve Type P-50 Control Fail % 0 P-51 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-52 Low Superheat Deg 2.0 P-53 Probe 1 type 0 = Monitor = Monitor + Fault 2 = Monitor + Fault + Alarm P-54 Probe 2 type 0 = Monitor = Monitor + Fault 2 = Monitor + Fault + Alarm P-55 Probe Alarm delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 P-56 Probe OT Deg 20.0 P-61 Refrigerant 0 = None 1 = R12 2 = R13 3 = R13b1 4 = R = R23 6 = R32 7 = R114 8 = R134a 9 =R142B 10 = R = R = R401A 13 = R401B 14 = R = R402A 16 = R402B 17 = R404A 18 = R407A 19 =R407B 20 = R407C 21 = R = R = R = R = R = R = R744 P-62 Transducer Span Bar 13.8 P-63 Transducer Offset Bar 0.0 P-64 Glide Deg 0.0 P-65 Pressure Type 0 = Absolute = Gauge dflt Default Parameters * Parameters P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 only have an effect if Other is selected when configuring parameter P-40. Revision 1.3C Page 9 of 19

348 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Parameter Descriptions Number Parameter Description P-01 Superheat Ref The controller will attempt to maintain this superheat value P-02 Response on Allows the user to speed up the EEV on time. With 60 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-03 Response off Allows the user to speed up the EEV off time. With 60 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-20 EEV Minimum Opening Sets the minimum valve opening level, during normal operation the valve will not go below this level. (Default 10%) If used in conjunction with a Mercury Pressure Hub PR0018-PHI then the Minimum value opening should be set at 0% P-21 Superheat Problem Sets the point at which the algorithm will go into the EEV Problem state due to the superheat temperature. For example if this parameter is set to 0 Degrees and the Superheat value falls to 0 degrees or below, for the duration of P-23, then the controller will enter the superheat problem state. P-22 Superheat EEV Sets the valve open position when entering the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Opening P-23 Superheat EEV Sets the time the controller stays in the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Time P-25 EEV Start Opening Sets the valve opening % which is used when the controller first powers up. It is also used when the controller exits a problem state for example Superheat EEV Problem state. P-26 EEV Divide value This parameter only takes effect when the controller is used in conjunction with a Mercury Switch pressure application. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP (maximum operating pressure) alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if this parameter is set to 40% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve opening will be limited by the controller to 40%. Note P-20 EEV Minimum opening overrides the valve output operation and the valve will not close below this setting. Please see Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) note. Please note parameters P-20 through to P-26 should not be altered without first understanding the effects they may have on the case operation. If incorrectly set they may have undesired affects. P-30 Evap Select Local Temp: - The local Evaporator and Suction Line temperature probes are used to calculate the Superheat. Remote Temp: - The local Suction Line temperature probe and a Remote Evaporator temperature value, received from a Mercury Pressure Switch (PR0018-PHI), are used to calculate the Superheat. Local Pressure: - The local Suction Line temperature probe and Local Evaporator Temperature, calculated from a pressure transducer connected to the controller, are used to calculate the Superheat. Evap. Select allows the control algorithm to use a local pressure input or a remote temperature input in place of the evaporator in temperature probe value. In the event of no remote value being received, the control algorithm will revert to using the evaporator in probe value until the remote value is restored. Please See : Valve Control Using Pressure P-31 Run Input This input allows the controller to run on the application of a digital input signal. If the feature is enabled the control strategy will not operate unless the Run Input is present. This input can be set to N/O or N/C. P-32 Overdrive Time The time interval, in hours, at which the attached stepper motor will be overdriven. Please see Valve State Overdriving section for further details. P-33 Service Interval Time Time (in 1000 x hours) before the service icon (Spanner icon) comes on. Reset the spanner icon to off by changing this parameter to 0 and then back to the desired value. P-40 Valve Type Choose from three preconfigured stepper valve types or select Other to enter Stepper characteristics for a valve which is not listed. See Note Valve Type P-41 Step Max Number of steps the controller will send to open the valve to 100%. Consult the valve manufacturer to obtain the required number of steps. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type P-42 Step Close Number of steps controller will send to close valve fully to 0% and overdrive the valve. The Steps required when overdriving the valve can vary. Please consult the valve manufacturer to obtain the required number of steps (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type Revision 1.3C Page 10 of 19

349 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide P-43 Step Speed Increases and decreases the rate of step change. Enter a value in Hz. Valve Manufacturers specification must be followed. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type and Appendix 1 Step Speed. P-44 ma Peak Current requirement of motor. Care should be taken when setting this parameter as too high a setting could damage the valve motor. Valve Manufacturers specification must be followed. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type P-45 Half Step Uses half the range of the valve (Uses half value set in P-41 / P42). Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40 See Note Valve type P-50 Control Fail This value determines the fixed valve opening percentage when a control fail occurs. P-51 Alarm Delay Delay for the Over Temperature and Low Superheat alarms. P-52 Low Superheat This value determines the Low Superheat alarm threshold. P-53 Probe 1 Type Set probe 1 to a monitor probe, monitor with probe fault alarms or monitor with probe fault alarms and OT alarm levels. P-54 Probe 2 Type Set probe 2 to a monitor probe, monitor with probe fault alarms or monitor with probe fault alarms and OT alarm levels. P-55 Probe Alarm delay Sets the delay period for alarms on probe 1 & 2 P-56 Probe OT Sets the over temperature alarm threshold for probe 1 & 2 P-61 Refrigerant Sets the refrigerant type so that a pressure to temperature conversion can be calculated. P-62 Transducer span Sets the range of the pressure transducer P-63 Transducer offset Sets the value of the transducer that is below zero. P-64 Glide Allows the calculated temperature to be offset by subtracting the value at P-64 P-65 Pressure types Allow the controller to operate with either gauge or absolute pressure Stepper Valve Type Parameters P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 only have an effect if Other is selected when configuring parameter P-40. Other allows the user to map in the requirements the stepper valve. Selecting option 1, 2 or 3 at parameter P-40 sets the controller for use with the factory set values for the type of valve selected. The controller will override any values set in parameters P-41, P-42, P-43 and P-45. Note the parameters relating to the Stepper Valve type should be configured prior to wiring the Stepper Valve to the Mercury 2 PHX controller. If one of the three default valve types is selected then changing P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 will have no effect. Manufacturer Model Step Max Step Close Step Speed (Hz)* ma Peak Carel E 3 V Sporlan SER-6 (1.5 to 20) Alco See Appendix 1 Step Speed also. Valve Wiring Manufacturer Model Wiring (Colours) Connection Description (See Stepper Output) Carel E 3 V Yellow M1B White M1A Green M2A Brown M2B Sporlan SER Green M1B Red M1A SEI White M2A Black M2B Important Review the manufacturer s datasheet for the selected valve before installation. If you are unsure regarding any of the above steps please contact RDM Technical Support for further assistance. Revision 1.3C Page 11 of 19

350 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Valve State Overdriving Each time the Mercury 2 Stepper is powered on the control valve state has to initialise as the controller will have no knowledge of the current valve opening position for the stepper motor attached. During this process the controller will close the valve by a number of steps greater than the total number of steps for the valve configured. This is achieved using the Step Close parameter and is referred to as overdriving the valve. This process will synchronize the controller with the stepper valve output. This ensures the stepper valve is at the 0 steps position, fully closed and the control algorithm will use this for future control operations. In certain applications there is a necessity to overdrive the Stepper motor periodically. If during normal operation the valve closes to 0% then at this point the valve will be overdriven. If the valve doesn t close to 0% during normal operation then the valve will be overdriven during each scheduled defrost. An additional feature is incorporated into the control algorithm, software V1.3 and above, which will overdrive the Stepper motor output should the valve not close to 0% in an 8 hour period. Please consult the stepper valve manufacturer s data sheet to obtain the number of steps required to overdrive the valve. Stepper Valve Control Using Pressure Superheat can be derived from a pressure transducer measuring the suction pressure and the suction temperature. There are 2 methods of connecting a pressure transducer: - 1. Via the PR0722 connected to a Mercury Mk2 or directly to an Intuitive Mercury (local) 2. Via the PR0018-PHI (remote) Local pressure transducer connections has been previously described in this document, remote connection can be found on the user guide for PR0018-PHI Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) MOP is a remote command sent from the Mercury switch (PR0018-PHI) to the controller to either close or reduce the Stepper Valve opening when a predetermined pressure is reached. This MOP value is configured in the Mercury switch setup. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if the Div Value parameter is set to 40% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve the controller will open the valve will be limited to 40%. Relay State and functional operation Relay 1-3 State Function State Wired contact Relay 1 off Not running N/O Relay 1 on Running N/O Relay 2 off Fail N/O Relay 2 on Normal N/O Relay 3 off Alarm Relay = Alarm N/C Relay 3 on Alarm Relay = OK N/C Relay 4 & Function State Wired contact Stepper State Relay 4 off Remote off N/O Relay 4 on Remote on N/O Stepper Valve Off Stepper Valve Closing As per I/O Diagram Stepper Valve On Stepper Valve Operating As per I/O Diagram N/O N/O Signal Input N/C N/C Ground Example of relay 1 and 2 wired for operation with the CO2 Pump Station Controller Relay 1 (Run Output) will energise as stepper valve starts to open. Relay 2 (Run Fail) will be energised during normal operation and will de-energise for transducer faults and superheat low alarms. Revision 1.3C Page 12 of 19

351 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). When logging a Mercury or Intuitive Mercury with an RS232 interface onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module, this is either a 485 Legacy, RDM Wireless Mesh system IP, Futura or Mercury Switch. When using an Intuitive Mercury controller, the controller has to have the correct network card fitted (see compatible network interfaces ). For connection to a Mercury Switch (Hub) or an external network interface, the standard fitment RS232 network card is utilized. RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Connecting an RS485 legacy Module or an Intuitive Internal RS485 network card to the controller will govern which set up screens are made available. Both modules support the Genus protocol only. Display 485t 485A gadd rlog CLrA ESC Option 485 Network Type 485 Address/Name Show underlying network address assigned to controller Re-log the controller back onto the network Clear the address/name from the controller Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu The 485t option shows a value representing the network type, in this controller there is only one type Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) 2 RDM Wireless Mesh System The 485A option shows a value representing either the name of the controller in a Genus compatible or Wireless Mesh network. Wireless Mesh Communication Module RDM Wireless Mesh System, please refer to the RDM Wireless Mesh Communication Module user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a Wireless Mesh network. The value shown in 485A is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible or RDM Wireless Mesh network using the name RC05-6. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. To enter this mode, hold the Enter, Up and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message CLrA appears on the display. CLrA is the first option in the menu consisting of the following options: Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card In an IP system there are two options, IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Manager) IP-L To configure the communication module or network card for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the controller should be powered off, all three rotary switches set to zero and the controller powered on. Revision 1.3C Page 13 of 19

352 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the three rotary switches must be set when the controller is powered off, the controller should then be powered on to connect to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Mercury Switch Please refer to the Mercury Switch user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a network. Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs and controller states. From the function menu, select I/O, press enter. You can now scroll through the IO table as set out below Input / Output Table Number IO Range* o C ( o F ) Step Units I-01 Probe 1-42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-02 Probe 2-42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-03 Evaporator Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-04 Suction Line Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-05 Superheat -30 to 60 (-54 to 108) 0.1 Deg I-06 Run 0 = Off, 1 = Run 1 I-07 Remote Evaporator temp -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-08 MOP 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 I-09 Div Input 0 to % I-10 Pressure Bar I-11 Pressure temperature -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-01 Valve Opening 0 to % O-02 Run Output 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-03 Run Fail 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-04 Alarm Relay 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-05 Remote Relay 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-18 Run Time K Hours 1 O-19 Valve Step S-01 Control State 0 = Stabilise, 1 = Normal, 2 = Alarm 1 S-02 Valve State 0 (Off), 1 (Start), 2 (Run), 3 (Problem), 4 (Fail), 5 (Initial) 1 Revision 1.3C Page 14 of 19

353 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide * Range is dependent on probe type Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury display. Display Message Ft Prb1 Prb2 Prb3 Prb4 AL System status Control Fault Probe 1 Fault Probe 2 Fault Probe 3 Fault Probe 4 Fault Control State in Alarm Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) Superheat Low 5 Superheat problem 6 Probe 1 fault 6 Probe 2 fault 6 Probe 3 fault 6 Probe 4 fault 6 Alarm text Type # (index) Probe 5 fault 6 Transducer fault 6 Monitor Probe 1 OT 4 Monitor Probe 2 OT 4 Controller Off 29 Probe Offset This feature allows each probe value to be modified by an offset. Offset values are from -10 O C (-18 O F) to +10 O C (+18 O F) and on a channel basis. Example C1 = Probe 1. Remote Commands The following commands can be used by a Data Builder program: - Command Value to send Description Conditions Haccp Command HACCP LED OFF HACCP LED On HACCP LED Flashes Haccp Command Button Command Buttons backlights Off Buttons backlights On Buttons Backlights Flash Button Command EEV Command 2 Shuts the valve off EEV Command 1 Restores the valve to normal operation Divider Command 0 to 100% Sets the maximum valve opening to this percentage. Divider Command Use an Analogue Out block configured to the controller name and in the value field type in the command you require. Use a Setting block as the input to the Analogue Out block to send the Value. See Example on the right, which turns on the HACCP LED. Revision 1.3C Page 15 of 19

354 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Specification Power requirements Mercury Mk2 Stepper Controller PR0712 & PR0713 Intuitive Mercury Stepper controller PR0752 & PR0762 Supply Voltage Range 24 Vac ±10% or 24Vdc ±10% 24 Vac ±10% or 24Vdc ±10% Supply Frequency Hz ±10% or dc Hz ±10% or dc Maximum supply current 0.5 Amps (Total max. current dependant on 0.5 Amps (Total max. current dependant on stepper motor used) stepper motor used) Typical supply current <1 Amp <1 Amp General Operating temperature range +5 0 C to C +5 0 C to C Storage temperature range C to C C to C Environmental Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Size 78mm (W) x 36mm (H) x 110mm (D) 157mm (W) x 67mm (H) x 120 (D) Approx Weight 170 grams 500 grams Safety EN61010 EN61010 EMC EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted Supply Fuse The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such Built in fuse holder, fuse 2A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm as: - Fuse: 6.3A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB 6A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN (Note: controller has integral 2A fuse) Relay Fuse Not Fitted 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Valve Output Max current valve output Stepper Output Relay Specification Total Max current dependant on Stepper Motor used. Bipolar Stepper Motor 24V 8W Max. Maximum current cannot exceed 825mA Chopper Drive Total Max current dependant on Stepper Motor used. Bipolar Stepper Motor 24V 8W Max. Maximum current cannot exceed 825mA Chopper Drive Relays 1-3 Exclusive common Max current 6A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 2A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) 10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac, 30V dc 250Vac. 30V dc Relay Fuse N/A 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Relay 4 Exclusive common Max current 3A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 1A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) 10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac 250Vac Relay Fuse N/A 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Revision 1.3C Page 16 of 19

355 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Inputs Input resistance: Input type Comms: 3.01K Ohms (for PTC or NTC type probes) PT1000 or NTC2K or NTC2K25 or NTC10K (selectable) RS232 with flow control Installation Panel Cut-out and Clearances Mercury Mk2 (Flush mount controller) Fixing The controller is fixed by sliding the 2 plastic retaining clips up to rear of the panel. These clips have a ratchet action and can be removed by holding in the clip sides and sliding back. Dimensions Mercury Mk2 Dimensions Intuitive Mercury controller Revision 1.3C Page 17 of 19

356 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Three clips fix the Intuitive Mercury securely to DIN rail. Pull each clip until it clicks to remove the controller. Each clip has a mounting hole to provide an alternative fixing mechanism to DIN mounting. Cleaning Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with slightly damped lint free cloth. Ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Disclaimer The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of this product or document. Revision 1.3C Page 18 of 19

357 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Appendix 1 Step Speed (Frequency Hz) When setting the Step Speed, P-43, the following table applies. Step Speed Entered Actual Speed Set (Hz) Step Speed Entered Actual Speed Set (Hz) 500 and above to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to and below to Please confirm with the Stepper valve manufacturer datasheets to select the correct step frequency. Revision History Revision Date Changes 1.3B 30/06/2011 Current Issue 1.3C 13/01/2012 Inp. option removed Revision 1.3C Page 19 of 19

358 Mercury PR0712-PHX PR0722 Intuitive PR0752-PHX Mercury 2 & Intuitive Stepper Valve Plate Heat Exchanger Controller Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0710, PR0711, PR0720, PR0721 Resource Data Management Ltd 80 Johnstone Avenue, Hillington Industrial Estate, Glasgow, Scotland G52 4NZ UK +44(0) Switchboard support@resourcedm.com Technical Support sales@resourcedm.com Sales Enquiries

359 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Table of Contents: THE MERCURY & INTUITIVE RANGE... 4 STEPPER VALVE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER CONTROLLER... 4 Variants... 4 Mercury Mk Intuitive Mercury... 4 Configuration... 4 Compatible Network Interfaces... 4 Front Display Features... 5 Connections... 5 Mercury Mk Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options... 6 Input / Output allocation table for the PHX controller... 6 Pressure Transducer Connection, Mercury Mk Pressure Transducer Connection, Intuitive Mercury... Error! Bookmark not defined. Setting up the controller... 7 Setup through front buttons... 7 Setup Function Menu... 7 Recommended set-up method... 7 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)... 8 type. Set/view controller type... 8 Inp. Set transducer input type... Error! Bookmark not defined. PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end)... 8 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 8 Display... 8 Parameter Tables... 8 Parameter Descriptions Stepper Valve Type Valve Wiring Valve State Overdriving Stepper Valve Control Using Pressure Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) Relay State and functional operation Network Configuration RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Wireless Mesh Communication Module Fast Network Address Reset IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card Mercury Switch Viewing Input / Output Table Alarm Messages Network Alarms Probe Offset Remote Commands Specification Power requirements General Valve Output Relay Specification Inputs Installation Dimensions Dimensions Fixing Revision 1.3C Page 2 of 19

360 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Cleaning Ventilation Disclaimer APPENDIX 1 STEP SPEED (FREQUENCY HZ) REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.3C Page 3 of 19

361 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide The Mercury & Intuitive Range Stepper Valve Plate Heat Exchanger Controller From Resource Data Management This controller is primarily intended for use in Plate Heat Exchanger (PHX) applications. The controller will operate the PHX stepper valve, to maintain superheat. The superheat can be obtained in three different ways which are user selectable; 1. Based on the value of the evaporator and suction line temperature probe inputs connected directly to the controller. 2. The local suction line temperature probe and a remote evaporator temperature value, received from a Mercury pressure switch (PR0018-PHI). 3. The local suction line temperature probe and local evaporator temperature value, calculated from a pressure transducer fitted to the suction line, are used to calculate the superheat. Requires (PR0722). Note: The PR0722 works with PT1000 probes only (units selected as 0 or 1) The controller has relay outputs to indicate run, fail and Alarm and can operate a variety of stepper motors. The controller supports PT1000, NTC2K, 470R, 700R, 3K, 5K, 6K, NTC2K25, NTC10K or NTC10K(2) temperature probes (note: probe types cannot be mixed) Variants Mercury Mk2 Description Mercury Mk2 Stepper valve plate heat exchanger controller, integral display. Part Number PR0712-PHX Intuitive Mercury Description Intuitive Mercury Stepper valve plate heat exchanger controller, integral display. Part Number PR0752-PHX Configuration The controller has only one type, this is fixed as type 3. Compatible Network Interfaces Mercury and Intuitive Mercury controllers are capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network, an RS485 Genus compatible network, an RDM wireless mesh network or they can be used in standalone mode with no network output. To connect to a network you must add the correct communications module. Connecting to any of these communication modules will automatically be detected on power up and will affect the set up screens available to you. Description IP Futura (Single Mercury to IP Interface) RS485 Interface (Single Mercury to RS485 Interface) Mercury IP Switch (IP support for 10 controllers) Mercury IP Switch with Pressure/Humidity Inputs Wireless Mesh Interface (for single Mercury) Part Number PR0016 PR0026 PR0018 PR0018-PHI PR0730 The Intuitive Mercury Controller is supplied as standard with an internal RS232 network card, this allows connection to any of the above external network interfaces. Three alternative internal network cards are also available, these can be supplied factory fitted as an option or purchased separately as an interface kit. Description Intuitive Internal IP Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal RS485 Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal Wireless Mesh Network Card Interface Kit Part Number PR0770 PR0771 PR0772 Revision 1.3C Page 4 of 19

362 Input Commons Relay 4 N/O Relay 3 N/O Relay 3&4 Common Relay 3 N/C Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 Common Relay 2 N/O Supply Voltage 0V Supply Voltage 24V Input 1 Signal Input 2 Signal Input 3 Signal Input 4 Signal Input 5 Signal Input 6 Signal M1B M1A M2A M2B Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 Common Relay 1 N/O Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Front Display Features LED s: - Valve (Stepper O/P) Fans (Not Used) Lights (Not Used) Defrost (Not Used) On-Line Keys Off No network attached Flashing Attempting to Log on to network Steady On-line Service (See Parameter 33 for setup) Alarm Main Display Enter Up Down Defrost Note: Function keys illuminate when pressed, illumination is turned off 20 seconds after the key is used. Press and hold the defrost button to force a manual defrost HACCP 4 character LED display, used to display superheat and status messages. Connections Mercury Mk2 6-5 Input and Output connections are made to the back of the controller, the RS232 communication port is on the side. The diagram shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Input/Output tables for further details on connections. Communication Port RS232 (Side) Stepper Output! Do not connect an earth. Revision 1.3C Page 5 of 19

363 0V N/C 24V Relay 3 N/C Relay 3 N/O Relay 3 Common Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 N/O Relay 2 Common Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 N/O Relay 1 Common 2B 2A 1A 1B Probe 6 Ground Probe 5 Ground Probe 4 Ground Probe 3 Ground Probe 2 Ground Probe 1 Ground Relay 4 Common Relay 4 N/O Relay 4 N/C Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options RS232 Network Card (Default) Stepper Output The Intuitive Mercury is supplied with an RS232 Network Card fitted as standard. Some example optional network cards are shown below IP Network Card (PR0770) Rotary Address Switches Network Collision LED Network Activity LED RS485 Network Card (PR0771) 24V Supply All inputs and outputs are plug and socket. The supply voltage and relay outputs have individual fuse protection. PR0772 Wireless Mesh Option also available. The network interfaces work in the same way as there external counterparts. Network Expansion Port Ground B- Ground A+ Network Activity LED Screen Input / Output allocation table for the PHX controller Description Alarm Action Comments Input 1 Temperature Monitor Probe Configurable Input 2 Temperature Monitor Probe Configurable Input 3 Evaporator Temperature Yes Input 4 Suction Line Temperature Yes Input 5 Run Input 0V Return Input 6 Pressure Transducer Yes See Interface Board Stepper Output Stepper Motor Valve N/A Relay 1 Run N/A Relay 2 Fail N/A Relay 3 Alarm N/A Relay 4 Remote N/A Temperature range for all probe types is -49 o C to +60 o C Revision 1.3C Page 6 of 19

364 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Pressure Transducer Interface Board for Mercury Mk2 The controller uses an external 4-20ma interface board (PR0722) which allows a pressure transducer to be connected to the probe 6 input. Pressure transducers must be of the current loop 4-20mA type. Excitation voltage (12 Vdc) is provided for the transducer. The range of the transducer will vary according to the application, the Span and Offset parameters allow for this. Note: The PR0722 works with PT1000 probes only (units selected as 0 or 1) Mercury Controller RS232 Socket Network Interface Interface Board PR0722 Mercury Probe 6 Input Probe 6 Ground 4-20mA Input 12V Supply Pressure Transducer The RJ45 socket labelled as Mercury Controller on the interface board connects to the Mercury Mini Pack controllers RS232 Comms port. A standard CAT5 patch lead should be used. Maximum cable length 0.1m. The Connector labelled Probe INP connects to Input 6 on the Mercury controller s Probe 6 input. Maximum cable length 0.1m. Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons Direct access by PC or palm top into the rear comms port. This requires a software package available on the RDM website Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Manager. Across an IP network. (Current controller IP address required) Setup through front buttons ENTER UP DOWN To enter setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Setup Function Menu Display Option Explained in Explained in Display Option Paragraph Paragraph IO View Inputs / Outputs and States Input / output table net Set/view network configuration Network Configuration PArA Set/View Parameters Set view parameters SoFt View software version Unit Probe type and Set View Unit FAnS Not used in this controller Celsius/Fahrenheit option disp Display whole units or Display CASE Not used in this controller decimal type Set/View Controller Type Set/view controller type Ligt Not used in this controller rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Clock) Recommended set-up method Real Time Clock OFSt Probe Offset Probe Offset If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. ESC Exit Setup mode Revision 1.3C Page 7 of 19

365 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Time clock is now set type. Set/view controller type This controller has only one type, this value is set to 3 and cannot be changed. PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P- 01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 for PT1000 Celsius 1 for PT1000 Fahrenheit 2 for NTC2K Celsius 3 for NTC2K Fahrenheit 4 for 470R Celsius 5 for 470R Fahrenheit 6 for 700R Celsius 7 for 700R Fahrenheit 8 for 3K Celsius 9 for 3K Fahrenheit 10 for NTC2K25 Celsius 11 for NTC2K25 Fahrenheit 12 for 5K Celsius 13 for 5K Fahrenheit 14 for 6K Celsius 15 for 6K Fahrenheit 16 for NTC10K Celsius 17 for NTC10K Fahrenheit 18 for NTC10K(2) Celsius (USA NTC10K) 19 for NTC10K(2) Fahrenheit (USA NTC10K) Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. This function is now complete Display From the function menu scroll to and select disp. Press enter and one of the following values will be shown: - 0. Controller display will show the whole number and tenths value of a temperature reading. (Default) 1. Controller display will show temperatures as a whole number. Parameter Tables Note: In this application EEV refers to a stepper valve. Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Default HT o C ( o F ) P-01 Superheat Ref 0 to 12 (7.2 to 21.6) 0.1 Deg 6 (10.8) P-02 Response on 1 to P-03 Response off 1 to P-20 EEV Minimum Opening 0-100% 1 % 10 P-21 Superheat Problem 0 12 o C ( o F) 0.1 Deg 0 P-22 EEV Problem Opening 0-100% 1 % 10 P-23 EEV Problem Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 03:00 P-25 EEV Start Opening 0-100% 1 % 50 P-26 EEV Divide Value 0-100% 1 % 50 P-30 Evap Select 0 = Local temp 1 = Remote temp 2 = Local pressure 1 Deg 0 Revision 1.3C Page 8 of 19

366 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide P-31 Run Input 0 = Disabled = N/O 2 = N/C P-32 Overdrive Time Hrs 8 P-33 Service Time K Hrs 60 P-40 Valve Type 0 = Carel = Sporlan 2 = Alco 3 = Other * P-41 Step Max 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type P-42 Step Close 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type P-43 Step Speed 0 to 6400 See : Valve Type 1 Hz 50 P-44 ma Peak 0 to 500 See : Valve Type 1 ma 450 P-45 Half Step 0 (Off), 1(On) See : Valve Type P-50 Control Fail % 0 P-51 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 P-52 Low Superheat Deg 2.0 P-53 Probe 1 type 0 = Monitor = Monitor + Fault 2 = Monitor + Fault + Alarm P-54 Probe 2 type 0 = Monitor = Monitor + Fault 2 = Monitor + Fault + Alarm P-55 Probe Alarm delay 00:00 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 P-56 Probe OT Deg 20.0 P-61 Refrigerant 0 = None 1 = R12 2 = R13 3 = R13b1 4 = R = R23 6 = R32 7 = R114 8 = R134a 9 =R142B 10 = R = R = R401A 13 = R401B 14 = R = R402A 16 = R402B 17 = R404A 18 = R407A 19 =R407B 20 = R407C 21 = R = R = R = R = R = R = R744 P-62 Transducer Span Bar 13.8 P-63 Transducer Offset Bar 0.0 P-64 Glide Deg 0.0 P-65 Pressure Type 0 = Absolute = Gauge dflt Default Parameters * Parameters P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 only have an effect if Other is selected when configuring parameter P-40. Revision 1.3C Page 9 of 19

367 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Parameter Descriptions Number Parameter Description P-01 Superheat Ref The controller will attempt to maintain this superheat value P-02 Response on Allows the user to speed up the EEV on time. With 60 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-03 Response off Allows the user to speed up the EEV off time. With 60 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-20 EEV Minimum Opening Sets the minimum valve opening level, during normal operation the valve will not go below this level. (Default 10%) If used in conjunction with a Mercury Pressure Hub PR0018-PHI then the Minimum value opening should be set at 0% P-21 Superheat Problem Sets the point at which the algorithm will go into the EEV Problem state due to the superheat temperature. For example if this parameter is set to 0 Degrees and the Superheat value falls to 0 degrees or below, for the duration of P-23, then the controller will enter the superheat problem state. P-22 Superheat EEV Sets the valve open position when entering the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Opening P-23 Superheat EEV Sets the time the controller stays in the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Time P-25 EEV Start Opening Sets the valve opening % which is used when the controller first powers up. It is also used when the controller exits a problem state for example Superheat EEV Problem state. P-26 EEV Divide value This parameter only takes effect when the controller is used in conjunction with a Mercury Switch pressure application. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP (maximum operating pressure) alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if this parameter is set to 40% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve opening will be limited by the controller to 40%. Note P-20 EEV Minimum opening overrides the valve output operation and the valve will not close below this setting. Please see Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) note. Please note parameters P-20 through to P-26 should not be altered without first understanding the effects they may have on the case operation. If incorrectly set they may have undesired affects. P-30 Evap Select Local Temp: - The local Evaporator and Suction Line temperature probes are used to calculate the Superheat. Remote Temp: - The local Suction Line temperature probe and a Remote Evaporator temperature value, received from a Mercury Pressure Switch (PR0018-PHI), are used to calculate the Superheat. Local Pressure: - The local Suction Line temperature probe and Local Evaporator Temperature, calculated from a pressure transducer connected to the controller, are used to calculate the Superheat. Evap. Select allows the control algorithm to use a local pressure input or a remote temperature input in place of the evaporator in temperature probe value. In the event of no remote value being received, the control algorithm will revert to using the evaporator in probe value until the remote value is restored. Please See : Valve Control Using Pressure P-31 Run Input This input allows the controller to run on the application of a digital input signal. If the feature is enabled the control strategy will not operate unless the Run Input is present. This input can be set to N/O or N/C. P-32 Overdrive Time The time interval, in hours, at which the attached stepper motor will be overdriven. Please see Valve State Overdriving section for further details. P-33 Service Interval Time Time (in 1000 x hours) before the service icon (Spanner icon) comes on. Reset the spanner icon to off by changing this parameter to 0 and then back to the desired value. P-40 Valve Type Choose from three preconfigured stepper valve types or select Other to enter Stepper characteristics for a valve which is not listed. See Note Valve Type P-41 Step Max Number of steps the controller will send to open the valve to 100%. Consult the valve manufacturer to obtain the required number of steps. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type P-42 Step Close Number of steps controller will send to close valve fully to 0% and overdrive the valve. The Steps required when overdriving the valve can vary. Please consult the valve manufacturer to obtain the required number of steps (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type Revision 1.3C Page 10 of 19

368 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide P-43 Step Speed Increases and decreases the rate of step change. Enter a value in Hz. Valve Manufacturers specification must be followed. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type and Appendix 1 Step Speed. P-44 ma Peak Current requirement of motor. Care should be taken when setting this parameter as too high a setting could damage the valve motor. Valve Manufacturers specification must be followed. (Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40) See Note Valve Type P-45 Half Step Uses half the range of the valve (Uses half value set in P-41 / P42). Has no effect if Valve Type 0, 1 or 2 selected at P-40 See Note Valve type P-50 Control Fail This value determines the fixed valve opening percentage when a control fail occurs. P-51 Alarm Delay Delay for the Over Temperature and Low Superheat alarms. P-52 Low Superheat This value determines the Low Superheat alarm threshold. P-53 Probe 1 Type Set probe 1 to a monitor probe, monitor with probe fault alarms or monitor with probe fault alarms and OT alarm levels. P-54 Probe 2 Type Set probe 2 to a monitor probe, monitor with probe fault alarms or monitor with probe fault alarms and OT alarm levels. P-55 Probe Alarm delay Sets the delay period for alarms on probe 1 & 2 P-56 Probe OT Sets the over temperature alarm threshold for probe 1 & 2 P-61 Refrigerant Sets the refrigerant type so that a pressure to temperature conversion can be calculated. P-62 Transducer span Sets the range of the pressure transducer P-63 Transducer offset Sets the value of the transducer that is below zero. P-64 Glide Allows the calculated temperature to be offset by subtracting the value at P-64 P-65 Pressure types Allow the controller to operate with either gauge or absolute pressure Stepper Valve Type Parameters P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 only have an effect if Other is selected when configuring parameter P-40. Other allows the user to map in the requirements the stepper valve. Selecting option 1, 2 or 3 at parameter P-40 sets the controller for use with the factory set values for the type of valve selected. The controller will override any values set in parameters P-41, P-42, P-43 and P-45. Note the parameters relating to the Stepper Valve type should be configured prior to wiring the Stepper Valve to the Mercury 2 PHX controller. If one of the three default valve types is selected then changing P-41, P-42, P-43, P-44 and P-45 will have no effect. Manufacturer Model Step Max Step Close Step Speed (Hz)* ma Peak Carel E 3 V Sporlan SER-6 (1.5 to 20) Alco See Appendix 1 Step Speed also. Valve Wiring Manufacturer Model Wiring (Colours) Connection Description (See Stepper Output) Carel E 3 V Yellow M1B White M1A Green M2A Brown M2B Sporlan SER Green M1B Red M1A SEI White M2A Black M2B Important Review the manufacturer s datasheet for the selected valve before installation. If you are unsure regarding any of the above steps please contact RDM Technical Support for further assistance. Revision 1.3C Page 11 of 19

369 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Valve State Overdriving Each time the Mercury 2 Stepper is powered on the control valve state has to initialise as the controller will have no knowledge of the current valve opening position for the stepper motor attached. During this process the controller will close the valve by a number of steps greater than the total number of steps for the valve configured. This is achieved using the Step Close parameter and is referred to as overdriving the valve. This process will synchronize the controller with the stepper valve output. This ensures the stepper valve is at the 0 steps position, fully closed and the control algorithm will use this for future control operations. In certain applications there is a necessity to overdrive the Stepper motor periodically. If during normal operation the valve closes to 0% then at this point the valve will be overdriven. If the valve doesn t close to 0% during normal operation then the valve will be overdriven during each scheduled defrost. An additional feature is incorporated into the control algorithm, software V1.3 and above, which will overdrive the Stepper motor output should the valve not close to 0% in an 8 hour period. Please consult the stepper valve manufacturer s data sheet to obtain the number of steps required to overdrive the valve. Stepper Valve Control Using Pressure Superheat can be derived from a pressure transducer measuring the suction pressure and the suction temperature. There are 2 methods of connecting a pressure transducer: - 1. Via the PR0722 connected to a Mercury Mk2 or directly to an Intuitive Mercury (local) 2. Via the PR0018-PHI (remote) Local pressure transducer connections has been previously described in this document, remote connection can be found on the user guide for PR0018-PHI Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) MOP is a remote command sent from the Mercury switch (PR0018-PHI) to the controller to either close or reduce the Stepper Valve opening when a predetermined pressure is reached. This MOP value is configured in the Mercury switch setup. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if the Div Value parameter is set to 40% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve the controller will open the valve will be limited to 40%. Relay State and functional operation Relay 1-3 State Function State Wired contact Relay 1 off Not running N/O Relay 1 on Running N/O Relay 2 off Fail N/O Relay 2 on Normal N/O Relay 3 off Alarm Relay = Alarm N/C Relay 3 on Alarm Relay = OK N/C Relay 4 & Function State Wired contact Stepper State Relay 4 off Remote off N/O Relay 4 on Remote on N/O Stepper Valve Off Stepper Valve Closing As per I/O Diagram Stepper Valve On Stepper Valve Operating As per I/O Diagram N/O N/O Signal Input N/C N/C Ground Example of relay 1 and 2 wired for operation with the CO2 Pump Station Controller Relay 1 (Run Output) will energise as stepper valve starts to open. Relay 2 (Run Fail) will be energised during normal operation and will de-energise for transducer faults and superheat low alarms. Revision 1.3C Page 12 of 19

370 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). When logging a Mercury or Intuitive Mercury with an RS232 interface onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module, this is either a 485 Legacy, RDM Wireless Mesh system IP, Futura or Mercury Switch. When using an Intuitive Mercury controller, the controller has to have the correct network card fitted (see compatible network interfaces ). For connection to a Mercury Switch (Hub) or an external network interface, the standard fitment RS232 network card is utilized. RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Connecting an RS485 legacy Module or an Intuitive Internal RS485 network card to the controller will govern which set up screens are made available. Both modules support the Genus protocol only. Display 485t 485A gadd rlog CLrA ESC Option 485 Network Type 485 Address/Name Show underlying network address assigned to controller Re-log the controller back onto the network Clear the address/name from the controller Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu The 485t option shows a value representing the network type, in this controller there is only one type Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) 2 RDM Wireless Mesh System The 485A option shows a value representing either the name of the controller in a Genus compatible or Wireless Mesh network. Wireless Mesh Communication Module RDM Wireless Mesh System, please refer to the RDM Wireless Mesh Communication Module user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a Wireless Mesh network. The value shown in 485A is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible or RDM Wireless Mesh network using the name RC05-6. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. To enter this mode, hold the Enter, Up and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message CLrA appears on the display. CLrA is the first option in the menu consisting of the following options: Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card In an IP system there are two options, IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Manager) IP-L To configure the communication module or network card for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the controller should be powered off, all three rotary switches set to zero and the controller powered on. Revision 1.3C Page 13 of 19

371 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the three rotary switches must be set when the controller is powered off, the controller should then be powered on to connect to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Mercury Switch Please refer to the Mercury Switch user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a network. Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs and controller states. From the function menu, select I/O, press enter. You can now scroll through the IO table as set out below Input / Output Table Number IO Range* o C ( o F ) Step Units I-01 Probe 1-42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-02 Probe 2-42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-03 Evaporator Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-04 Suction Line Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-05 Superheat -30 to 60 (-54 to 108) 0.1 Deg I-06 Run 0 = Off, 1 = Run 1 I-07 Remote Evaporator temp -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-08 MOP 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 I-09 Div Input 0 to % I-10 Pressure Bar I-11 Pressure temperature -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-01 Valve Opening 0 to % O-02 Run Output 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-03 Run Fail 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-04 Alarm Relay 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-05 Remote Relay 0 (Off), 1 (On) 1 O-18 Run Time K Hours 1 O-19 Valve Step S-01 Control State 0 = Stabilise, 1 = Normal, 2 = Alarm 1 S-02 Valve State 0 (Off), 1 (Start), 2 (Run), 3 (Problem), 4 (Fail), 5 (Initial) 1 Revision 1.3C Page 14 of 19

372 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide * Range is dependent on probe type Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury display. Display Message Ft Prb1 Prb2 Prb3 Prb4 AL System status Control Fault Probe 1 Fault Probe 2 Fault Probe 3 Fault Probe 4 Fault Control State in Alarm Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) Superheat Low 5 Superheat problem 6 Probe 1 fault 6 Probe 2 fault 6 Probe 3 fault 6 Probe 4 fault 6 Alarm text Type # (index) Probe 5 fault 6 Transducer fault 6 Monitor Probe 1 OT 4 Monitor Probe 2 OT 4 Controller Off 29 Probe Offset This feature allows each probe value to be modified by an offset. Offset values are from -10 O C (-18 O F) to +10 O C (+18 O F) and on a channel basis. Example C1 = Probe 1. Remote Commands The following commands can be used by a Data Builder program: - Command Value to send Description Conditions Haccp Command HACCP LED OFF HACCP LED On HACCP LED Flashes Haccp Command Button Command Buttons backlights Off Buttons backlights On Buttons Backlights Flash Button Command EEV Command 2 Shuts the valve off EEV Command 1 Restores the valve to normal operation Divider Command 0 to 100% Sets the maximum valve opening to this percentage. Divider Command Use an Analogue Out block configured to the controller name and in the value field type in the command you require. Use a Setting block as the input to the Analogue Out block to send the Value. See Example on the right, which turns on the HACCP LED. Revision 1.3C Page 15 of 19

373 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Specification Power requirements Mercury Mk2 Stepper Controller PR0712 & PR0713 Intuitive Mercury Stepper controller PR0752 & PR0762 Supply Voltage Range 24 Vac ±10% or 24Vdc ±10% 24 Vac ±10% or 24Vdc ±10% Supply Frequency Hz ±10% or dc Hz ±10% or dc Maximum supply current 0.5 Amps (Total max. current dependant on 0.5 Amps (Total max. current dependant on stepper motor used) stepper motor used) Typical supply current <1 Amp <1 Amp General Operating temperature range +5 0 C to C +5 0 C to C Storage temperature range C to C C to C Environmental Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Indoor use at altitudes up to 2000m, pollution degree 1, installation category II. Voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of nominal voltage. Size 78mm (W) x 36mm (H) x 110mm (D) 157mm (W) x 67mm (H) x 120 (D) Approx Weight 170 grams 500 grams Safety EN61010 EN61010 EMC EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 EN61326; Amdt. A1; 1998 Ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Class 2 Insulation No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted No protective Earth is required and none should be fitted Supply Fuse The host equipment must provide a suitable external over-current protection device such Built in fuse holder, fuse 2A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm as: - Fuse: 6.3A 240 Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC Or MCB 6A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN A, 240 VAC Type C conforming to BS EN (Note: controller has integral 2A fuse) Relay Fuse Not Fitted 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Valve Output Max current valve output Stepper Output Relay Specification Total Max current dependant on Stepper Motor used. Bipolar Stepper Motor 24V 8W Max. Maximum current cannot exceed 825mA Chopper Drive Total Max current dependant on Stepper Motor used. Bipolar Stepper Motor 24V 8W Max. Maximum current cannot exceed 825mA Chopper Drive Relays 1-3 Exclusive common Max current 6A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 2A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) 10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac, 30V dc 250Vac. 30V dc Relay Fuse N/A 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Relay 4 Exclusive common Max current 3A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 1A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) 10A Resistive (CosØ = 1) 3A Inductive ( CosØ = 0.4) Max voltage 250Vac 250Vac Relay Fuse N/A 10A 240Vac Antisurge (T) HRC conforming to IEC60127, 32 x 6.3mm Revision 1.3C Page 16 of 19

374 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Inputs Input resistance: Input type Comms: 3.01K Ohms (for PTC or NTC type probes) PT1000 or NTC2K or NTC2K25 or NTC10K (selectable) RS232 with flow control Installation Panel Cut-out and Clearances Mercury Mk2 (Flush mount controller) Fixing The controller is fixed by sliding the 2 plastic retaining clips up to rear of the panel. These clips have a ratchet action and can be removed by holding in the clip sides and sliding back. Dimensions Mercury Mk2 Dimensions Intuitive Mercury controller Revision 1.3C Page 17 of 19

375 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Three clips fix the Intuitive Mercury securely to DIN rail. Pull each clip until it clicks to remove the controller. Each clip has a mounting hole to provide an alternative fixing mechanism to DIN mounting. Cleaning Do not wet the controller when cleaning. Clean the front by wiping with slightly damped lint free cloth. Ventilation There is no requirement for forced cooling ventilation Disclaimer The specifications of the product detailed in this document may change without notice. RDM Ltd shall not be liable for errors or omissions, for incidental or consequential damages, directly or indirectly, in connection with the furnishing, performance or misuse of this product or document. Revision 1.3C Page 18 of 19

376 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Plate Heat Exchanger Installation Guide Appendix 1 Step Speed (Frequency Hz) When setting the Step Speed, P-43, the following table applies. Step Speed Entered Actual Speed Set (Hz) Step Speed Entered Actual Speed Set (Hz) 500 and above to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to and below to Please confirm with the Stepper valve manufacturer datasheets to select the correct step frequency. Revision History Revision Date Changes 1.3B 30/06/2011 Current Issue 1.3C 13/01/2012 Inp. option removed Revision 1.3C Page 19 of 19

377 Mercury PR0710 PR0711 PR0720 PR0721 Intuitive PR0750 PR0751 PR0760 PR0761 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury Controller Installation & User Guide For Products: - PR0710, PR0711, PR0720, PR0721 Resource Data Management Ltd 80 Johnstone Avenue, Hillington Industrial Estate, Glasgow, Scotland G52 4NZ UK +44(0) Switchboard support@resourcedm.com Technical Support sales@resourcedm.com Sales Enquiries

378 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Table of Contents: THE MERCURY & INTUITIVE RANGE... 4 Variants... 4 Mercury Mk2 6-5E and 6-5M... 4 Intuitive Mercury 6-5E and 6-5M... 4 Compatible Displays... 4 Configuration... 4 Compatible Network Interfaces... 5 Front Display Features... 5 Connections... 6 Mercury Mk2 6-5E and 6-5M... 6 Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options... 6 Input and Output Allocation Tables... 7 Input / Output allocation table for the 6-5M (Mechanical Expansion Valve or Compressor)... 7 Input / Output allocation tables for 6-5E (Electronic Expansion Valve)... 7 Switched Resistor Values... 7 Setting up the controller... 8 Setup through front buttons... 8 Setup Function Menu (Common to all types)... 8 Recommended set-up method... 8 rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems)... 8 type. Set/view controller type... 8 PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end)... 8 Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type... 9 Display... 9 Parameter Tables... 9 Parameter Descriptions EEV Control Using Pressure Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) Relay State and functional operation Relay and screen states during defrost Defrost Type (P-91) Defrost Termination Fan Delay after Defrost Network Configuration RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Wireless Mesh Communication Module Fast Network Address Reset IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card Mercury Switch Viewing Input / Output Table Maximum and Minimum Control Temperature Alarm Messages Network Alarms Modifying controller states Fans Only FAnS Case Off CASE Lights Only LitS Probe Offset Remote Commands Power requirements Relay Specification Specification Inputs Switched Resistor Example Wiring Installation Revision 1.0 Page 2 of 26

379 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Dimensions Fixing Dimensions Intuitive Mercury Mounting Instructions Cleaning Disclaimer APPENDIX 1 DEFROST CYCLES APPENDIX 2 TRIM HEATER CONTROL VIA MERCURY/INTUITIVE RANGE REVISION HISTORY Revision 1.0 Page 3 of 26

380 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide The Mercury & Intuitive Range From Resource Data Management For Version 1.7M & 2.2E The Mercury Mk2 controller is primarily intended for use in refrigeration display cabinets or coldroom applications. It will switch the evaporator valve (LLV or EEV) based on the value of its temperature probe inputs. It has outputs to control lights, fans, suction valve, trim heaters and defrost control. The controller has many features some of which are energy saving; such as the pulse trim heaters parameter, see parameter section for further details. There are two hardware types of the Mercury Mk2 controller, one that has Relay 1 as a Solid State Relay for switching EEVs and the second type is an M version that has Relay 1 as an electro-mechanical relay for switching solenoid LLVs. These are named Mercury Mk2 6-5E and 6-5M respectively. There is also a DIN rail mounted range, known as the Intuitive Mercury range, which is designed to be used in a control panel or electrical tray. This range has the same features as the Mercury Mk2 controller with additional benefits such as higher rated relays each protected by an integral fuse and fuse protection for the incoming power supply, all connections are plug in socket. There are multiple network interfaces to choose from including Ethernet. The controller supports PT1000, NTC2K, 470R, 700R, 3K, 5K, 6K, NTC2K25, NTC10K or NTC10K(2) temperature probes (note: probe types cannot be mixed) Variants Mercury Mk2 6-5E and 6-5M Description Mercury Mk2 6-5M Mechanical expansion valve type, integral display. Mercury Mk2 6-5E Electronic expansion valve type, integral display. Mercury Mk2 6-5MR Mechanical expansion valve type, remote display. Mercury Mk2 6-5ER Electronic expansion valve, remote display. Part Number PR0710 PR0711 PR0720 PR0721 Intuitive Mercury 6-5E and 6-5M Description Intuitive Mercury 6-5M Mechanical expansion valve type, integral display. Intuitive Mercury 6-5E Electronic expansion valve type, integral display. Intuitive Mercury 6-5MR Mechanical expansion valve type, remote display. Intuitive Mercury 6-5ER Electronic expansion valve type, remote display. Part Number PR0750 PR0751 PR0760 PR0761 Compatible Displays The following displays are compatible with the Mercury / Intuitive Remote Display Controllers (PRO720, PRO721, PR0760 & PR0761): - Description Mercury Remote Display with 5m cable Mercury Keyswitch Remote Display with 5m cable Mercury DIN Remote Display with 5m cable Mercury DIN Keyswitch Remote Display with 5m cable Mercury mk2 Remote Display with 5m cable Part Number PR0325 PR0326 PR0327 PR0328 PR0725 Configuration The controller gives you up to six configuration options: - Display value Mercury Mk2 / Intuitive 6-5M Mercury Mk2 / Intuitive 6-5E 1 Integral controller HT N/A 2 Integral controller LT N/A 3 Remote piped case controller LT Remote piped case controller LT 4 Remote piped case controller HT Remote piped case controller HT 5 Coldroom controller LT Coldroom controller LT 6 Coldroom controller HT Coldroom controller HT The controllers are delivered pre-configured: - 6-5M as an Integral controller HT (Type 1) 6-5E as Remote case controller LT (Type 3) Revision 1.0 Page 4 of 26

381 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Compatible Network Interfaces Mercury and Intuitive Mercury controllers are capable of connecting to either a TCP/IP local area network, an RS485 Genus compatible network, an RDM wireless mesh network or they can be used in standalone mode with no network output. To connect to a network you must add the correct communications module. Connecting to any of these communication modules will automatically be detected on power up and will affect the set up screens available to you. Description IP Futura (Single Mercury to IP Interface) RS485 Interface (Single Mercury to RS485 Interface) Mercury IP Switch (IP support for 10 controllers) Mercury IP Switch with Pressure/Humidity Inputs Wireless Mesh Interface (for single Mercury) Part Number PR0016 PR0026 PR0018 PR0018-PHI PR0730 The Intuitive Mercury Controller is supplied as standard with an internal RS232 network card, this allows connection to any of the above external network interfaces. Three alternative internal network cards are also available, these can be supplied factory fitted as an option or purchased separately as an interface kit. Description Intuitive Internal IP Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal RS485 Network Card Interface Kit Intuitive Internal Wireless Mesh Network Card Interface Kit Part Number PR0770 PR0771 PR0772 Front Display Features LED s: - Valve (Relay 1) Fans (Relay 2) Lights (Relay 3) Defrost (Relay 5) Keys On-Line Off No network attached Flashing Attempting to Log on to network Steady On-line Service (See Parameter 18 for setup) Enter Up Down Defrost Note: Function keys illuminate when pressed, illumination is turned off 20 seconds after the key is used. Press and hold the defrost button to force a manual defrost Alarm Main Display HACCP 4 character LED display, used to display temperature and status messages. Note the Intuitive Mercury display is Green in colour when lit. Revision 1.0 Page 5 of 26

382 N N/C L Relay 3 N/C Relay 3 N/O Relay 3 Common Relay 2 N/C Relay 2 N/O Relay 2 Common Relay 1 N/C Relay 1 N/O Relay 1 Common Probe 6 Ground Probe 5 Ground Probe 4 Ground Probe 3 Ground Probe 2 Ground Probe 1 Ground Relay 5 Common Relay 5 N/O Relay 5 N/C Relay 4 Common Relay 4 N/O Relay 4 N/C Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Connections Mercury Mk2 6-5E and 6-5M Input and Output connections are made to the back of the controller, the RS232 communication port is on the side. The diagram shows the connection detail. Inputs and outputs are assigned according to the chosen configuration. See Input/Output tables for further details on connections. Intuitive Mercury Controller Intuitive Mercury Network Expansion Options RS232 Network Card (Default) The Intuitive Mercury is supplied with an RS232 Network Card fitted as standard. Some example optional network cards are shown below IP Network Card (PR0770) Rotary Address Switches Network Collision LED Network Activity LED RS485 Network Card (PR0771) Mains Supply vAC 50-60Hz All inputs and outputs are plug and socket. The supply voltage and relay outputs have individual fuse protection. Network Expansion Port Ground B- Ground A+ Network Activity LED Screen PR0772 Wireless Mesh Option also available. The network interfaces work in the same way as there external counterparts. Revision 1.0 Page 6 of 26

383 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Input and Output Allocation Tables The following tables indicate; on a controller type basis, the functions of the inputs and outputs. Also shown are the digital inputs that are derived by switching in a fixed value resistor across the input. Input / Output allocation table for the 6-5M (Mechanical Expansion Valve or Compressor) TYPE Integral Case Types 1&2 Remote Case Types 3&4 Coldroom Controller Types 5&6 Alarm Action Plant Input (Switched Resistors) Input 1 Air on Temperature Air on Temperature Air on Temperature Yes Input 2 Air off Temperature Air off Temperature Air off Temperature Yes Man Trap alarm type 5 & 6 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Evaporator Temperature Suction Line Temperature Defrost Termination or Monitor probe (if used) Evaporator Temperature Suction Line Temperature Defrost Termination or Monitor probe (if used) Evaporator Temperature Suction Line Temperature Defrost Termination or Monitor probe (if used) No No Conditional* Input 6 Logging Probe (If fitted) Logging Probe (If fitted) Logging Probe (If fitted) Conditional* Relay 1 Compressor A Liquid Line Valve Liquid Line Valve N/A Relay 2 Fans Fans Fans N/A Relay 3 Lights/Alarm Relay Lights/Alarm Relay Lights/Alarm Relay N/A Relay 4 Compressor B Suction Line Valve/Trim Heater/Alarm Relay/Remote Relay Suction Line Valve/Alarm Relay/Remote Relay 5 Defrost Heater Defrost Heater (N/O) Defrost Heater (N/O) N/A N/A Plant fault 1 or External Defrost Input Case Clean Switch Plant fault 2 on types 1 & 2 Door switch on types 5 & 6 Input / Output allocation tables for 6-5E (Electronic Expansion Valve) TYPE Remote Case Types 3&4 Coldroom Controller Types 5&6 Alarm Action Plant Input (Switched Resistors) Input 1 Air on Temperature Air on Temperature Yes Plant fault 1 or External Defrost Input Input 2 Air off Temperature Air off Temperature Yes Case Clean Switch Input 3 Evaporator Temperature Evaporator Temperature Yes Input 4 Suction Line Temperature Suction Line Temperature Yes Input 5 Defrost Termination or Monitor probe (if used) Defrost Termination or Monitor probe (if used) Conditional* Door Switch on types 5 & 6 Input 6 Logging Probe (If fitted) Logging Probe (If fitted) Conditional* Man Trap on types 5 & 6 Relay 1 Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve N/A Relay 2 Fans Fans N/A Relay 3 Lights/Alarm Relay Lights/Alarm Relay N/A Relay 4 Suction Line Valve/Trim Heater/Alarm Suction Line Valve/Alarm Relay/Remote N/A Relay/Remote Relay Relay 5 Defrost Heater (N/O) Defrost Heater (N/O) N/A * Alarm on monitor probe only if used Switched Resistor Values For PT1000 probes use 820 Ohm switched resistors. For NTC2K, NTC2K25 and 3K probes use 590 Ohm switched resistors. For 5K and 6K use 1K Ohm switched resistors. For NTC10K probes use 2k7 Ohm switched resistors. For NTC10K(2) probes use 2k2 Ohm switched resistors. The resistors used must have a tolerance of 1% or better and the resistor must have a power rating of 0.25W. For improved accuracy whilst using switched resistors RDM recommend resistors with 0.1% accuracy are used. Note the switched resistor features will not function when using 470R or 700R probes. When a resistor is switched across the appropriate input it signals to the Mercury to enable the switched resistor function described for that input whilst still recording the probe temperature on the input. Temperature range for all probe types is -49 o C to +60 o C for probe inputs which do not have a secondary function (switched resistors). Inputs which have a secondary function are restricted to -42 o C to +60 o C. If the full temperature range is required on all inputs and no switch resistor features are needed then please see Switch Resistor parameter P-19 Note: switched resistors will operate in LT (Low Temperature) and HT (High Temperature) applications using PT1000, NTC2K or NTC2K25 probe types only. For all other probe types the switched resistor inputs will work in HT applications only. Revision 1.0 Page 7 of 26

384 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Setting up the controller Access to the controller can be achieved several ways Through the front mounted buttons Direct access by PC or palm top into the rear comms port. This requires a software package available on the RDM website Through legacy front end panels on 485 networks Through the RDM Data Manager. Across an IP network. (Current controller IP address required) Setup through front buttons ENTER UP DOWN To enter setup mode, hold the Enter and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message Ent appears on the display. Now press the Enter button again to enter the function menu. IO will be displayed. Scroll up or down to go through the list. Setup Function Menu (Common to all types) Display Option Recommended set-up method Explained in Paragraph Display If you are not connecting to a network and want to set up the controller through the buttons we recommend you use the following order from the function menu. rtc. Real time clock (This will automatically synchronise on network systems) a. Use the up or down buttons to scroll through the display until the display reads rtc b. Press enter. The display will show t-1. press enter again c. Scroll hours up or down (0 23) press enter d. Use up button to select t-2, press enter e. Scroll minutes up or down (0 59) press enter f. Repeat for t-3 (seconds 0 59) g. Repeat for t -4 (Days up to 31) h. Repeat for t -5 (months up to 12) i. Repeat for t -6 (Year up to 99) j. Use up button to display ESC, press enter to display rtc Option Explained in Paragraph IO View Inputs / Outputs and Input / output table net Set/view network configuration Network States Configuration PArA Set/View Parameters Set view parameters SoFt View software version Unit Probe type and Set View Unit FANS Toggle Fans Only mode Fans Celsius/Fahrenheit option disp Display whole units or Display CASE Toggle Case Off mode Case Off decimal type Set/View Controller Type Set/view controller type Lits Toggle Lights Only mode Lights rtc Set/view Clock (rtc = Real Time Clock) Real Time Clock OFSt Probe Offset Probe Offset Time clock is now set type. Set/view controller type a. From the function menu scroll to select type, press enter b. Use the up/down buttons to scroll through case/coldroom configuration types. (see configuration table on page 4) c. Press enter. d. Scroll to select ESC e. Press enter Controller type configuration is now set PArA. Set/view parameters (This can be achieved at the network front end) a. From the function menu scroll to select PArA b. Pressing Enter while PArA is displayed will enter the parameter menu. The first parameter option will be displayed as P- 01. Pressing the Up or Down button will present the other parameter options P-02, P-03 etc. See the parameter list below to find what parameter number corresponds to which actual parameter. Pressing the Enter button will show the current value of the selected parameter. Press Up or Down to modify the value and press Enter again to save the value. The parameter list number will be displayed again. Two other options are present in the parameter menu dflt and ESC. Selecting ESC will exit setup mode. Selecting dflt will reset all parameters back to the default values for the current type of controller. ESC Exit Setup mode Revision 1.0 Page 8 of 26

385 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Unit. Set/view temperature unit and Probe type From the function menu scroll to select Unit Press enter and the value will be displayed: - Probe Types 0 for PT1000 Celsius 1 for PT1000 Fahrenheit 2 for NTC2K Celsius 3 for NTC2K Fahrenheit 4 for 470R Celsius 5 for 470R Fahrenheit 6 for 700R Celsius 7 for 700R Fahrenheit 8 for 3K Celsius 9 for 3K Fahrenheit 10 for NTC2K25 Celsius 11 for NTC2K25 Fahrenheit 12 for 5K Celsius 13 for 5K Fahrenheit 14 for 6K Celsius 15 for 6K Fahrenheit 16 for NTC10K Celsius 17 for NTC10K Fahrenheit 18 for NTC10K(2) Celsius (USA NTC10K) 19 for NTC10K(2) Fahrenheit (USA NTC10K) Use the up or down keys to select the units and press enter. This function is now complete Display From the function menu scroll to and select disp. Press enter and one of the following values will be shown: - 0. Controller display will show the whole number and tenths value of a temperature reading. (Default) 1. Controller display will show temperatures as a whole number. Parameter Tables Not all parameters apply to all controller types, for example P-08 is Superheat reference which only applies to electronic expansion valve controllers (E types 3, 4, 5 & 6), this parameter will not appear if the controller is set up as a type 1 or 2 (integral case). In the following table, the type columns on the right hand side will be greyed out if that parameter does not apply to that controller type. Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Default LT C ( o F ) Default HT C ( o F ) M Type 1&2 M Type 3&4 M Type 5&6 E Type 3&4 P-01 Cut-in Temp. -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) Cut-in Temp. (Integral) -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 3.5 (38.3) P-02 Diff. 0 to 10 (0 to 18) 0.1 Deg 2 (3.6) 1.5 (2.7) Diff. (Integral) 0 to 10 (0 to 18) 0.1 Deg 2.5 (4.5) 2.5 (4.5) P-03 Control Weight 0 to % Control Weight (Integral) 0 to % P-04 Display Weight 0 to % Display Weight 0 to % (Integral) P-05 Lag Comp Delay 00:00 to 15:00 00:05 mm:ss 00:40 00:10 P-06 Anti SC Time 00:00 to 15:00 00:05 mm:ss 03:00 03:00 P-07 Lag Cut Out Diff 0 to 10 (0 to 18) 0.1 Deg 2.5 (4.5) 2.5 (4.5) P-08 Superheat Ref 0 to12 (7.2 to 21.6) 0.1 Deg 6 (10.8) 6 (10.8) P-09 Response On 1 to P-10 Response Off 1 to P-11 Control Type 0 = EEV 1 = EET = EEV/EET P-51 EEV Minimum 0-100% 1 % Opening P-52 Superheat Problem 0 12 o C ( o F) 0.1 Deg 0 0 P-53 Superheat EEV Problem Opening 0-100% E Type 5&6 Revision 1.0 Page 9 of 26

386 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Default LT o C ( o F ) Default HT o C ( o F ) M Type 1&2 M Type 3&4 M Type 5&6 E Type 3&4 P-54 Superheat EEV 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 03:00 03:00 Problem Time P-56 EEV Start Opening 0-100% 1 % P-55 Average Valve 0-100% 1 % Opening P-57 EEV Divide Value 0-100% P-12 Relay 4 Mode 0 = Suction Line 1 = Trim Heater 2 = Alarm 3 = Remote 4 = Trim Hub Relay 4 Mode (Coldroom) 0 = Suction Line 1 = Alarm 2 = Remote E Type 5& P-13 Trim in Defrost 0 (Off), 1(On) 0 0 P-14 Trim Level 0 to % P-85 Key-switch Mode 0 = Case Off = Fans only 2 = toggle P-87 Control Probe type 0 = Use Air on Probe = Use Log Probe P-90 Resistor Case Off 0 (Disabled),1(Enabled) 0 0 P-92 Fans temperature 0 = Off mode 1 = Temperature 2 = Over-temperature 3 = Temp/OT P-93 Fans Off -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -10 (14) 8 (46.4) Temperature P-83 Fan Control 0 = Off = Run 2 = Pulse P-78 Fan Pulse On 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 05:00 P-79 Fan Pulse Off 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 30:00 30:00 P-15 Probe 5 Select 0 = Defrost, 1 = Monitor P-16 Relay 3 Mode 0 = Lights, 1 = Alarm P-17 Suction Select 0 = Local 1 = Remote P-97 Control Fail On/Off (Mechanical Valve) 00:00 to 10:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 Control Fail Valve Level (EEV) 0 to 100% 0.1 % 0 0 P-29 Probe 3 Resistor function (Mechanical Valve) 0 = Plant fault, 1 = External defrost Probe 1 Resistor 0 = Plant fault, Function (EEV) 1 = External defrost P-18 Service Interval 0 to KHrs time P-19 Switch Resistors 0 (Off), 1(On) 1 1 P-77 Man Stop LLV/Fans 0 (Off), 1(On) P-98 Lights Case Off 0 (Off), 1 (On), (Unused) P-20 Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-21 UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -30 (-22) -2 (28.4) P-22 OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -15 (5) 5 (41) P-23 Log Probe Type 0 (Off), 1 (Logging), Off Off 2 (Logging/Alarm) P-24 Slug Log Probe 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-25 Log Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-26 Log UT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -35 (-31) -1 (30.2) Log UT Alarm (Mechanical Valve Coldroom) -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -30 (22) -2 (28.4) Revision 1.0 Page 10 of 26

387 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Number Parameter Range o C ( o F ) Step Units Default LT o C ( o F ) Default HT o C ( o F ) M Type 1&2 M Type 3&4 M Type 5&6 E Type 3&4 P-27 Log OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -12 (10.4) 6 (42.8) Log OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg -15 (5) 5 (41) (Mechanical Valve Coldroom) P-28 Monitor OT Alarm -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg 20 (68) 20 (68) P-40 Defrost Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote), Local Local 2 (External) P-41 Defrost Start 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 01:00 01:00 P-42 Defrosts per Day 0 to P-43 No Defrost Time 0 to 25 1 hours 8 8 No Defrost Time 0 to 25 1 hours 8 5 (Integral) No Defrost Time 0 to 25 1 hours (EEV) P-44 Def Terminate -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg 14 (57.2) 10 (50) Temp. Def Terminate -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg 10 (50) 10 (50) Temp. (Integral) P-45 Def Min Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 05:00 05:00 P-46 Def Max Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 24:00 24:00 Def Max Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 25:00 30:00 (Integral) P-47 Drain Down 00:00 to 24:00 00:15 mm:ss 01:30 01:30 Drain Down 00:00 to 24:00 00:15 mm:ss 01:30 00:30 (Integral) P-48 Recovery Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 30:00 30:00 P-89 Pump Down Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 P-86 Fan Delay mode 0 = Time 1 = Temp P-49 Fan Delay Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 00:00 00:00 Types (Cabinet) Fan Delay Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 03:00 03:00 Types (Integral & Coldroom) P-88 Fan Delay Temp -42 to 30 (-43.6 to 86) 0.1 Deg -20 (-4) 0.0 (32) P-50 Fans In Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) On On Fans In Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off (Coldroom) P-91 Defrost Type 0 = Electric, 1 = Gas P-94 Defrost Hold 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-95 Defrost Skip 0 (Off), 1 (On) Off Off P-96 Defrost Skip Time 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 12:00 12:00 P-80 Door Alarm Delay 00:00 to 99:00 01:00 mm:ss 20:00 20:00 P-81 Door Closes LL 0 (No), 1 (Yes) No No P-82 Door Stops Fan 0 (No), 1 (Yes) No No P-60 Lights Mode 0 (Local), 1 (Remote), Local Local 2 (Man Off), 3(Man On) P-61 Sun Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-62 Sun Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-63 Mon Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-64 Mon Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-65 Tue Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-66 Tue Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-67 Wed Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-68 Wed Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-69 Thu Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-70 Thu Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-71 Fri Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-72 Fri Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 P-73 Sat Lights On 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 08:00 08:00 P-74 Sat Lights Off 00:00 to 23:59 00:01 hh:mm 20:00 20:00 dflt Restore defaults E Type 5&6 Revision 1.0 Page 11 of 26

388 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Parameter Descriptions Number Parameter Description P-01 Cut-in Temp Temperature at which the LLV or compressor will switch on. P-02 Diff Differential temperature below the cut-in temperature. The LLV or lead compressor switches off when below this temperature P-03 Control Weight Percentage of the Air-On temperature that is used to calculate the control temp. The remaining percentage will be used on the Air-Off temperature Example, P-03 set to 30% Control temp = 30% Air-on + 70% Air-off P-04 Display Weight As above only applied to the display temperature P-05 Lag Comp Delay Delay before the second compressor is switched on if the temperature is still above set-point. Note The lead and lag compressors swap after each defrost to even the run times. P-06 Anti SC Time Allows the user to set the compressor for a given number of starts/hour P-07 Lag Cut Out Diff Diff below the Cut-In Temp the lag compressor switches off. Single Compressor Operation To disable compressor B operation and use only a single compressor for control set parameter P-07 to 0. This will allow the controller work with just one compressor (A) and ignore compressor B. P-08 Superheat Ref The controller will attempt to maintain this superheat value P-09 Response on Allows the user to speed up the EEV on time. With 30 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-10 Response off Allows the user to speed up the EEV off time. With 30 providing the quickest response and 1 providing the slowest response. P-11 Control Type Allows the user to select either EEV control, EET control or EEV/EET control. Note the Evaporator Temperature probe should be fitted to the coldest point in the evaporator. EEV uses the superheat as its main reference with the cabinet temperature as a secondary control. EET use the cabinet temperature as its main reference. EEV/EET uses cabinet temperature as the main control until the SH gets close to the SH reference point, then it switches to EEV control, it switches back to EET control when the SH reference is satisfied. P-51 EEV Minimum Opening Sets the minimum valve opening level, during normal operation the valve will not go below this level. (Default 10%) IF used in conjunction with a Mercury Pressure Hub PR0018-PHI then the Minimum value should be set at 0% P-52 Superheat Problem Sets the point at which the algorithm will go to the EEV Problem state due to the superheat temperature. For example if this parameter is set to 0 Degrees and the Superheat value falls to 0 degrees or below, for the duration of P-54, then the controller will enter the superheat problem state. P-53 Superheat EEV Sets the valve open position when entering the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Opening P-54 Superheat EEV Sets the time the algorithm stays in the Superheat EEV Problem state. Problem Time P-56 EEV Start Opening Sets the valve opening % which is used when the controller first powers up. It is also used when the controller exits a problem state for example Superheat EEV Problem state. P-55 Average Valve Opening Normally the valve during recovery will open to the last average position. This setting allows for that value to be reduced by said percentage. For example if the average valve opening is calculated as 80% and P- 55 is set to 50% then the valve will open at 40%. P-57 EEV Divide value This parameter only takes effect when the controller is used in conjunction with a Mercury Switch pressure application. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if this parameter is set to 50% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve opening will be limited to 50%. Therefore as the controller pulses the valve the maximum the valve will open is 50%. Note P-51 EEV Minimum opening overrides the valve output operation and the valve will not pulse below this setting. Please see MOP note. Please note parameters P-51 through to P-57 should not be altered without first understanding the effects they may have on the case operation. If incorrectly set they may have undesired affects. P-12 Relay 4 Mode Relay 4 can be a Suction, Trim Heater, Alarm, Remote or Trim Hub relay. Suction set for Suction Line Valve operation. Trim Heater set as trim relay which pulses in accordance with P-14 or the Data Manager energy feature trim control. Alarm The alarm relay is energised for no alarm. Use the NC and Common for Loop make on alarm or use the NO and Common for Loop break on alarm. Remote The relay is available for remote purposes such as the Data Manager GP timer channel or Data Builder software. Trim Hub Relay is pulsed in accordance with the Trim Control feature present in the Mercury Switch (PR0018-PHI). Please see the Mercury switch (PR0018) user document for further details. P-13 Trim in Defrost Allows the trims to be off or on during a defrost. Revision 1.0 Page 12 of 26

389 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide P-14 Trim Level Sets a percentage level, of a 5-minute period, to pulse the trim heater relay off/on. Example: - P-14 set to 50% = 2.5 minutes on, 2.5 minutes off. If the controller is networked to a Data Manager operating the energy feature Trim Control then the Data Manager feature will override this parameter setting. Please refer to the Data Manager user document for further details. Note the trims are turned off when an over temperature alarm occurs. P-85 Key-switch Mode Allows the keys switch to be: - Single turn for case off (Case off mode) Single turn for Fans only (Fans Mode) Single turn for case off, double turn for fans only (Toggle mode) P-87 Control Probe type Switches between using the air-on probe and the Logging probe. Note the control and display temperature will still be a derivative of the weighted Average of the control probe + Air-off probe P-90 Resistor Case Off Turns on/off the switched resistor case off function P-92 Fans temperature mode Allows the user to set the fans to turn off when: - A pre-determined temperature is reached (P93) When an over-temperature alarm is present When either P93 is reached or an OT alarm is present P-93 Fans Off Temperature Temperature for the above (P92) operation. Note the defrost termination probe is the source of the temperature reading used in this feature. If the defrost termination probe isn t fitted then a similar process to P-44 is used. P-83 Fan Control This feature allows for coldroom fans to be stopped when the coldroom is down to temperature thus saving energy. This feature is present in both the M and E software. Run fans operate as per the normal control strategy. Pulse When the LLV closes the fans will stop when the Fan Pulse On parameter (P-78) time expires. The fans then remain off for the Fan Pulse Off time (P-79). When the parameter Fan Pulse Off time expires the fans come back on for the Fan Pulse on time. The cycle then repeats. The fans resume normal operation if the LLV operates. The fans pulse on/off to ensure the circulation of air within the coldroom. Off When the LLV closes the fans stay on for the Fan Pulse On (P-78) time before going off until the LLV next operates. Placement of the temperature control probes is important when using this feature P-78 Fan Pulse On The duration of the fans are pulsed on in Fan Control. P-79 Fan Pulse Off The duration of the fans are pulsed off in Fan Control. P-15 Probe 5 Select This input can be used as a defrost termination probe (default) or as a monitor probe with an OT alarm level (P-28) P-16 Relay 3 mode This changes the function of relay 3 from Lights (default) to an alarm relay. The alarm relay is energised for no alarm. Use the NC and Common for Loop make on alarm or use the NO and Common for Loop break on alarm. P-17 Suction Select This allows the control algorithm to use a remote temperature input in place of the evaporator in value. In the event of no remote value being received, the control algorithm will revert to using the evaporator in probe value until the remote value is restored. Please see EEV Control Using Pressure. P-97 Control Fail Valve Value P-29 Probe 1 or Probe 3 Resistor P-18 Service Interval Time (Run Hours) This value is used in the event of a control probe fail; In the EEV control algorithm the valve will remain at this opening until the probe fault has been cleared. Please note the incorrect setting of this value may result in flood back causing damage to the pack compressors. Do not adjust this parameter if you are unsure of the consequences. In M software this is the value to which the LLV/compressor relay will be pulsed open/closed. For example if set to 2 minutes then the LLV will be open for 2 minutes and then closed for two minutes. This process will continue until the control probe fail has been rectified. Selects whether the switched resistor invokes either a Plant fault or an External Defrost. If E software then probe input 1 is used. If M software then probe input 3 is used. Time (in 1000 x hours) before the service icon (Spanner icon) comes on. The Run Hours timer increments based on the number of hours the controller has been powered up and running. Reset the spanner icon to off by changing this parameter to 0 and then back to the desired service interval. This process also resets the Run Hours value to 0. To view the current Run Time value refer to the I/O list. P-19 Switch Resistors Enables switched resistors to be used for Plant Faults, External Defrosts, Case Clean, Man Trap, Door Switch See : Switched Resistor Values P-77 Man Stop LLV/Fans When man trap input is activated the LLV closes and Fans are stopped. Normal operation resumes when the mantrap input is deactivated. P-98 Lights Case Off Used to place the controller into Case Off when its lighting timer is in the off state. When the lighting timer is in the on state the controller follows its normal control operation. This feature is disabled if the set point (P-01) is below 6 o C. Please note that when the controller is in case off all alarms are inhibited and all outputs are turned off. Therefore care must be taken when enabling this parameter. Off Feature is not used and only the controller lights relay follows the lighting timer status. On - Feature is in use and controller will be in Case Off whenever the lights timer is in the off state. Unused This selection has no effect and should not be used. Please select from either Off or On. This feature operates in either Local, using controller RTC, or Remote, using Data Manager GP timer channel, lighting applications. P-20 Alarm Delay Delay for the over and under-temperature alarms P-21 UT Alarm Under temperature alarm set point. This alarm uses the control temperature. Revision 1.0 Page 13 of 26

390 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide P-22 OT Alarm Over temperature alarm set point. This alarm uses the air-off temperature. P-23 Log Probe Type Allows the user to set the logging probe mode: - Off Logging with no alarms Logging with alarms P-24 Slug Log Probe Applies a damping factor. This can be used to make a standard probe have the same temperature response as a logging probe. P-25 Log Alarm Delay Delay for the Logging probe over and under-temperature alarms P-26 Log UT Alarm Logging probe under temperature alarm set point P-27 Log OT Alarm Logging probe over temperature alarm set point P-28 Monitor OT Alarm Monitor probe over temperature alarm set point P-40 Defrost Mode Allows the user to set the defrost mode: - Local (Uses the internal parameters P-41 and P-42) Remote (Requires a defrost schedule in the front end) External (uses a switched resistor in input 1 (E) or 3 (M)). When this signal is present a defrost is initiated. Note: - If the external defrost signal is not removed then the controller will defrost according to the No Defrost time and a missed defrost alarm will be generated. See P-29 for external defrost signal setup. P-41 Defrost Start When defrost mode is set to Local, this is the start time for the 1 st defrost P-42 Defrosts per Day When defrost mode is set to Local, this is the number of defrosts per day equally spaced from the start time. P-43 No Defrost Time If the controller misses a defrost command for any reason, a defrost will initiate after this time has elapsed from the last defrost. Normally set to 2 hours over the normal defrost period. P-44 Def Terminate The defrost will terminate (defrost control relay off) when the temperature of the defrost termination probe reaches this value. If the "defrost termination" probe is not fitted, defrost termination will occur when: - The "coil in" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "off during defrost") Or The "air off" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "on during defrost"). If the "coil in" probe is not fitted, the "air off" probe will be used. P-45 Def Min Time Minimum time that a defrost will use (Defrost can t terminate until this time has elapsed. If termination temperature is reached during this period, the defrost control relay is turned off, but the controller will not continue the defrost cycle until the end of the defrost min period) P-46 Def Max Time Time period after defrost minimum that defrosts are allowed to terminate P-47 Drain Down A period after defrost max to allow the draining of any surplus water P-48 Recovery Time The LLV is switched on at the start of this period to allow the temperature to recover to the normal operating point. This period also inhibits the OT alarm. Note that if the air-off temperature is still above the OT alarm setpoint when this period expires, an immediate OT alarm occurs; there is not a further alarm delay. P-89 Pump Down Time Time period before the defrost min period to allow for a pump down P-86 Fan Delay mode This parameter allows the fans start after a drain-down period to be delayed, either by time (P-49) or when the temperature point (P-88) is reached. This parameter uses the same probe strategy as the defrost terminate. P-49 Fan Delay Time after a drain-down period before the fans start if P-86 is set to time P-88 Fan Delay Temp Temperature at which the fans start after a drain-down period when P-86 is set to temperature. P-50 Fans In Defrost Allows the user to set the fans on or off in defrost. Note if the fans are set to on in defrost, they will go off for the drain-down period and then follow the P-86 rules. P-94 Defrost Hold Turns the defrost hold feature on and off. When switched on, the controller can be held in defrost until a remote command from the front end starts the recovery process. P-95 Defrost Skip Allows user to enable/disable defrost skip. This feature allows the controller to skip defrosts. If the current defrost terminates on temperature then the controller will skip the next scheduled defrost providing the previous defrost terminated before the defrost skip time (P-96). Operates only when the controller is set to local defrost scheduling. P-96 Defrost Skip Time Time factor used in defrost skip. The previous defrost has to terminate before this value expires to allow the controller to skip a defrost. P-91 Defrost Type Allows the user to select electric or gas defrost. If gas is selected, the compressor is kept running for the duration of a defrost. P-80 Door alarm delay Delay after the door open input is activated before the alarm occurs. P-81 Door Closes Valve This parameter is used to close the LLV or EEV if the door opens. If the door remains open then the valve will resume normal operation on the expiry of the door alarm delay (P-80). P-82 Door Stops Fan This parameter is used to stop the fans if the door opens. If the door remains open then the fans will resume normal operation on the expiry of the door alarm delay (P-80). Revision 1.0 Page 14 of 26

391 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide P-60 Lights Mode Allows the user to set the lights mode: - Always off Always on Use a local schedule P-61 to P-74) Use a remote schedule (Set up in the system front end) P-61 Sun Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Sunday on time P-62 Sun Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Sunday off time P-63 Mon Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Monday on time P-64 Mon Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Monday off time P-65 Tue Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Tuesday on time P-66 Tue Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Tuesday off time P-67 Wed Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Wednesday on time P-68 Wed Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Wednesday off time P-69 Thu Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Thursday on time P-70 Thu Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Thursday off time P-71 Fri Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Friday on time P-72 Fri Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Friday off time P-73 Sat Lights On When P-60 is set to Local, Saturday on time P-74 Sat Lights Off When P-60 is set to Local, Saturday off time dflt Restore default values Restores all of the parameters to their default values EEV Control Using Pressure The Mercury Switch (PR0018-PHI) can be used for EEV control on an Island by island basis. In an EEV application the evaporator in temperature probe reading for a case controller can be obtained from the Mercury switch on which the controller is connected. A suction pressure transducer is connected from the case Island to the 4-20mA input of the Mercury Switch and the pressure read from this transducer is converted to a temperature based on the gas type being used by the system. This temperature is transmitted to each controller connected to the switch and along with the suction temperature probe local to the controller the superheat is calculated. Please note that RDM recommended that the evaporator in temperature probe is fitted as the controller will use this to calculate the superheat in the event of a communication loss with the Mercury Switch. P-17 allows for the use of this remote temperature provided by the Mercury Switch. Please see the Mercury Switch user document (PR0018-PHI) for further details. Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) support added to Mercury E and M. MOP is a remote command sent from the Mercury switch (PR0018-PHI) to the controller to either close or reduce the EEV valve opening when a predetermined pressure is reached. This MOP value is configured in the Mercury switch setup. When the Mercury Switch generates the MOP alarm the controller reduces the maximum valve opening to this percentage. For example if the Div Value parameter is set to 50% and the MOP alarm is generated then the maximum valve opening will be limited to 50%. Therefore as the controller pulses the valve the maximum the valve will open to is 50%. For M controllers the LLV is closed for the MOP alarm duration. Relay State and functional operation Relay 1-3 State Function State Wired contact Relay 1 off Valve / Comp. A on N/C Relay 1 on Valve / Comp. A off N/C Relay 2 off Fans on N/C Relay 2 on Fans off N/C Relay 3 off Lights on N/C Relay 3 on Lights off N/C Relay 3 off Alarm Relay = Alarm N/C Relay 3 on Alarm Relay = OK N/C Relay 4-5 State Function State Wired contact Relay 4 off Suction or Trims off N/O Relay 4 on Suction or Trims on N/O Relay 4 off Alarm Relay = Alarm N/C Relay 4 on Alarm Relay = OK N/C Relay 4 off Compressor B off N/O Relay 4 on Compressor B on N/O Relay 5 off Defrost control off N/O Relay 5 on Defrost control on N/O Relay and screen states during defrost State: Pump Defrost Min Defrost Max Drain Down Fan Delay Recovery Down Screen: DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF REC Def LED: On On On Off Off Off RLY 1 LLV Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open RLY 4 Suction Line RLY 4 Trim on in defrost RLY 4 Trim off in defrost On On Off On On Off On On Off On On Off Off On Off Off On On RLY 5 Defrost Relay Off On On Off Off Off RLY 3 Lights relay On On On On On On RLY 2 Fans (On in DF) On On On On Off On RLY 2 Fans (Off in DF) Off Off Off Off Off On Revision 1.0 Page 15 of 26

392 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Defrost Type (P-91) If P-91 is set to gas, compressor 1 is switched on for the duration of the defrost cycle. Defrost Termination Defrost termination will be when the temperature parameter "def terminate" has been reached on the "defrost termination" probe. If the "defrost termination" probe is not fitted, defrost termination will occur when: - Or The "coil in" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "off during defrost") The "air off" probe reaches the set point (If fans are selected as "on during defrost") If the "coil in" probe is not fitted, the "air off" probe will be used. If the air off probe is faulty termination will occur when the time-out period has elapsed. Fan Delay after Defrost The fans will come back on when: - The fan delay time has elapsed if the "fan delay mode" is set to time Or If the fan delay mode is set to "temp", the fans will come on when the defrost termination probe reaches the fan delay set point, or on the time parameter, whichever occurs first. If the "defrost termination" probe is not fitted, the fans will come on when: - Or The "coil in" probe reaches the control set point (If fans are selected as "off during defrost") The "air off" probe reaches the control set point (If fans are selected as "on during defrost") Network Configuration The final section to setup is the network address. In all instances, this must be done before the controller is plugged into the site network. The controllers have an auto-initialise function, which will automatically log the device onto the site network. If the wrong address has been entered onto the network, you will have to reset the controller address by setting the address to 00-0, and then re-enter the correct address. (You may have to deregister the wrong address from the home system as well). When logging a Mercury or Intuitive Mercury with an RS232 interface onto a network you must first connect the controller to a communications module, this is either a 485 Legacy, RDM Wireless Mesh system, IP Futura or Mercury Switch. When using an Intuitive Mercury controller, the controller has to have the correct network card fitted (see compatible network interfaces ). For connection to a Mercury Switch (Hub) or an external network interface, the standard fitment RS232 network card is utilized. RS485 Legacy module / Intuitive Internal RS485 Network card Connecting an RS485 legacy Module or an Intuitive Internal RS485 network card to the controller will govern which set up screens are made available. Both modules support the Genus protocol only. Display 485t 485A gadd rlog CLrA ESC Option 485 Network Type 485 Address/Name Show underlying network address assigned to controller Re-log the controller back onto the network Clear the address/name from the controller Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu The 485t option shows a value representing the network type. The possible values are: Value Network Type 1 Genus compatible (all versions) 2 RDM Wireless Mesh System (Wireless Mesh) The 485A option shows a value representing either the name of the controller in a Genus compatible or Wireless Mesh network. Wireless Mesh Communication Module RDM Wireless Mesh System, please refer to the RDM Wireless Mesh Communication Module user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a Wireless Mesh network. The value shown in 485A is of the form This means the controller would try to log onto a Genus compatible or RDM Wireless Mesh network using the name RC05-6. The gadd option displays (in hexadecimal format) the underlying network address assigned to the controller when it was logged onto the network. The rlog option allows the controller to be logged back onto the network with its current name. The rlog message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Fast Network Address Reset The CLrA option will clear out the network address and name in the controller. The ClrA message will flash for confirmation. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. Revision 1.0 Page 16 of 26

393 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide To enter this mode, hold the Enter, Up and Down buttons together for approximately 3 seconds until the message CLrA appears on the display. CLrA is the first option in the menu consisting of the following options: Display Option CLrA Clear the address/name from the controller ESC Exit Setup mode Pressing the Enter button to select the CLrA option will cause the CLrA message to flash for confirmation, if the network type is set to Genus compatible. Press the Enter button to execute the command, Up or Down buttons to cancel. If the network type is not set to Genus compatible then the ClrA message will not flash and the ESC option can be used to exit the menu. IP Futura module / Intuitive Internal IP Network card In an IP system there are two options, IP-L IP-r IP-L allows you to fix an IP address into the controller, which you would use when you are connecting the controllers onto a customer s local area network. This would allow the customer to view each controller using Internet Explorer IP-r allows you to give each controller on the system a unique number. This number is then allocated a dynamic IP address by the system DHCP server (such as the RDM Data Manager or Data Director) IP-L To configure the communication module or network card for IP-L, set all three rotary switches to zero. The module should then be connected to the controller. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the controller should be powered off, all three rotary switches set to zero and the controller powered on. 1. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-L, press enter You can now set the address using the table below Display Option IP-1 IP Address byte 1 IP-2 IP Address byte 2 IP-3 IP Address byte 3 IP-4 IP Address byte 4 nl Network Mask Length gt-1 Gateway Address byte 1 gt-2 Gateway Address byte 2 gt-3 Gateway Address byte 3 gt-4 Gateway Address byte 4 ESC Exit network menu. N.B. this option must be selected to save any changes made in this menu IP-r To configure the communication module for IP-r, set the three rotary switches to give each controller a unique identifier. The module should then be connected to the controller and the network. In the case of an Intuitive Mercury controller where the network card is already fitted, the three rotary switches must be set when the controller is powered off, the controller should then be powered on to connect to the network. 2. net. From the function menu you can now select net Press enter and the display will show IP-r, press enter You can now view only the address given by the DHCP server To ease setup, a single network mask length value is used. If the address has been specified with a network mask value in dotted IP format e.g then the table below gives the conversion: Mask Length Mask Length Mask Length Mercury Switch Please refer to the Mercury Switch user guide, which can be obtained from the RDM website, for information regarding connecting a controller to a network. Revision 1.0 Page 17 of 26

394 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Viewing Apart from setting up the controller, you can also view the status of the inputs and outputs and controller states. From the function menu, select I/O, press enter. You can now scroll through the IO table as set out below. Inputs and outputs that do not apply to a particular controller type will be greyed out. Input / Output Table Number IO Range* o C ( o F ) Step Units M Type 1&2 M Type 3&4 M Type 5&6 E Type 3&4 I-01 Control Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-02 Display temp -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-03 Air on Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-04 Air off Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-05 Evaporator Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-06 Suction Line Probe -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-07 Superheat -30 to 60 (-54 to 108) 0.1 Deg I-08 Logging Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-09 Defrost Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-10 Plant Fault (1) 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-11 Case Clean 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-12 Door Sensor 0 (Closed), 1 (Open) I-13 Person Trapped 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) I-14 Plant Fault 2 (Integral) 0 (OK), 1 (Alarm) External Defrost (EEV) 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-15 Monitor Probe -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg I-17 MOP 0 (Off), 1 (On) I-18 External Defrost 0 (Off), 1 (On) (Mechanical Valve) Hub Trim Level (EEV) 0 to % I-19 Divide Input 0 to % O-01 Liquid Line Valve 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-02 Suction Line Valve 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-03 Compressor A 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-04 Compressor B 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-05 Defrost Control 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-06 Lights 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-07 Case Fans 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-09 EEV Opening 0 to % O-10 Last Def. Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-11 Last Def. Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-12 Last Def. Ctrl Temp. -42 to 60 (-43.6 to 140) 0.1 Deg O-13 Last Def. Type 0 (None), 1 (Internal), 2 (External), 3 (Network), 4 (Display), 5 (Timed) O-14 Suction Line Valve/Trim 0 (Open/Off), 1 (Closed/On) Heaters O-15 Alarm Relay (Relay3) 0 (Unused), 1 (OK), 2 (Alarm) O-16 Alarm Relay (Relay4) 0 (Unused), 1 (OK), 2 (Alarm) O-17 Remote Relay (Relay 4) 0 (Off), 1 (On) O-18 Run Time K Hours 1 O-20 Door Open Time 00:00 to 23:59 hh:mm O-21 Door Open Length 00:00 to 03:00 hh:mm O-30 Set Point Offset -49 to 60 (-56.2 to 140) 0.1 Deg. O-31 Trim Off Period 00:00 to 05:00 00:01 mm:ss S-01 Control State 0 (Stabilise),1 (Normal), 2 (Defrost Min), 3 (Defrost Max), 4 (Drain Down), 5 (Fan Delay), 6 (Recovery), 7 (OT Alarm), 8 (UT Alarm), 9 (Fans Only), 10 (Lights Only), 11 (Case Off),12 (Pump Down), 13 (Defrost Hold) * Range is dependent on probe type E Type 5&6 Revision 1.0 Page 18 of 26

395 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Maximum and Minimum Control Temperature Type M only (Not supported in type E). To view the maximum or minimum Control Temperature the controller has reached since last power off/on press and hold the Up and Down Buttons together for 3 seconds. The display will show disp, press the Up Button to view the maximum Control Temperature the controller has reached or press the Down Button to view the minimum Control Temperature the controller has reached. Display will revert back to normal operation if the Enter Button is pressed or after 1 minute of no button presses. The top bar of the left hand segment will be lit when the maximum temperature is being displayed. The bottom bar of the left hand segment will be lit when the minimum temperature is being displayed. Resetting the controller will clear out these values. Alarm Messages The following alarms and messages can appear on the Mercury display. Display Message Ft Prb1 Prb2 Prb3 Prb4 Prb5 Prb6 rec def AL System status Control Fault Probe 1 Fault Probe 2 Fault Probe 3 Fault Probe 4 Fault Probe 5 Fault Probe 6 Fault Control State in Recovery Control Sate in Defrost Control State in Alarm Display Message FAnS ONLy LitS ONLy CASE OFF Ot Ut door TrAP PLnt LgOt LgUt System status Controller in Fans Only Controller in Lights Only Controller in Case Off Over Temperature Alarm Under Temperature Alarm Door Open Alarm Person Trapped Alarm Plant Fault Log Probe Over Temperature Log Probe Under Temperature Network Alarms The table below shows the text and associated type number that is sent to the system "front end". The type number is normally used to provide different alarm actions. Alarm text Type # (index) Missed defrost 15 Plant Fault 1 3 Case over temperature 4 Case under temperature 5 Probe 1,2,3,4,5 or 6 Faulty 6 Door Left Open 2 Alarm text Type # (index) Product over temperature 8 Product under temperature 9 Person Trapped 1 Plant Fault 2 3 Monitor Probe OT 12 Case Off 29 Modifying controller states During normal operation you can change the following states from the function menu Fans Only FAnS Selecting the Fans Only option will put the controller into the Fans Only state if the current state is not Fans Only. If the current state is Fans Only then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show FAnS OnLy If a remote display with key switch is being used, this function can be invoked by turning the key switch to the fans only position (90 degrees clockwise) with parameter P85 set to "fans" Case Off CASE Selecting the Case Off option will put the controller into the Case Off state if the current state is not Case Off. If the current state is Case Off then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show CASE OFF. An alarm is generated, fixed delay of 1 minute, when the controller is placed into the Case Off state. If a remote display with key switch is being used, this function can be invoked by turning the key switch to the case-off position. (Clockwise 90 degrees) with parameter P85 set to "case". Lights Only LitS Selecting the Lights Only option will put the controller into the Lights Only state if the current state is not Lights Only. If the current state is Lights Only then the controller will change to the Normal state. Selecting this option will exit the setup menu automatically. The display will show LitS OnLy Note. When lights are being used in Remote mode with a timing channel: - If the controller goes offline, the lights are turned ON after a delay of 5 minutes. The lights will stay on until the controller comes back online where they will revert to the state of the timing channel being used. Revision 1.0 Page 19 of 26

396 Mercury 2 & Intuitive Mercury M/E Installation Guide Probe Offset This feature allows each probe value to be modified by an offset. Offset values are from -10 O C (-18 O F) to +10 O C (+18 O F) and on a channel basis. Example C1 = Probe 1. Remote Commands The following commands can be used by a Data Builder program: - Command Value to send Description Conditions Defrost Command 1 Initiates a defrost cycle Defrost mode: remote Defrost Command 3 Terminates the defrost Defrost mode: remote Defrost hold: On Defrost min state complete Trim Command 0 to 100% Sets the trim level to this value (Trim period is 5 Relay 4 mode: Trim Heater minutes) Setpoint Command ±20 O C (±34 O F) Is added to or subtracted from the setpoint Case Off Command 5 Sets the controller to Case Off 0 Haccp Command Button Command Restores the controller from Case Off to Normal HACCP LED OFF HACCP LED On HACCP LED Flashes Buttons backlights Off Buttons backlights On Buttons Backlights Flash EEV Command 2 Shuts the valve off 1 Restores the valve to normal operation Divider Command 0 to 100% Sets the maximum valve opening to this percentage. Use an Analogue Out block configured to the controller name and in the value field type in the command you require. Use a Setting block as the input to the Analogue Out block to send the Value. See Example on the right, which sets the Trim Heater on BY10-1 at 40% Revision 1.0 Page 20 of 26